Alfawiki.nl

Alfawiki.nl

001-045 Alfa 159 GB

4-06-2008

9:38

Pagina 1

Dear Customer,
thank you for choosing Alfa Romeo.
Your Alfa 159 has been designed to guarantee the safety, comfort and driving pleasure typical of
Alfa Romeo.
This booklet will help you to get to know the characteristics and operation of your car.
The following pages contain all the indications necessary for you to be able to maintain the high standards of performance, quality, safety and respect for the environment which characterize this Alfa 159.
The enclosed Warranty Booklet also contains the regulations, the warranty certificate and a guide to the services offered by Alfa Romeo.
Services which are essential and precious because, when you purchase an Alfa Romeo you are not only acquiring acar, but the tranquillity that comes from knowing that an efficient, willing and widespread organization is at your service for any assistance problems you may have.
Have a good trip.

This booklet describes all the versions of the Alfa 159, so you should only consider the information concerning the trim level, engine and version purchased by you.

Alfawiki.nl

001-045 Alfa 159 GB

4-06-2008

9:38

Pagina 2

MUST BE READ!
REFUELLINGKPetrol engines: only refuel with unleaded petrol with octane rating (RON) not less than 95.
Diesel engines: only refuel with diesel fuel conforming to the European specification EN590. The use ofother products or mixtures may irreparably damage the engine with invalidation of the warranty due to thedamage caused.

ENGINE STARTING
Petrol engines: ensure that the handbrake is up, fully press the clutch pedal, without pressing the accelerator, put
the gear lever neutral, fit the electronic key into the ignition device to stop limit, briefly press the START/STOP button.
Diesel engines: ensure that the handbrake is up, fully press the clutch pedal, without pressing the accelerator, put
the gear lever neutral, fit the electronic key down into the ignition device until it stops. The instrument panel warning
light m will turn on, wait for the warning light m to turn off. The hotter the engine is, the quicker this will happen,
briefly press the START/STOP button as soon as the warning light m turns on.

PARKING ON FLAMMABLE MATERIALWhile working, the catalyst develops a very high temperature. Do not park the car over grass, dry leaves, pineneedles or any other inflammable materials: risk of fire.

RESPECTING THE ENVIRONMENT
A system for continuously monitoring emission system components to ensure greater environmental protection is fitted in your car.

Alfawiki.nl

001-045 Alfa 159 GB

4-06-2008

9:38

Pagina 3

ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES쇵

If, after buying the car, you decide to add electrical accessories (that will gradually drain the battery), contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services. They can calculate the overall electrical requirement and check that the car’s electric system can support the required load.

CODE CARD (for version/markets where applicable)
Keep the code card in a safe place, not in the car.

SCHEDULED SERVICING
Correct maintenance of the car is essential for ensuring it stays in tip-top condition and safeguards its safety features, its environmental friendliness and low running costs for a long time to come.

THE OWNER’S MANUAL CONTAINS…
…information, tips and important warnings regarding the safe, correct driving of your car, and its maintenance. Pay particular attention to the symbols " (personal safety) # (environmental protection) â (car well-beAlfawiki.nling).

001-045 Alfa 159 GB

4-06-2008

9:38

Pagina 4

Any queries concerning servicing should be forwarded to the showroom from which the car was purchased, the subsidiary company or to our branch offices or any point of the Alfa Romeo Network.
Warranty Booklet
The Warranty Booklet is delivered together with every new car and contains the regulations tied to the services given by Alfa Romeo Services and to the warranty conditions.
Correctly carrying out the scheduled services specified by the manufacturer is the best way to maintain the performance, safety characteristics and low running costs of your car. It is also necessary to maintain warranty cover.

“Service” guideThis contains the Alfa Romeo Authorized Services. The services can be recognized by the presence of the Alfa Romeobadge and logo.
The Alfa Romeo organization in Italy can be found in the telephone book under the letter “A” Alfa Romeo.
Not all the models described in this booklet are available in all countries. Only some of the fittings described in thisbooklet are fitted as standard to the car. The list of available accessories should be requested from the Alfa Romeo
Dealers.

Alfawiki.nl

001-045 Alfa 159 GB

4-06-2008

9:38

Pagina 5

THE SYMBOLS USED IN THIS BOOKLET
The symbols illustrated in these pages show the subjects which should,
in particular, be closely studied.

PERSONAL
SAFETYPROTECTING THE
ENVIRONMENT

Warning: partially or
fully ignoring these rules may leadto serious injury.

This indicates the correct procedures
to be followed to preventthe car from damaging the environment.

CAR SAFETY

Warning: partially or fully ignoring theserules may lead to serious damage
being caused to the car which, in somecircumstances, may cause forfeiture of thewarranty cover.

The texts, illustrations and specifications given in this booklet refer to the car at the time of going to press.
As part of our ongoing striving to improve our products, Alfa Romeo may introduce technical changes during production, therefore the specifications and fittings may be altered without prior notice.
For details on this subject, please apply to the manufacturer's sales network.

Alfawiki.nl

4-06-2008

9:38

Pagina 6

7

INSTRUMENT PANEL .........................................

8

SYMBOLS .......................................................

9

ALFA ROMEO CODE SYSTEM ...............................

9

ELECTRONIC KEY ..............................................

11

ALARM ...........................................................

17

IGNITION DEVICE...............................................

19

INSTRUMENTS..................................................

21

MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY ...................................

25

RECONFIGURABLE MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY..........

30

SEATS ............................................................

45

HEAD RESTRAINTS.............................................

48

STEERING WHEEL .............................................

49

REARVIEW MIRRORS .........................................

50

CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM ...............................

53

MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM ...................

55

AUTOMATIC TWO-/THREE-ZONE
CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM ...............................

58

ADDITIONAL HEATER .........................................

69

INDEX

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCY

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARD ....................................................

CORRECT USE
OF THE CARDASHBOARD AND CONTROLSWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

001-045 Alfa 159 GB

EXTERNAL LIGHTS .............................................
WINDOW WASHING .........................................

6

70

CRUISE CONTROL ............................................. 76
CEILING LIGHTS ................................................ 78
CONTROLS ....................................................... 81
INTERIOR FITTINGS............................................ 83
SUNROOF ........................................................ 93
DOORS ........................................................... 96
POWER WINDOWS ........................................... 99
BOOT .............................................................. 101
BONNET .......................................................... 105
ROOF RACK/SKI RACK ...................................... 106
HEADLIGHTS..................................................... 106
ABS SYSTEM ................................................... 108
VDC SYSTEM ................................................... 110
EOBD SYSTEM ................................................. 115
SOUND SYSTEM PRESETTING.............................. 116
ACCESSORIES PURCHASED BY THE OWNER .......... 116
INSTALLATION OF ELECTRIC/ELECTRONIC DEVICES .. 117
PARKING SENSORS ........................................... 118
TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM(T.P.M.S.) ........................................................ 122
AT THE FILLING STATION .................................... 125

Alfawiki.nl
PROTECTING THE ENVIRONMENT ........................ 127
73

001-045 Alfa 159 GB

4-06-2008

9:38

Pagina 7

A0E0056m

1. Adjustable swivel side air vents - 2. Front side window demisting/defrosting vents - 3. External lights control lever - 4. Instrument panel - 5. Driver’s air bag and horn - 6. Windscreen wiper control lever - 7. Upper central vent - 8. Adjustable swivel centre air vents - 9. Fuel level gauge/engine coolant temperature gauge/engine oil temperature gauge (petrol versions)or turbocharger pressure gauge (diesel versions) - 10. Passenger’s air bag - 11. Passenger’s knees air bag (where provided) - 12. Glove box - 13. Sound system (where provided) - 14. Heating/ventilation/climate controls - 15. Engine
START/STOP button - 16. Ignition device - 17. Driver’s knees air bag - 18. Sound system controls on the steering
wheel (where provided) - 19. Cruise Control lever (where provided) - 20. Bonnet opening lever - 21. Dashboard fusebox
lid - 22. Switches for external lights, trip meter reset andAlfawiki.nl
headlamp aiming device.

INDEX

fig. 1TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING LIGHTS CORRECT USE
AND MESSAGES OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLSDASHBOARD

7

4-06-2008

9:38

Pagina 8

INSTRUMENT PANEL

A. Speedometer (speed indicator)
B. Warning lights - C. Rev counter D. Multifunction display
h c m Warning lights ondiesel versions only
On diesel versions the rev counterend scale value is at 6000 rpm.

fig. 2 - Versions with multifunction display

A0E0312m

INDEX

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING LIGHTS CORRECT USE
AND MESSAGES OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

001-045 Alfa 159 GB

8

A. Speedometer (speed indicator)
B. Warning lights - C. Rev counter D. Reconfigurable multifunction display
c m Warning lights on diesel
versions only
On diesel versions the rev counterend scale value is at 6000 rpm.

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 3 - Versions
with reconfigurable multifunction display

A0E0422m

To further protect you car from theft, it
has been fitted with an engine immobilising system. This system is automatically activated when the electronic
key is removed.

The plate summarising the symbols used
fig. 4 can be found under the bonnet.

A0E0138m

INDEX

fig. 4

An electronic device, in fact, is fitted ineach electronic key grip. The device
transmits a radio-frequency signal whenthe engine is started through a special
aerial built into the ignition switch on thedashboard. The modulated signal, whichchanges each time the engine is started, is the “password”, by means ofwhich the control unit recognises theelectronic key and enables to start theengine.

SAFETYDEVICESSpecial coloured labels have been attached near or actually on some of thecomponents of your car. These labelsbear symbols that remind you of the precautions to be taken as regards that particular component.

CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

ALFA ROMEO
CODE SYSTEMSYMBOLSDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 9

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES

9:38

IN AN
EMERGENCY

4-06-2008

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

001-045 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
94-06-2008

9:38

Pagina 10

Each time the electronic key is fitted into the ignition switch, the Alfa Romeo
CODE system control unit sends a recognition code to the engine control unit
to deactivate the inhibitor.
The code is sent only if the Alfa Romeo
CODE system control unit has recognised
the code transmitted from the electronic key.

INDEX

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESSAFETYDEVICESOPERATION

CORRECT USE
OF THE CARDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

001-045 Alfa 159 GB

10

If the code has not been recognised correctly, the warning light Y turns on (oncertain versions a dedicated message
is displayed) (see section “Warning
lights and messages”).
In this case, the electronic key should
be removed from the ignition device andthen refitted; if the lock continues, possibly try again with the other keys provided with the car. If it is still not possible to start the car contact Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services

Warning light Y coming on
when driving
If the warning light Y turns on thismeans that the system is running a selftest (for example for a voltage drop).

The electronic components inside the key may
be damaged if the key issubmitted to sharp knocks.

If the warning light Y stays on, contact
Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
IMPORTANT Every electronic key has
its own code, which must be memorisedby the system control unit. To memorise
new keys, up to a maximum of eight,
apply solely to Alfa Romeo Authorized
Services taking with you all the keys inyour possession, the CODE card, a personal identity document and the car’s
possession documents. The codes of thekeys not provided during the new memorising procedure are erased from thememory. This is to ensure that any lostor stolen keys can no longer be used
to start the car.

Alfawiki.nl

If 2 seconds after fitting
the electronic key into
the ignition switch, thewarning light Y comes on again
flashing (on certain versions a
dedicated message is displayed), this means that thecode of the keys has not been
memorised, thus the car is notprotected by the Alfa Romeo
CODE system against attempted theft. In this case, contact an
Alfa Romeo Authorized Service
to have the key codes memorised.

Pagina 11

DASHBOARDAND
CONTROLSELECTRONIC KEY

The code numbers on the CODE card
must be kept in a safe place, not in thecar.

If the car changes owner, the new owner mustbe given the electronic
key and the CODE card.

A0E0023m

fig. 5

ELECTRONIC KEY fig. 6
The car is delivered with two copies of
the key with remote control.
The electronic key operates the ignition
switch.
Button Á shall be used for central locking of doors, tailgate and fuel cap withalarm activation (where provided).

fig. 6

A0E0021m

Button Ë shall be used for central opening of doors and fuel cap with alarm deactivation (where provided).
Button ` shall be used to open the
tailgate.
When unlocking the doors by pressing
button Ë, if by 2.5 minutes no door or
the boot is opened, the system will automatically lock the car again.

INDEX

The CODE card fig. 5 delivered with thekeys, contains the mechanical code A
and the electronic one B.

SAFETYDEVICESCODE CARD(for versions/markets
where applicable)

WARNING LIGHTS CORRECT USE
AND MESSAGES OF THE CAR

9:38

IN AN
EMERGENCY

4-06-2008

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

001-045 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
11

9:38

Pagina 12

The electronic key fig. 7 is fitted witha metal insert A, that can be extracted
by pressing button B.
❒ central door locking/unlocking
through the driver's door lock (withrun-down car battery only the driver's
door will open);

WARNING

Never leave the electronic key unattended
to prevent anyone, especiallychildren, from holding it andpressing button B-fig. 7 inadvertently.

The metal insert operates the following:❒ windows opening/closing;❒ switch (where provided) for deactivating the passenger’s air bag andknees air bag (where provided);❒ safe-lock device (where provided);❒ emergency unlocking of electronic
key from ignition switch.

A0E0022m

fig. 7IMPORTANT Never expose the electronic key to direct sunlight: risk of damages.
IMPORTANT Remote control frequency may be disturbed by radio transmissions outside the car (e.g. mobile
phones, hams, etc…). In this event remote control may be failing.

INDEX

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING LIGHTS CORRECT USE
AND MESSAGES OF THE CARDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

4-06-2008

SAFETYDEVICES

001-045 Alfa 159 GB

12

Alfawiki.nl

4-06-2008

9:38

Pagina 13

Replacing the battery of theelectronic key

To change the battery fig. 9 proceed
as follows:

If when pressing button Ë, Á, or `,control given is refused or failing, thebattery should be replaced with anequivalent one that can be purchased atcommon stores.

❒ take out the metal insert A by pressing button B;

To be sure that the battery is to be replaced, try again to press buttons Ë,Á, or ` with another electronic key.
When closing the tailgate again, protection sensors are restored and direction indicators will flash once.

❒ remove the snap-fitted case Bfig. 10 (red) by levering with themetal insert A of the electronic key
in the point shown in the figure;❒ remove the battery D-fig. 9 fromthe case taking note of the bias (inthe figure the positive pole is facing
downwards);❒ put the new battery into the casewith the correct bias;❒ put the case down into its seat andrefit the metal insert.

fig. 10

A0E0242m

IMPORTANT Never touch the electriccontacts of the key and prevent fluid or
dust infiltration inside it.

Used batteries areharmful to the environment. They should be
disposed of as specified by law
in the special containers provided, or take them to Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services
which will deal with their disposal.

IN AN
EMERGENCY

A0E0035m

fig. 9TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

A0E0021m

INDEX

fig. 8WARNING LIGHTS CORRECT USE
AND MESSAGES OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

001-045 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
13

4-06-2008

9:38

Pagina 14

SAFE LOCK DEVICE(where provided)
This safety system inhibits the operationof the car door handles.
The safe lock device represents top protection against break in attempts. Activate it each time you park the car.

WARNING

Once the safe lock device has been actuated,
doors cannot be opened frominside the car in any way
whatsoever. For this reason,
make sure there are no persons left inside the car.
WARNING

If the key battery isflat, the safe lock device can only be deactivated byunlocking the doors by turning
the metal insert of the key into the driver’s door lock or by
fitting the key into the ignition
device.

INDEXTECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING LIGHTS CORRECT USE
AND MESSAGES OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

001-045 Alfa 159 GB

14

Alfawiki.nl

WARNING

If the car battery isdown, the safe lock device can be activated only using the metal insert of theelectronic key on the driver’s
door revolving plug: in thiscase the safe lock device is active on front passenger’s door
and rear doors.

fig. 11

Pagina 15

A0E0021m

Device activation
The device is automatically activated on
every door in the following cases:

Device activation is signalled by three
flashes of the led on the driver’s door
panel and, only if activated by pressing
the electronic key button Á, of direction
indicators.

Device deactivation

Should one of the doors be not perfectly closed, the safe lock device is not activated, thus preventing that a person
getting into the car from the open door
remains blocked inside the passenger’s
compartment when he/she closes thedoor.

❒ when unlocking only the driver’s door
(where possible);❒ when unlocking the doors;❒ when fitting the electronic key into
the ignition switch.

IN AN
EMERGENCY❒ turning twice the metal insert of theelectronic key into the driver door tolocking position;

The device is deactivated automaticallyon every door in the following cases:

DASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

9:38

SAFETYDEVICES

4-06-2008

WARNING LIGHTS CORRECT USE
AND MESSAGES OF THE CAR

001-045 Alfa 159 GBINDEXTECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE❒ pressing twice the electronic key button Á.

Alfawiki.nl
15

WARNING LIGHTS CORRECT USE
AND MESSAGES OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCYINDEXTECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

16

4-06-2008

9:38

Pagina 16

The main functions that can be activated with the electronic key or with the emergency metals insert are the following:
Doors,
tailgateand fuel cap
unlockingDoors,
tailgateand fuel cap
locking

Windowand sunroof
opening(whereprovided)Windowand sunroof
closing(whereprovided)

Safe lock(whereprovided)

Tailgate
opening

Electronic
key

Brief press on
button Ë (*)

Brief press on
button Á

Prolonged
pressing(over 2 seconds)
on button Ë–Double pressing(within 1 second)on button Á

Brief press on
button `Emergency
metal
insertElectronic key
rotationclockwise (*)

Electronic key
rotationcounter-clockwise

Electronic key
rotationfor over2 seconds
clockwise

Direction
indicators
flashing

2 flashings

1 flashing

2 flashings

Led ondriver’s door

Deterrence
led off

Turning on fixedfor 3 seconds,
followed bydeterrence led
flashing

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

001-045 Alfa 159 GB

Electronic key Double electronicrotationkey rotationfor overwithin 1
2 seconds
secondcounter-clockwise counter-clockwise
1 flashing

Deterrence led off Turning on fixed
for about
3 seconds,
followed bydeterrence led
flashing–

3 flashings

2 flashings

Doubleflashing,
followed bydeterrence led
flashing–(*) On certain versions it is possible to set the option “Unlocking front door only” through the “Setup Menu” (see paragraph “Reconfigurable multifunction
display” in this section). In this case pressing button Á and turning the metal insert of the electronic key counter-clockwise will unlock the driver’s door
only. To unlock all the doors, press twice button Ë within 1 second or turn twice the metal insert of the electronic key counter-clockwise.
Alfawiki.nl
IMPORTANT Window and sunroof opening operations are a consequenceof a door unlocking control. Window and sunroof closing operations are a consequence of a door locking control.

Pagina 17

The alarm comes into action in the following cases:❒ unlawful opening of doors, bonnet
and boot (perimetral protection);❒ attempt to start the engine withunauthorised electronic key;
❒ battery cable cutting;❒ presence of moving bodies in the passenger’s compartment (volumetricprotection);❒ abnormal raising/sloping of the car(for versions/markets where applicable);
Volumetric and anti-raising protections
can be cut off by operating the front ceiling light controls(see paragraph “Volumetric protection/Anti-raising sensor”
on the following pages).

A maximum number of sound/sight cycles is however envisaged. Once thealarm cycle is over, the system will restore its normal operation.
IMPORTANT Central door unlocking
by the emergency electronic key will notdeactivate the alarm, therefore withalarm on the siren will activate when
opening one of the doors or the boot.
To deactivate the siren see paragraph“How to deactivate the alarm”.
IMPORTANT The engine immobiliser
function is guaranteed by the Alfa
Romeo CODE system, which is automatically activated when the electronic
key is removed from the ignition device.

DASHBOARDAND
CONTROLSSAFETYDEVICES

WHEN THE ALARM
IS TRIGGERED

Depending on the markets, the triggering of the alarm will activate the siren
and the hazard warning lights (for about
26 seconds). The methods of operationand the number of cycles may vary depending on the versions/markets.

fig. 12

A0E0025m

HOW TO ACTIVATETHE ALARM
With the doors, bonnet and boot shutand electronic key removed from ignition switch, point the electronic key inthe direction of the car, then press andrelease the button Á.
With the exception of certain markets,
the system sounds a “beep” and thedoors are locked.
Engagement of the alarm is precededby a self-diagnostic test characterised bya different flashing of the round led located around the door lock/unlock button (see fig. 12): if a fault is detected the system sounds a further warning“beep”.

WARNING LIGHTS CORRECT USE
AND MESSAGES OF THE CAR

ALARM(where provided)

IN AN
EMERGENCY

9:38

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

4-06-2008

INDEX

001-045 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
17

INDEXTECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING LIGHTS CORRECT USE
AND MESSAGES OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

001-045 Alfa 159 GB

18

4-06-2008

9:38

Pagina 18

Surveillance
When the system has been turned on,
the led A-fig. 12 will flash to indicatethat the system is in the surveillance
mode. The led will flash continuously
while the system is under surveillance.
IMPORTANT Operation of the alarmis adapted at the origin to the regulations of the different countries.
Self-diagnosis and monitoringof doors/bonnet/bootIf, after the alarm has been activated, asecond acoustic signal is heard, turn thesystem off by pressing button Ë, checkfor proper locking of doors, bonnet andboot, then turn the system on again bypressing button Á.
Otherwise if a door or bonnet/boot lid
is not correctly closed it will not be controlled by the system. If the control signal is repeated when the doors and bonnet/boot are closed properly this meansthat the self-diagnosis function has detected a system operating fault, in whichcase it is necessary to contact Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services.

HOW TO DEACTIVATETHE ALARM
Press button Ë. The system will react asfollows (with the exception of certain
markets):❒ two brief flashes of the direction indicators;❒ two brief “beeps”;❒ door unlocking.
The alarm can be deactivated by fitting
the electronic key into the ignition
switch.
IMPORTANT On certain versions any
attempt to break in detected by the system will be indicated by a warning message on the instrument panel display
when fitting the electronic key into theignition switch.

fig. 13

A0E0480m

VOLUMETRIC PROTECTION/
ANTI-RAISING SENSORS
To make sure that the protection sensors
are working properly, check that windows and sunroof (where provided) are
shut.
This function can be cut out (for example if you leave animals on the car) bypressing button A-fig. 13 on the front
ceiling light within 1 minute after instrument panel turning off.
When this function is off the button led
will turn on. Volumetric protection/antiraising sensors cut out shall be repeatedat each instrument panel turning off.

Alfawiki.nl

IGNITION DEVICETo deactivate the alarm system completely (for instance during prolonged
inactivity of the car) simply lock the carby rotating the metal insert (provided
inside the electronic key) into the driver’s door lock.

The ignition device is located on thedashboard and it consists of the following:

In keeping with the laws in force in eachcountry on the subject of radio frequency, for markets in which the transmitter needs to be marked the certification number is given on the component. For certain versions/markets, thecode may also be marked on the transmitter and/or on the receiver.

❒ electronic key reading device Afig. 14 (set near the steering wheel);❒ button START/STOP (set under theelectronic key reading device).
IMPORTANT To prevent running
down the battery do not leave the electronic key into the ignition device whenthe engine is off.

WARNING

If the ignition device istampered with (for example during an attempted
break-in) have it checked overby Alfa Romeo Authorized Services before travelling again.

A0E0219m

fig. 14WARNING

When leaving the caralways remove theelectronic key from the ignition
device to prevent any passenger in the car from inadvertently activating the controls.
Remember to engage thehandbrake and if the car is facing uphill, first gear and if the
car is facing downhill, reverse.
Never leave children unattended in the car.

INDEXMINISTERIALHOMOLOGATIONSAFETYDEVICESHOW TO CUT OFF
THE ALARM SYSTEMDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 19

WARNING LIGHTS CORRECT USE
AND MESSAGES OF THE CAR

9:38

IN AN
EMERGENCY

4-06-2008

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

001-045 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
19

4-06-2008

9:38

Pagina 20

DASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

001-045 Alfa 159 GBINDEXTURNING THE INSTRUMENTPANEL OFF

Proceed as follows:

With engine off and clutch and brake
pedals released, press button START/STOP or remove the electronic key
from the ignition device.

❒ fit the electronic key into the ignition
device;SAFETYDEVICESWARNING LIGHTS CORRECT USE
AND MESSAGES OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCYTECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

20

TURNING THE INSTRUMENTPANEL ON

fig. 15

A0E0028m

ENGINE STARTING
See paragraph “Engine starting” in section “Correct use of the car”.
START/STOP BUTTON
fig. 15
Button START/STOP, set on thedashboard, controls car electric systems
and engine starting/stopping.
Button START/STOP is fitted withknurled ring and led. When the led andthe instrument panel are on, the engine
can be started.

❒ if the electronic key is fitted yet, press
button START/STOP withoutpressing the clutch or brake pedal.
To safeguard the battery, when leaving
the car with the instrument panel on,electric and electronic devices will be deactivated after approx. 1 hour.
IMPORTANT Fit completely the electronic key into the ignition device until
it locks into place.
IMPORTANT Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services if the instrument panel fails to turn on.
IMPORTANT If when fitting the electronic key into the ignition device, thewarning light Y on the instrument panel comes on (on certain versions together with a message on the display),check whether the electronic key is theproper one and then try to refit it into
the ignition device. If the problem persists contact
Alfa Romeo Authorized SerAlfawiki.nl
vices.

A few seconds after the instrument panel display will turn off gradually.
IMPORTANT Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services if the instrument panel fails to turn off.

The steering column lock will engage
5 seconds after removing the electronic key from the ignition device and if thefollowing conditions are present:❒ engine off;
❒ instrument panel off with car at astandstill;❒ electronic key removed from ignition
device.
Disengaging
The steering column lock will disengage
after fitting the electronic key into theignition device.
IMPORTANT Switching the engine off
when the car is running will not engage
the steering column lock till next switching off with car stopped. In this event
warning light > (where provided) on the
instrument panel will come on (or as analternative, on certain versions, a symbol and a message are displayed).
IMPORTANT Steering column lock
failure is indicated by the instrument
panel warning light > (where provid-

INSTRUMENTS

IMPORTANT If after trying to turn on
the instrument panel and/or to start theengine, the instrument panel warning
light > (where provided) (or as an alternative, on certain versions the message "Vehicle protection system notavailable" is displayed), repeat the operation moving the steering wheel in order to release the steering lock. The displayed warning message will not impair
steering lock operation.

Rev counter shows engine rpm. The redzone at the scale bottom indicates thatthe engine is running at excessive rpm
dangerous for mechanical components.
Do not drive with the pointer in this area.

WARNING

It is absolutely forbidden to carry out whatever after-market operation
involving steering system or
steering column modifications(e.g.: installation of anti-theft
device) that could badly affectperformance and safety, cause
the lapse of warranty and also result in non-compliance ofthe car with homologation requirements.

REV. COUNTERIMPORTANT The electronic injection
control system gradually shuts off theflow of fuel when the engine is “overrevving” (rev counter pointer in the redarea) resulting in a gradual loss of engine power, in order to bring engine rpm
below to the safety limit.
The rev counter may, when the engine
is idling, indicate gradual or sudden increase of engine revs as the case maybe; such behaviour is normal and mustnot be interpreted as a faulty condition
as it occurs during normal operation, forinstance when climate control or electric
fan are switched on. In particular, slow
revs variation helps keep the battery
charged.

SAFETYDEVICESEngaginged) (or as an alternative, on certain versions, a symbol and a message are displayed). In this event contact Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services.

WARNING LIGHTS CORRECT USE
AND MESSAGES OF THE CARSTEERING COLUMN LOCKDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 21

IN AN
EMERGENCY

9:38

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

4-06-2008

INDEX

001-045 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl

21

001-045 Alfa 159 GB

4-06-2008

9:38

Pagina 22

DASHBOARDAND
CONTROLSENGINE COOLANTTEMPERATURE GAUGE fig. 18

INDEX

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING LIGHTS CORRECT USE
AND MESSAGES OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESThis shows the temperature of the engine coolant fluid and begins working
when the fluid temperature exceeds approx. 50°C.

22

fig. 17

A0E00177m

FUEL GAUGE fig. 17
This shows the amount of fuel left in thefuel tank.
0 - tank empty.
1 - tank full (see the indications given
in paragraph “At the filling station").
The warning light on the fuel level gauge
turns on when about 10 litres fuel areleft in the tank. On certain versions. thedisplay will show a warning message
when the cruising range is less than 50
km (or 31 mi).

If warning light K starts
flashing when travelling
contact immediately Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

A0E0178m

fig. 18

IMPORTANT The pointer can reachthe red area also for a sum of unfavourable conditions, i.e.: slow speed,
uphill, fully laden or towing a trailer with
hot outside temperature.
IMPORTANT Refuelling shall always
be performed with engine off. Failing toobserve this precaution could cause thegauge to provide wrong indications.
Should this occur, to restore proper indication just have next refuelling withthe engine off. Otherwise contact Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services.

Alfawiki.nl

The pointer should normally be towards
the middle of the scale. If the pointerreaches the red sector, reduce your demand on the engine.
The turning on of the warning light u(on certain versions together with amessage on the display) indicates thatthe coolant fluid temperature is too high;in this case, stop the engine and contact
Alfa Romeo Authorized Services .
IMPORTANT The pointer can reachthe red area also for a sum of unfavourable conditions, i.e.: slow speed,
uphill, fully laden or towing a trailer with
hot outside temperature.

4-06-2008

9:38

Pagina 23

fig. 19

A0E0179m

ENGINE OIL
TEMPERATURE GAUGE(petrol versions) fig. 19

fig. 20

A0E0180m

TURBOCHARGER PRESSURE
GAUGE (diesel versions)fig. 20
This shows the turbocharger pressure
value.

IN AN
EMERGENCY

This shows the temperature of the engine oil and begins working when theoil temperature exceeds approx. 70°C.

SAFETYDEVICESIMPORTANT The pointer can reachthe red area also for a sum of unfavourable conditions, i.e.: slow speed,
uphill, fully laden or towing a trailer with
hot outside temperature.

DASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

The turning on of the warning light `when travelling (on certain versions together with a message on the display)
indicates that the oil temperature is toohigh; in this case, stop the engine andcontact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

WARNING LIGHTS CORRECT USE
AND MESSAGES OF THE CAR

001-045 Alfa 159 GBINDEXTECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

If the pointer reaches the red sector, reduce your demand on the engine.

Alfawiki.nl
23

4-06-2008

9:38

Pagina 24

INDEXTECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING LIGHTS CORRECT USE
AND MESSAGES OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

001-045 Alfa 159 GB

24

fig. 21

A0E0072m

TRIP METER RESET fig. 21
To reset the trip meter, keep button A
pressed for a few seconds.

MANUAL INSTRUMENTPANEL LIGHT DIMMERAUTOMATIC INSTRUMENTPANEL LIGHT DIMMERWith this function it is possible to adjuston 8 levels the light intensity of the indications given on the instrument panel display, sound system display (where provided), climate control system display, radionavigation system display (where provided), and instrument panel gauges (fuel level gauge, engine oil temperaturegauge (petrol versions) or supercharger
pressure gauge (diesel versions) and engine coolant temperature gauge).

To give max. visibility and comfort under whatever driving conditions (e.g.:lights on in daylight, tunnels, etc…),
the speedometer is fitted with a sensor
for adjusting automatically, after fitting
the electronic key into the ignition device and pressing button START/STOP, the light intensity of the indications given on the instrument panel
display, sound system display (where
provided), climate control system display, radionavigation system display(where provided), and instrument panel gauges (fuel level gauge, engine oiltemperature gauge (petrol versions) or
supercharger pressure gauge (diesel versions) and engine coolant temperaturegauge).

To increase light intensity press briefly
button + on the left-hand stalk, to reduce it press button –: the display willshow an indication and a figure corresponding to the current light intensity
level. This screen will be displayed fora few seconds and then it will go off.

Alfawiki.nl

INFORMATION ABOUT CAR
CONDITIONS (at event)

MULTIFUNCTIONDISPLAY(where provided)❒ Scheduled servicing (symbol õD-fig. 22).
❒ Instrument panel light dimmer.

The “Multifunction display” shows all
the useful information necessary whendriving, more particularly:
A0E0060m

fig. 22

INFORMATION ON
STANDARD SCREENIN AN
EMERGENCY❒ External temperature B;

A0E0072m

fig. 23

To reset the trip meter (or mi), press forlong button A-fig. 23 during displaying.

INDEX

Fitting the electronic key into the ignition device will display the total km (ormi), press button A-fig. 23 for trip meter (or mi).

❒ Speed limit exceeded.
❒ Engine oil level.

❒ Clock A-fig. 22;❒ Total km (or mi) or trip meter C(when total kilometres (or miles) areindicated the display will also show
the wording TOT).

❒ Symbol of possible presence of ice on
the road (symbol √ E-fig. 22).

DASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 25

SAFETYDEVICES

9:38

WARNING LIGHTS CORRECT USE
AND MESSAGES OF THE CAR

4-06-2008

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

001-045 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
25

INDEXTECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING LIGHTS CORRECT USE
AND MESSAGES OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

001-045 Alfa 159 GB

26

4-06-2008

9:38

Pagina 26“SETUP MENU”

Speed limit (SPEED BEEP)

There is also a “Setup Menu” enablingto perform the adjustments and/or settings described on the following pages
by pressing button MENU and +/–(see fig. 24). The Setup can be activated by pressing briefly button MENU.

With this function it is possible to set the
car speed limit (km/h or mph) which,if exceeded, automatically sounds abuzzer and displays a specific message(see section “Warning lights and messages”) to alert the driver. Once thewarning cycle is over the display will
resume the standard screen. The warning message will disappear only after
the car speed slows 5 km/h (5 mph)
below the set speed limit or after pressing briefly the MENU button. This procedure is carried out just once after exceeding the speed limit and it can be repeated only if the car speed slows at
least 5 km/h (5 mph) below the set
speed limit and then it increases until
exceeding the speed limit again.

With the car stopped, thefollowing settings areenabled:❒ Speed limit on/off and speed limit
value.
❒ Clock.
❒ Failure/warning buzzer volume.
❒ “Distance” unit.
With the car running, only thefollowing setting is enabled:❒ Speed limit on/off and speed limit
value setting.

A0E0074m

fig. 24

CONTROL BUTTONS(set on left stalk) fig. 24
MENU
Short push on button: to confirm
the required option and/or to go to nextscreen;Long push on button: to confirm therequired option and to go back to standard screen;+/– to scroll up/down the “Setup
Menu” options or to increase/decrease
the value displayed on the screen.
When the standard screen is displayed
buttons +/– activate instrument panel light dimming.

Alfawiki.nl

This function enables to adjust the clock.
To adjust the clock proceed as follows:❒ press button MENU until selecting
TIME REG;❒ press again button MENU: TIME
and clock will flash;❒ press buttons +/– to adjust time.
Clock is always displayed in 24h mode
(24 hours).

Failure/warning buzzer
volume (BUZZ)With this function the volume of thebuzzer accompanying any failure/warning indications can be adjusted according to 4 levels. The buzzer can be adjusted and excluded.
Proceed as follows:❒ press button MENU until selecting
BUZZ: the display will show BUZZ
and a figure corresponding to thebuzzer volume level;❒ press again button MENU: the figure will flash;❒ press buttons +/– to adjust thebuzzer volume.
To mute the buzzer set the volume level to “0” using buttons +/–.

SAFETYDEVICESClock (TIME REG)WARNING LIGHTS CORRECT USE
AND MESSAGES OF THE CAR

To set the speed limit, proceed as follows:❒ press button MENU until selectingSPEED BEEP: the display will show
SPEED BEEP and setting condition(ON = speed limit on/ OFF= speed
limit off);❒ press again button MENU: ON (orOFF) will flash;❒ press buttons +/– to select ON orOFF;❒ selecting ON will make the last
speed limit set flashing on the display;❒ press buttons +/– to adjust the value.
IMPORTANT The possible setting is between 30 and 250 km/h (or between
20 and 150 mph) depending on the unit
set previously (see paragraph “Units” described later). Every press (pulse) of the
button +/– increases or decreases thevalue by 5 units. Keeping the button +/–pressed obtains automatic fast increase or
decrease. When you are near the required
setting complete adjustment with single
presses.

DASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 27

IN AN
EMERGENCY

9:38

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

4-06-2008

INDEX

001-045 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
27

4-06-2008

9:38

Pagina 28

Distance unit (UNIT)
With this function it is possible to set therequired distance unit (km or mi).
To set the distance unit, proceed as follows:❒ press button MENU until selecting
UNIT: the display will show UNIT
and “km” or “mi”;❒ press again button MENU: “km”
(or “mi”) will flash;❒ press buttons +/– to set the required distance unit.

Scheduled servicing
IMPORTANT The Service schedule includes car maintenance every 35,000
km (or 21,000 mi); this is shown automatically, with the electronic key into the ignition device starting from
2,000 km (or 1,240 mi) from thisdeadline and it will be displayed in km
or miles according to the unit set. Whena scheduled service interval (“coupon”)
is near to come, fitting the electronic key
into the ignition device will display amessage followed by the number of
km/mi to go before car servicing. Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services tocarry out any service operation provided by the Service schedule or by the Annual inspection plan, and to reset thedisplay.

INDEX

28

ENGINE OIL LEVEL
INDICATION
Fitting the electronic key into the ignition device, the display will show for a
few seconds the engine oil level. At thisstage, to clear this indication and to go
to next screen, press button MENU.
Low oil level will be indicated by a dedicated warning message on the display.
IMPORTANT Check the proper engine oil level on the dipstick (see paragraph “Checking levels” in section “Car
maintenance”).
IMPORTANT Proper engine oil level
shall be checked with the car on levelground.
IMPORTANT To read the correct oillevel after fitting the electronic key, wait
for about 2 seconds before starting theengine.

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING LIGHTS CORRECT USE
AND MESSAGES OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

001-045 Alfa 159 GB

IMPORTANT Engine oil level could increase after a long stop.

Alfawiki.nl

This function enables to turn on/off(ON/OFF) the lights of the rev
counter and instruments.
This function can be activated (only withelectronic key fitted into ignition device,external lights on, and speedometerbuilt-in sensor in poor outside light setting), by pressing for long button –.
When this function is on, the display willshow “NIGHT PAN ON”.

Once on, the NIGHT PAN function
can be deactivated as follows:❒ by long press on button + (also withexternal lights off);❒ removing the electronic key from theignition device.
When this function is off the display
shows “NIGHT PAN OFF”.
Messages “NIGHT PAN ON” or“NIGHT PAN OFF” stay on the display for a few seconds, then they will
go off. To stop displaying before time,briefly press button MENU.

SAFETYDEVICES

After the engine oil level, the display willshow for a few seconds a message indicating the procedure to follow to start
the engine (PRESS PEDAL AND
START: press brake or clutch pedal andthen press button START/STOP tostart the engine).

ILLUMINATION OF REVCOUNTER/INSTRUMENTS(NIGHT PAN)WARNING LIGHTS CORRECT USE
AND MESSAGES OF THE CARMESSAGES DISPLAYEDAT STARTINGDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 29

IN AN
EMERGENCY

9:38

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

4-06-2008

INDEX

001-045 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
29

INDEXTECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING LIGHTS CORRECT USE
AND MESSAGES OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

001-045 Alfa 159 GB

30

4-06-2008

9:38

Pagina 30

INFORMATION ABOUT CAR
CONDITIONS (at event)

RECONFIGURABLE
MULTIFUNCTIONDISPLAY(where provided)
The “Reconfigurable multifunction display” shows all the useful informationnecessary when driving, more particularly:
INFORMATION ON
STANDARD SCREEN❒ Clock A-fig. 24/a;❒ External temperature B;❒ Date C;❒ Partial km (or mi) covered D;❒ Scheduled servicing;❒ Trip computer;❒ Instrument panel light dimmer;❒ Engine oil level;
A0E0015m

fig. 24/a

The date C in the middle of the display
will stay on until another display info isactivated (e.g. “Light dimmer”) or other information on car conditions.
With key removed (when opening whenof the front doors) the display will turnon and show for a few seconds the time,covered km (or miles) and outside temperature.

❒ Total km (or mi) covered E;❒ Indications on car conditions F (e.g.:
doors open, or possible ice on road,etc. ...).

Alfawiki.nl

IMPORTANT When opening one of
the front doors, the display will show fora few seconds the time, the km covered
and the external temperature.

Selecting an option of the main
menu without submenu:

MENU❒ briefly press button MENU to selectthe main menu option to set;
❒ operate buttons + or – (by single
press) to select the new setting;❒ briefly press button MENU to store
new setting and go back to the previously selected option of the mainmenu.

Short push on button: to confirm
the required option and/or to go to nextscreen;+/– to scroll up/down the “Setup
Menu” options or to increase/decrease
the value displayed on the screen.
When the standard screen is displayed
buttons +/– activate instrument panel light dimming.

A0E0074m

fig. 25“SETUP MENU”
There is also a “Setup Menu” enablingto perform the adjustments and/or settings described on the following pages
by pressing button MENU and +/–(see fig. 25).The Setup can be activated by pressing briefly button MENU.
The menu comprises a series of functions arranged in a “circular fashion”
fig. 26.

INDEXLong push on button: to confirm therequired option and/or to go to previous screen;

SAFETYDEVICESCONTROL BUTTONSDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 31

WARNING LIGHTS CORRECT USE
AND MESSAGES OF THE CAR

9:38

IN AN
EMERGENCY

4-06-2008

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

001-045 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
31

4-06-2008

9:38

Pagina 32

Selecting an option of the main
menu with submenu:❒ briefly press button MENU to display
the first submenu option;❒ operate buttons + or – (by single
press) to scroll all submenu options;❒ briefly press button MENU to selectthe displayed submenu option and toenter the corresponding setup menu;❒ operate buttons + or – (by single
press) to select the new setting of thissubmenu option;❒ briefly press button MENU to store
the new setting and go back to thepreviously selected submenu option.

Selecting “Date” and “Clock”:❒ briefly press button MENU to selectthe first value to change (e.g. hours/
minutes or year/month/day);❒ operate buttons + or – (by single
press) to select the new setting;❒ briefly press button MENU to store
the new setting and to go to the next
setup menu option, if this is the last
one you will go back to the previously
selected option of the main menu.

INDEX

32

ENGINE OIL LEVEL
INDICATION
Fitting the electronic key into the ignition device, the display will show for a
few seconds the engine oil level. At thisstage, to clear this indication and to go
to next screen, press button MENU.
Low oil level will be indicated by a dedicated warning message on the display.
IMPORTANT Check the proper engine oil level on the dipstick (see paragraph “Checking levels” in section “Car
maintenance”).
IMPORTANT Proper engine oil level
shall be checked with the car on levelground.
IMPORTANT To read the correct oillevel after fitting the electronic key, wait
for about 2 seconds before starting theengine.

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING LIGHTS CORRECT USE
AND MESSAGES OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

001-045 Alfa 159 GB

IMPORTANT Engine oil level could increase after a long stop.

Alfawiki.nl

Pagina 33

SPEED LIMIT

LIGHT SENS.

RESET TRIP B
CLOCK

SERVICEIN AN
EMERGENCYQUIT SETUPWARNING LIGHTS CORRECT USE
AND MESSAGES OF THE CAR

Briefly press button MENU to access navigation from the standard screen. To surf the menu press buttons + or –. For safety reasons, when the car is running, it is possible to access only the reduced menu (for setting “Speed limit”). When the car is stationary
access to the whole menu is enabled. With the Radionavigation system it is only possible to adjust/set the following functions: “Speed
Limit”, “Light sensor sensitivity ” (where provided) and “S.B.R. buzzer reactivation” (where provided). The other functions are shownon the Radionavigation system display, that shall be use to adjust/set them as required.

MODE 12/24

KEYS VOL.

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

DATE

BEEP VOL.

AUDIO RPT.
INDEP. BOOT

LANGUAGEUNITSDOOR LOCKUNLOCK FDA

A0E0218g

fig. 26DASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

9:38

SAFETYDEVICES

4-06-2008

INDEX

001-045 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
33

INDEXTECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING LIGHTS CORRECT USE
AND MESSAGES OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

001-045 Alfa 159 GB

34

4-06-2008

9:38

Pagina 34

Speed limit
With this function it is possible to set the
car speed limit (km/h or mph) which,if exceeded, automatically sounds abuzzer and displays a special message(see section “Warning lights and messages”) to alert the driver.
To set the speed limit, proceed as follows:❒ briefly press button MENU: the display will show OFF;

IMPORTANT The possible setting is
between 30 and 250 km/h (or between 20 and 150 mph) depending on
the unit set previously (see paragraph“Units” described later). Every press(pulse) of the button +/– increases ordecreases the value by 5 units. Keeping
the button +/– pressed obtains automatic fast increase or decrease. When
you are near the required setting complete adjustment with single presses.

Automatic headlight daylightsensor (where provided)(Light Sens.)

To abort the setting:❒ press button + or – to select the required volume;❒ press button +: the display will showON;❒ briefly press button MENU: the display will show ON;❒ briefly press button MENU then, usebuttons +/– to set the required
speed (during setting the value will
flash).

❒ press button –: the display will showOFF;❒ briefly press button MENU to go
back to the menu screen or press the
button for long to go back to the standard screen.

❒ briefly press button MENU to go
back to the menu screen or press the
button for long to go back to the standard screen.

With this function it is possible to adjust
the light sensor sensitivity according to
3 levels.
To adjust the volume proceed as follows:❒ briefly press button MENU : the previously set level will flash on the display;❒ briefly press button MENU to go
back to the menu screen or press the
button for long to go back to the standard screen.
Reset Trip B
This function enables to select Trip B reset mode (Automatic or Manual).
For further information see paragraph“Trip computer”.

Alfawiki.nl

Pagina 35

Setting the clock (Clock)This function enables to set the clock.
Proceed as follows:❒ briefly press button MENU: “hours”
will show on the display;❒ press button + or – to select the required volume;❒ briefly press button MENU: “minutes” will flash on the display;

IMPORTANT Every press (pulse) on
the button +/– increases/decreases by
one unit. Keeping button +/– pressed
obtains fast increase/decrease. When
you are near the required setting complete adjustment with single presses.
❒ briefly press button MENU to go
back to the menu screen or press the
button for long to go back to the standard screen.

Clock mode (Mode 12/24)
This function is used to set the clock inthe 12h or 24h mode.
To adjust proceed as follows:❒ briefly press button MENU: 12h or
24h (according to previous setting)will show on the display;❒ press button + or – to select the required language;❒ briefly press button MENU to go
back to the menu screen or press the
button for long to go back to the standard screen.

INDEX

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCY❒ press button + or – to adjust;

DASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

9:38

SAFETYDEVICES

4-06-2008

WARNING LIGHTS CORRECT USE
AND MESSAGES OF THE CAR

001-045 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
35

DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS

001-045 Alfa 159 GB

4-06-2008

9:38

Pagina 36

Setting the date (Date)
This function enables to update the date(year - month - day).

INDEXTECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING LIGHTS CORRECT USE
AND MESSAGES OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICES

Proceed as follows:36❒ briefly press button MENU: “year”
will flash on the display;❒ press button + or – to select the required volume;❒ briefly press button MENU: “month”
will flash on the display;❒ press button + or – to select the required volume;

Audio Info Repetition(Audio Rpt.) (where provided)

To activate/deactivate (ON/OFF) info displaying proceed as follows:This function enables to display soundsystem information.

❒ briefly press button MENU: the display will show ON or OFF (according to previous setting);❒ Radio: selected radio station frequency or RDS message, automatictuning activation or AutoSTore;❒ Audio CD, MP3 CD: selected tracknumber;❒ CD Changer: CD number and tracknumber;❒ press button + or – to select the required source;❒ briefly press button MENU to go
back to the menu screen or press the
button for long to go back to the standard screen.
According to the audio source selected,
below the time will be displayed thesymbol of the current source.

❒ briefly press button MENU: “day”
will flash on the display;❒ press button + or – to adjust;
IMPORTANT Every press (pulse) on
the button +/– increases/decreases by
one unit. Keeping button +/– pressed
obtains fast increase/decrease. When
you are near the required setting complete adjustment with single presses.
❒ briefly press button MENU to go
back to the menu screen or press the
button for long to go back to the standard screen.

Alfawiki.nl

Driver’s door unlocking(Unlock Fda)

Automatic central door locking(Door lock)With this function it is possible to unlock
the boot independently from doors.

With this function it is possible to unlock
only the driver’s door by pressing theelectronic key button Ë.

When activated (ON), this function
locks automatically the doors when the
car speed exceeds 20 km/h.

With this function active (ON), it ishowever possible to unlock the otherdoors by pressing the door unlock button on central console.

To activate/deactivate (ON/OFF) thisfunction proceed as follows:

To activate independent boot function(ON) or deactivate it (OFF), proceed
as follows:❒ briefly press button MENU : ON or
OFF (according to previous setting)will flash on the display;❒ press button + or – to select the required language;❒ briefly press button MENU to go
back to the menu screen or press the
button for long to go back to the standard screen.

To activate/deactivate (ON/OFF) thisfunction proceed as follows:❒ briefly press button MENU: ON or
OFF (according to previous setting)will flash on the display;❒ press button + or – to select the required language;❒ briefly press button MENU to go
back to the menu screen or press the
button for long to go back to the standard screen.

❒ briefly press button MENU: ON or
OFF (according to previous setting)will flash on the display;❒ press button + or – to select the required language;❒ briefly press button MENU to go
back to the menu screen or press the
button for long to go back to the standard screen.
Function activation is indicated by thecircular led around the button q.

INDEXWhen the function is enabled, the trunk
opens by pressing ` on the electronic
key, or by acting on the lever located under the left back seat (refer to “Boot”
paragraph in this chapter).

SAFETYDEVICES

Independent boot unlocking(Indep. Boot)DASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 37

WARNING LIGHTS CORRECT USE
AND MESSAGES OF THE CAR

9:38

IN AN
EMERGENCY

4-06-2008

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

001-045 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
37

INDEXTECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING LIGHTS CORRECT USE
AND MESSAGES OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

001-045 Alfa 159 GB

38

4-06-2008

9:38

Pagina 38

Units

Consumption

TemperatureWith this function it is possible to set theunits for distance covered (km or mi),fuel consumption (l/100 km, km/l ormpg) and temperature (°C or °F).

If the distance unit set is km (see previous paragraph) the display will enable
to set the fuel consumption unit (l/100
km, km/l or mpg).

This function enables to set the temperature unit (°C or °F).

Distance

If the distance unit set is “mi” (see previous paragraph) fuel consumption will
be displayed “mpg”.

❒ briefly press button MENU: °C or °F(according to previous setting) willshow on the display;

In this case the option “Cons.Unit” of the“Setup Menu” can be selected but it islocked on “mpg”.

❒ press button + or – to select the required language;

To set the required unit proceed as follows:❒ briefly press button MENU: “km” or“mi” (according to previous setting)will show on the display;❒ press button + or – to select the required language;❒ briefly press button MENU to go
back to the menu screen or press the
button for long to go back to the standard screen.

To set the required unit proceed as follows:❒ briefly press button MENU: “km/l”
or “l/100 km” (according to previous setting) will show on the display;❒ press button + or – to select the required language;❒ briefly press button MENU to go
back to the menu screen or press the
button for long to go back to the standard screen.

Alfawiki.nl

To set the required unit proceed as follows:❒ briefly press button MENU to go
back to the menu screen or press the
button for long to go back to the standard screen.

Adjusting the failure/warningbuzzer volume (Beep Vol.)

Adjusting the button volume(Keys Vol.)

Display messages can be shown in thefollowing languages: Italian, English,
German, Portuguese, Spanish, French,
Dutch and Brazilian.

With this function the volume of thebuzzer accompanying any failure/warning indication can be adjusted according
to 8 levels.

With this function the volume of theroger-beep accompanying the activationof certain buttons can be adjusted according to 8 levels.

To set the required language proceed asfollows:

To adjust the volume proceed as follows:

To adjust the volume proceed as follows:❒ briefly press button MENU, the previously set “level” will show on thedisplay;❒ briefly press button MENU, the previously set “level” will show on thedisplay;❒ press button + or – to select the required volume;❒ press button + or – to select the required volume;❒ briefly press button MENU to go
back to the menu screen or press the
button for long to go back to the standard screen.

❒ briefly press button MENU to go
back to the menu screen or press the
button for long to go back to the standard screen.

❒ press button + or – to select the required language;❒ briefly press button MENU to go
back to the menu screen or press the
button for long to go back to the standard screen.

INDEX❒ briefly press button MENU , the previously set “language” will show on
the display;

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

Selecting the language(Language)DASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 39

SAFETYDEVICES

9:38

WARNING LIGHTS CORRECT USE
AND MESSAGES OF THE CAR

4-06-2008

IN AN
EMERGENCY

001-045 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
39

INDEXTECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING LIGHTS CORRECT USE
AND MESSAGES OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

001-045 Alfa 159 GB

40

4-06-2008

9:38

Pagina 40

Scheduled Servicing (Service)
Through this function it is possible to display information connected to proper car
servicing.
Proceed as follows:❒ briefly press button MENU : service
in km or mi, according to previous
setting, will be displayed (see paragraph “Units”);❒ briefly press button MENU to go
back to the menu screen or press the
button for long to go back to the standard screen.
IMPORTANT The Service schedule includes car maintenance every 35,000 km(or 21,000 mi); this is shown automatically, with the electronic key into the ignition device starting from 2,000 km (or1,240 mi) from this deadline and it will
be displayed in km or miles according to
the unit set. When a scheduled service interval (“coupon”) is near to come, fitting
the electronic key into the ignition device
will display a message followed by the
number of km/mi to go before car servicing. Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services to carry out any service operation
provided by the Service schedule or by the
Annual inspection plan, and to reset thedisplay.

Reactivating the S.B.R.
(Seat Belt Reminder) buzzer(Beep Seatb.) (where provided)

ILLUMINATION OF REVCOUNTER/INSTRUMENTS(NIGHT PANEL)

This function is displayed only after thesystem has been deactivated by Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services.

This function enables to turn on/off(ON/OFF) the lights of the rev counterand instruments. This function can be activated (only with electronic key fitted into ignition device, external lights on, andspeedometer built-in sensor in poor outside light setting), by pressing for long button –. When this function is on, the display will show a warning message. Onceon, the NIGHT PANEL function can bedeactivated as follows:❒ by long press on button + (also withexternal lights off);❒ removing the electronic key from theignition device.

Exit Menu (Quit setup)
Selecting this option will bring back tostandard screen.

When function is off the display will show
a warning message.
Messages stay on the display for a few
seconds, then they will go off. To stop
displaying before time, briefly press button MENU.

Alfawiki.nl

9:38

Pagina 41

TRIP COMPUTER
General features
The “Trip computer” displays information (with electronic key fitted into ignition device) relating to the operating status of
the car. This function comprises the “Trip A” concerning the “complete mission” of the car (journey) and “Trip B” concerning the partial mission of the car; this latter function (as shown in fig. 27) is “contained” within the complete mission.

DASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

4-06-2008

SAFETYDEVICES

001-045 Alfa 159 GB˙

End of partial mission
Start of newpartial mission

˙

TRIP BEnd of partial mission
Start of newpartial mission

Reset TRIP B
End of partial mission
Start of newpartial mission

Alfawiki.nl

IN AN
EMERGENCYTECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

˙˙
fig. 27

Reset TRIP B
TRIP B˙

Reset TRIP B
End of partial mission
Start of new partial mission

Reset TRIP B

˙

TRIP B˙˙Trip A

INDEX

Reset Trip A
End of complete mission
Start of new mission

Reset Trip A
End of complete mission
Start of new mission

WARNING LIGHTS CORRECT USE
AND MESSAGES OF THE CAR

Both functions are resettable (reset - start of new mission).

41

INDEXTECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING LIGHTS CORRECT USE
AND MESSAGES OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

001-045 Alfa 159 GB

42

4-06-2008

9:38

Pagina 42

The “Trip A” displays the figures relatingto:❒ Average consumption

Values displayed

Average consumption❒ Average speed

Represents the indicative average of consumptions from the beginning of the
new mission.

❒ Travel time

Current consumption❒ Range

This value shows instant fuel consumption (this value is updated second bysecond). If parking the car with engine
on, the display will show “- - - -”.

❒ Current consumption❒ Travel Distance“Trip B” displays information concerning:❒ Travel Distance B❒ Average consumption B❒ Average speed B❒ Travel time B.

The display will show “- - - -“ in the following cases:❒ value lower than 50 km (30mi);❒ car left parked with engine runningfor long.

This value shows the car average speed
as a function of the overall time elapsed
since the start of the new mission.

IMPORTANT The variation of the autonomy value can be influenced by different factors: driving style (see what is
described in paragraph “Driving style”
in the chapter “Correct use of the car”),
type of route (highways, urban, mountain, etc…), use conditions of the car(load transported, tire pressure, etc…).
What was described previously must be
taken in consideration when planninga trip.

Travel time

Travel DistanceThis value shows the time elapsed since
the start of the new mission (drivingtime).

This value shows the distance coveredfrom the start of the new mission.

Average speed

Range
This value shows the distance in km (ormi) that the car can still cover before
needing fuel, assuming that driving conditions are kept unvaried.

Alfawiki.nl

Each time the battery is connected andeach time a new mission is started (reset), the display will show “0.0”.

Pagina 43

DASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

New mission (reset)
Reset can be:

TRIP BUTTON
Button TRIP fig. 28, set on the rightsteering column stalk shall be used (withelectronic key into ignition device) to enter the “Trip A” and “Trip B” function.
To scroll the values of each option use
buttons set aside the stalk.

A0E0076m

fig. 28

Button TRIP shall also be used to resetthe “Trip A” and “Trip B” functions tostart a new mission:❒ short push: to display the different
values;❒ long push: to reset and then starta new mission.
To scroll the Trip Computer options,briefly press buttons - and ..
IMPORTANT “Trip A” reset will also
reset the “Trip B” function, whereas“Trip B” reset will only reset the information associated with this function.

fig. 29

A0E0052m

Every Trip computer screen displays two
options of the active Trip (Trip A or TripB); one option is displayed at the top of
the screen, the other one at the bottom(see fig. 29).
In the same screen it is not possible tohave displayed at the same time thesame option at the top and at the bottom of the screen.

INDEX❒ “automatic” reset is performed when
the trip distance reaches 9999.9 km(or mi), when travel time reaches
99.59 (99 hours and 59 minutes)
or after disconnecting and then reconnecting the battery.

SAFETYDEVICES❒ “manual” reset is performed by thedriver by pressing button TRIP;WARNING LIGHTS CORRECT USE
AND MESSAGES OF THE CAR

9:38

IN AN
EMERGENCY

4-06-2008

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

001-045 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
43

INDEXTECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING LIGHTS CORRECT USE
AND MESSAGES OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

001-045 Alfa 159 GB

44

4-06-2008

9:38

Pagina 44

Briefly press button TRIP to select the
two Trip computer modes; use button- to scroll the options at the top of thedisplay, use button .. to scroll the options at the bottom of the display.
Press briefly button TRIP to go from
Trip A to Trip B.

Start of journey procedure(reset)Trip A and Trip B reset are independent.

Reset Trip A
With electronic key into ignition device,
to reset the “Trip A” press and keeppressed button TRIP for over 2 seconds.
IMPORTANT Reset can be automatic only in the following cases:❒ when the “Travel Distance” reaches
9999.9 km or the “Travel Time”
reaches 99.59 (99 hours and 59
minutes);❒ after disconnecting/reconnecting thebattery.
At Trip A reset a warning message will
be displayed.
IMPORTANT Trip A reset will not reset “Range” and “Current Consumption”.

Alfawiki.nl

Reset Trip B
As concerns the Trip B values, it is possible to select through the “Setup
Menu” the reset mode (Manual or Automatic) (see paragraph “Setup Menu”
on previous pages):❒ manual reset: press and keep pressed
button TRIP for over 2 seconds.
❒ automatic reset: it takes place eachtime the electronic key is fitted into
the ignition device.
At Trip B reset a warning message will
be displayed.
IMPORTANT Trip B reset will not reset “Range” and “Current Consumption”.

001-045 Alfa 159 GB

4-06-2008

9:38

Pagina 45

DASHBOARDAND
CONTROLSSEATSSAFETYDEVICESMANUALLY ADJUSTABLEFRONT SEATS fig. 31

Upholstery of your car
has been designed towithstand wear deriving from common use of the car.
You are however recommended
to avoid strong and/or continuous scratching with clothing
accessories such as metallic
buckles, studs, Velcro fastenings and the like, since these
items cause circumscribed stressof the cover fabric that could
lead to yarn breaking, and damage the cover as a consequence.

fig. 31

A0E0020m

Moving the seat backwards
or forwards
Lift the lever A (on the inner side of theseat) and push the seat forwards orbackwards: in the driving position thearms should rest on the rim of the steering wheel.

IN AN
EMERGENCYNOTE When starting the engine andfor a short time, if you have recalled theplan view by pressing the TRIP button,
dashes will be displayed instead of"OK/NO". This is normal since the system is checking tyre inflation pressure
values.

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

On versions fitted with T.P.M.S. system(Tyre pressure Monitoring System) (seeparagraph “T.P.M.S. system” in this section), after Trip A and Trip B info, thescreen with tyre pressure condition is displayed (see fig. 30).

Only make adjustments
when the car is stationary.

INDEX

A0E0053m

WARNING LIGHTS CORRECT USE
AND MESSAGES OF THE CARWARNING
fig. 30

Alfawiki.nl
45

4-06-2008

9:39

Pagina 46

WARNING

Once you have released the lever, checkthat the seat is firmly lockedin the runners by trying tomove it back and forth. Failure
to lock the seat in place could
result in the seat moving suddenly and the driver losing
control of the car.

Height adjustment
Move repeatedly lever B upwards or
downwards to achieve the required
height.

Back rest angle adjustment(where provided)
Use lever E. Pulling the lever upwards
the seat will bend back by one position.
Pushing the lever downwards the seat
will bend forward.

With electronic key fitted into ignition
device, turn ring nut A-fig. 32 to turnthis function on/off.

INDEX

Back rest angle adjustment

Turn the knob D until obtaining the required position.

Lumbar adjustment(where provided)

A0E0189m

fig. 33

Seat warming(where provided)

Turn the knob C until obtaining the required position.

46

A0E0024m

fig. 32

IMPORTANT Adjustment must be carried out only seated at the driver’s seat.

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

046-082 Alfa 159 GB

ELECTRICALLY ADJUSTABLEFRONT SEATS fig. 33

Seat warming can be adjusted to 3 different levels (0 = seat warming off).

WARNING

Only make adjustments
when the car is stationary.

Alfawiki.nl

Storing driver’s seat/door
mirror positions

Multifunction control A:

Buttons C allows to store and recall threedifferent driver’s seat and door mirror positions. Storing and recalling are only possible with electronic key fitted into ignition device.

– vertical seat movement;– longitudinal seat movement;
B: Back rest angle adjustment;
C: Driver’s seat positions store buttons;
D: Lombar adjustment.
IMPORTANT Seat can only be adjusted when the electronic key is fitted
into the ignition device and for about 1
minute from removing it or after pressing button START/STOP. After opening the door the seat can be adjusted forabout 3 minutes or until closing thedoor.

Stored position can only be recalled forabout 3 minutes after opening the doors
and for about 1 minute after removing
the electronic key from the ignition device.
To store the required seat position, adjust it as required then press the button
corresponding to position to store for a
few seconds.
To recall the stored position, press briefly
the corresponding button.
Storing a new position will automatically
clear the one stored previously using thesame button.

CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR– rear seat height adjustment;

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES– front seat height adjustment;

SAFETYDEVICES

Seat controls are thefollowing:

DASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 47

fig. 33/a

A0E0421m

FRONT SEATS SPORTS(where provided)
fig. 33/a
Certain versions are fitted with manually or electrically adjustable front seatswith sports configuration.
To adjust these seats see the indications
contained in previous paragraphs.

IN AN
EMERGENCY

9:39

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

4-06-2008

INDEX

046-082 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
47

4-06-2008

9:39

Pagina 48

HEAD RESTRAINTS

Head restraints are adjustable in height
and they lock automatically in the required position.
To adjust height proceed as follows:

INDEX

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESSAFETYDEVICESFRONT HEAD RESTRAINTSCORRECT USE
OF THE CARDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

046-082 Alfa 159 GB

48❒ to raise: raise the head restraint until hearing the locking click.
❒ to lower: press button A and lower
the head restraint.
If required, head restraints can be removed as follows:❒ raise head restraints to max. height;❒ press buttons A and B-fig. 34 (setaside the two head restraint supports) then remove the head restraints by pulling them upwards.

A0E0473m

fig. 34WARNING

Remember that thehead restraints should
be adjusted to support theback of your head and not
your neck. Only in this position
do they exert their protective
action. To optimise head restraint protective action, adjust
the seat back upright and keep
your head as close as possible
to the head restraint.

Alfawiki.nl

fig. 35

A0E0479m

REAR HEAD RESTRAINTS
Rear seats are fitted with two head restraints.
Certain versions are fitted with height-adjustable head restraint also for the central
seat (see previous paragraph for heightadjustment).
If required, head restraints can be removed as follows:❒ raise head restraints to max. height;❒ press buttons A and B-fig. 35 (setaside the two head restraint supports) then remove the head restraints by pulling them upwards.

Any adjustment of thesteering wheel position
must be carried out only withthe car stationary and the engine turned off.

The steering wheel can be adjusted both
axially and in height.

A0E0136m

fig. 36WARNING

It is absolutely forbidden to carry out whatever after-market operation
involving steering system or
steering column modifications(e.g.: installation of anti-theft
device) that could badly affectperformance and safety, cause
the lapse of warranty and also result in non-compliance ofthe car with homologation requirements.

INDEX

Release the lever A-fig. 36 pushing it
downwards, then adjust the steering
wheel as required. To lock the steering
wheel, push lever A upwards.

SAFETYDEVICESWARNING

CORRECT USE
OF THE CARSTEERING WHEELDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 49

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES

9:39

IN AN
EMERGENCY

4-06-2008

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

046-082 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
49

INDEXTECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

046-082 Alfa 159 GB

50

4-06-2008

9:39

Pagina 50

REARVIEWMIRRORSDRIVING MIRROR
The mirror is fitted with a safety device
that causes it to be released in the eventof a violent crash.

A0E0135m

fig. 37

Using lever A-fig. 37 the mirror canbe adjusted to two different positions:normal or antiglare.
Certain versions are fitted with electrochromic mirror fig. 38. The electrochromic function is turned on/off bypressing button ON/OFF in the lower section of the mirror. When engaging
reverse, the mirror will always set todaylight colouring.

fig. 39

A0E0036m

Adjusting the mirror
Use device A-fig. 39 to select the required mirror:❒ turn selector A to 1 to select the left
door mirror;❒ turn selector A to 2 to select the rightdoor mirror.
A0E0032m

fig. 38

DOOR MIRRORS
Door mirror can only be adjusted andfolded when the electronic key is fitted
into the ignition device.

Alfawiki.nl

To adjust the mirror selected press button B in the four directions shown by
the arrows.
IMPORTANT After adjusting the mirror, turn selector A to 0 to prevent accidental movements.

A0E0081m

Manually folding of the mirror
When required (for example when the
mirror causes difficulty in narrow spaces)
it is possible to fold the mirror moving itfrom position A-fig. 40 to position B.

To bring the mirrors back to driving position press again button C-fig. 39.

To store mirror position proceed as follows:

As the driver’s door mirror is curved, it may
slightly alter the perception of distance.

WARNING

When driving the mirrors shall always be inopen position.

❒ To perform storing, proceed as follows: engage reverse with car
stopped and electronic key fitted into the ignition device;❒ move device A-fig. 39 to position
2 (passenger door mirror selection);❒ adjust the passenger door mirror to
obtain the best position for parking
manoeuvres;❒ keep one of the buttons C-fig. 33
pressed for at least 3 seconds (seeparagraph “Seats” in this section).

SAFETYDEVICES

When required (for example when the
mirror causes difficulty in narrow spaces)
it is possible to fold the mirrors by pressing button C-fig. 39.

On versions equipped with electric seats,
when engaging reverse for parking to
improve visibility the driver can adjust(and store) the passenger's door mirror
to a position different than that usedcommonly.

INDEX

fig. 40

Storing the “parking”
position of the door mirror
on the passenger side

CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

Electrically folding of themirror (only versions with 4
power windows)(optional for versions/markets where applicable)

DASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 51

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES

9:39

IN AN
EMERGENCY

4-06-2008

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

046-082 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
51

4-06-2008

9:39

Pagina 52

Together with the passenger door mirror “parking” position, also the driver
seat position and the driver door mirror
will be stored. The sound of a buzzer
will confirm that the mirror position has
been stored.

Recalling the passenger door
mirror “parking” position

Automatic door mirror
realignment

Proceed as follows: fit the electronic key
into the ignition device, engage reverse,
move device A-fig. 39 to position 2(passenger door mirror selection).

Each time the electronic key is fitted into the ignition device the door mirrors
return automatically to the last position
reached and/or recalled before removing the electronic key from the ignition
device.

The mirror will set automatically to thepreviously stored position.
If no parking position has been stored,
when engaging reverse the passenger
door mirror will slightly lower to favour
the parking manoeuvre.
The passenger door mirror will return automatically to its original position about
10 seconds after disengaging reverse,
immediately after exceeding 10 km/h
with forward gear or when moving device A-fig. 39 to 0.

INDEXTECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

046-082 Alfa 159 GB

52

Alfawiki.nl

This enables mirror alignment if, when
the car is parked, one of the door mirrors has been moved manually and/or
accidentally.
Defrosting/demisting
The electric mirrors are fitted with heating coils which come into operation
when turning on the heated rear window (pressing button ().
IMPORTANT This function is timed
and is deactivated after a few minutes.

4-06-2008

9:40

Pagina 53

CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM

1 Upper vent - 2 Adjustable and swivel central vents - 3 Adjustable and swivel side vents - 4 Lower vents for rear seats 5 Adjustable and swivel air vents for rear seats (where provided)- 6 Lower vents for front seats - 7 Windscreen and front
Alfawiki.nl
windows demisting/defrosting vents.

INDEX

fig. 41TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICES

A0E0220m

DASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

046-082 Alfa 159 GB

53

4-06-2008

9:40

Pagina 54

fig. 42

A0E0014m

IN AN
EMERGENCYINDEXTECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

54

A0E0057m

fig. 44

A0E0067m

fig. 45

UPPER VENT fig. 44
The vent has an opening/closing control.

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

046-082 Alfa 159 GBI

O = Completely closedO

I = Completely open

OFF

AUTO

AUTO

fig. 43

A0E0012m

CENTRAL AND
SIDE VENTS fig. 42-43
These vents are aligned on the dashboard. Each vent A features a wheel B
to adjust air flow and a device C to direct air flow horizontally or vertically.

WINDSCREEN AND FRONTSIDE WINDOW DEMISTING/
DEFROSTING VENTS
These vents are located at the ends (Afig. 45) and on the front part B of thedashboard.

O = Completely closed
I = Completely open

Alfawiki.nl

fig. 46

A0E0088m

REAR VENTS(where provided) fig. 46
Each vent A features a wheel B to adjust air flow and a device C to direct it.
O = Completely closed
I = Completely open

Pagina 55

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLSMANUAL CLIMATECONTROL SYSTEM(where provided)
CONTROLS fig. 47

CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

A - Air temperature knob (mixing warmand cold air);

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES

B - Air distribution knob;
C - Fan speed knob;
D - Heated rear window and door mirrors defrosting on/off button;
E - Windscreen, front side windows anddoor mirrors max. demisting/defrosting
on/off button;fig. 47

F - Air recirculation on/off button;

AIR DISTRIBUTIONSELECTION

G - Compressor on/off button.

O: air flow to driver’s/passenger’sbody;
M: air flow to driver’s/passenger’s
body and lower part of the passenger
compartment;
N: air flow towards the front and rear
lower part of theAlfawiki.nl
passenger compartment;

A0E0011m

Q: air flow towards the lower part ofthe passenger compartment and windscreen;
ü: air flow towards the windscreen

IN AN
EMERGENCY

9:40

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

4-06-2008

INDEX

046-082 Alfa 159 GB

55

INDEXTECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

046-082 Alfa 159 GB

56

4-06-2008

9:40

Pagina 56

WARMING THE PASSENGERCOMPARTMENT
Proceed as follows:❒ turn knob A to the required temperature;❒ turn knob C to the required speed;❒ turn knob B to the required distribution:
N: to warm the feet of front and rearpassengers;
M: to warm the feet and keep the facecool (bilevel function);
Q: to warm the feet and at the sametime demist the windscreen;❒ turn air recirculation off (if on).

QUICK WINDSCREEN
AND FRONT SIDE WINDOWDEMISTING/DEFROSTING(MAX-DEF function)
Press button -: the button leds -,√ and ( will turn on. To turn this function off, press again button - the button led will turn off. After defrosting, turnthe function off to keep top comfort conditions.
Window demisting
Climate control system √ is very useful to speed up window demisting andit is therefore to be turned on in theevent of considerable moisture. In any
case it is recommended to perform thefollowing preventive demisting procedure:❒ turn air recirculation off (if on);❒ turn knob C to second speed;❒ turn knob B to Q.

Alfawiki.nl

HEATED REAR WINDOWAND DOOR MIRRORDEMISTING/DEFROSTING
Press button ( to activate the demisting/defrosting function: when this function is on, the circular led around the button will turn on.
On certain versions, turning this function
on will also activate windscreen defrosting in the windscreen wiper area.
This function is timed and switches off
automatically after few minutes, or bypressing again the button or by turning
the engine off. It will not be switchedon automatically when restarting the engine.
IMPORTANT Do not apply stickers on
the inside of the heated rear window
over the heating filaments to avoid damage that might cause it to stop working properly.

This function is particularly useful when
the outside air is heavily polluted (in atraffic jam, tunnel, etc.) However, it isbetter not to use it for long periods, especially if there are several people in the
car to prevent window misting up.

LOOKING AFTER THE
SYSTEM

IMPORTANT The compressor √ canbe enabled only if the ventilation is enabled.

During the winter, the climate control
system √ must be turned on at least
once a month for about ten minutes.

Proceed as follows:

Before summer, have the system
checked at Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

❒ turn knob A completely leftwards;❒ turn knob C to top speed;

Do not use the air recirculation function
on rainy/cold days as it would considerably increase the possibility of the windows misting inside.

❒ turn knob B to O;

IMPORTANT The inside air recirculation system makes it possible to reachthe required (“heating” or “cooling”)
conditions faster.

How to keep the required
cooling❒ press buttons √ and v (buttons
leds on).

Proceed as follows:❒ turn air recirculation off (if on).
❒ turn knob A to the required temperature;

INDEX❒ turn the knurled ring C to the required
fan speed.

After connecting/disconnecting the battery,
wait for 3 minutes atleast before fitting the electronic
key into the ignition device inorder to allow the climate control system control unit to reset
the positions of the electric actuators that adjust air temperature and distribution.

SAFETYDEVICESTo turn this function on press button
v: the button led will turn on.

CLIMATE CONTROL(fast cooling)

CORRECT USE
OF THE CARRECIRCULATIONDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 57

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES

9:40

IN AN
EMERGENCY

4-06-2008

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

046-082 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
57

INDEXTECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

046-082 Alfa 159 GB

58

4-06-2008

9:40

Pagina 58

AUTOMATIC TWO-/THREE-ZONE
CLIMATE CONTROLSYSTEM(where provided)

The following parameters and functions
can be set or changed manually:

DESCRIPTION
The car is fitted with a two-/three-zone
climate control system which makes it
possible to separately adjust the air temperature in the two/three passenger’s
compartment areas to reach the required
comfort.
For top quality temperature control in
the two/three areas of the passenger's
compartment, the system is fitted withexternal temperature sensor, passenger's compartment temperature sensor
and two-side sun radiation sensor.
The climate control system automaticallycontrols and adjusts the following parameters and functions:❒ air temperature at driver/passengers
vents;❒ fan speed;❒ air distribution at driver/passenger
vents;❒ compressor activation;❒ air recirculation.

❒ window demisting/defrosting;❒ required temperature;❒ fan speed;❒ air distribution on seven levels ;❒ compressor on/off;❒ air recirculation.
The system is fitted with AQS (Air Quality System) sensor (where provided),that turns on air recirculation automatically when it detects the presence of outside polluted air (for example in queues
and tunnels).
Where provided, the system is integrated with an anti-misting sensor A-fig. 48
set behind the driving mirror, capable of“monitoring” a preset internal area of thewindscreen and of intervening automatically to prevent or to reduce window misting up through a proper strategy.

Alfawiki.nl

fig. 48

A0E0091m

This sensor can be deactivated throughany manual system control when thestrategy is operating. The sensor is enabled at each start-up and in any casewhen the user presses one of the AUTO
buttons.

To guarantee perfectand regular sensor operation do not apply
stickers in the “monitoring”
area between sensor and windscreen. Keep windscreen andsensor clean and avoid to accumulate dust or other substances.

9:40

Pagina 59

DASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

TWO-ZONE controls fig. 49
A - air distribution buttons (on driver andpassenger side);

SAFETYDEVICESB - temperature adjustment knob on driver side;C - automatic operation button (AUTO);CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

D - climate control data display;E - temperature adjustment knob onpassenger side;H - buttons for adjusting the fan speed;fig. 49 - TWO-ZONE configuration

I - OFF button to disable climate control;
L - air recirculation on/off button;
M - climate control compressor on/off button;
N - passenger’s compartment temperature sensor

A0E0453m

INDEX

G - MAX-DEF function button (fast defrosting/demisting function for windscreen, heated rear window and door
mirrors with heating function);

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES

F - heated rear window/door mirrors
on/off button;

IN AN
EMERGENCY

4-06-2008

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

046-082 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
59

INDEXTECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

046-082 Alfa 159 GB

60

4-06-2008

9:40

Pagina 60

THREE-ZONE controls fig. 50
Front controls
A - air distribution buttons (driver and passenger side);B - temperature adjustment knob on driverside;
C - automatic operation button (AUTO);
D - climate control data display;E - temperature adjustment knob on passenger side;F - heated rear window/door mirrors on/off
button;G - MAX-DEF function button (fast defrosting/demisting function for windscreen, heated rear window and door mirrors with heating
function);H - buttons for adjusting the fan speed;
I - OFF button to disable climate control;
L - air recirculation on/off button;
M - climate control compressor on/off button;
N - passenger’s compartment temperature
sensorRear controls
P - knob for adjusting temperature on rearpassenger side;Q - button for turning on automatic operation(AUTO) and for turning off air flow to rearseats (OFF);R - air distribution buttons;
S - rear temperature display.

fig. 50 - THREE-ZONE configuration - Front and rear controls

Alfawiki.nl

A0E0454m

AIR TEMPERATURE
ADJUSTMENT KNOBS

HI function (HIGH)(maximum heating power)

The system can be turned on by pressing any button (excluding (, v andOFF); it is however advisable to set therequired temperatures on the display
and then to press the AUTO button.

Turning the knob knurled rings (B/E/P), clockwise or counter-clockwise,
respectively raises or lowers the temperature of the air required respectively in the left front zone (knob B) or rightfront zone (knob E) or rear zone (knobP) of the passenger compartment. The
temperatures set are shown on the display D/S.

It is switched on by setting a temperature of more than 32°C on the display,and can be switched on independently
from the driver’s or passengers’ side, orboth of them; this setting brings the system to the “one-zone” mode and it isshown by both displays.

The function uses the maximum temperature of the heating fluid, whereas
air distribution and fan speed are controlled automatically by the system.

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

Turning the knob knurled rings fully
clockwise or counter-clockwise until theyreach the extreme selections HI or LO,
the maximum heating or cooling functions are respectively engaged.

This functions can be switched on when
you wish to heat the passenger compartment as quickly as possible, by taking the greatest advantage from the system potential.

INDEX

The climate control system allows to personalise required temperatures (driver andpassengers).

SAFETYDEVICESSWITCHING THE CLIMATECONTROL SYSTEM ONDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 61

CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

9:40

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES

4-06-2008

IN AN
EMERGENCY

046-082 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
61

4-06-2008

9:40

Pagina 62

This function should not be activated when the engine is cold,
to prevent air not warm enoughfrom entering the passenger
compartment.
With the function switched on, however, all the manual settings can be made.
To switch the function off, you only needto turn the ring of knob (B or E/P) of
the temperature set to a value lower
than 32°C; the opposite display and therear display (where provided) will show
32°C.
Pressing button AUTO, the display willshow a temperature of 32°C and returns to an operating condition with automatic temperature adjustment.

LO (LOW) function(highest cooling power)
It is switched on by setting a temperature lower than 16°C on the display;this setting is shown on the display. Thisfunction can be switched on when you
wish to cool the passenger compartment
as quickly as possible, by taking thegreatest advantage from the system potential.
The function cuts off air heating, switches on both internal air recirculation (toprevent hot air from entering the compartment) and the climate control compressor, brings air distribution to ¯/˙and the fan speed is controlled automatically by the system.

INDEX

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

046-082 Alfa 159 GB

62

Alfawiki.nl

With the function switched on, however, all the manual settings can be made.
To switch the function off, you only needto turn the ring of knob B/E/P of thetemperature set to a value higher than
16°C; the opposite display and the reardisplay (where provided) will show
16°C.
Pressing button AUTO, the display willshow a temperature of 16°C and returns to an operating condition with automatic temperature adjustment.

❒ fan speed;❒ air distribution in passenger compartment;❒ air recirculation;❒ compressor;
and it will cancel all the previous manual adjustments.

FAN SPEED ADJUSTMENT
Press buttons +/– to increase or to decrease the fan speed.
The fan speed is shown by the lit bars on
the display:

WARNING

It is inadvisable to use
air recirculation on
rainy/cold days as it would
considerably increase the possibility of windows misting up
inside.

Wording AUTO will disappear from thedisplay of the involved area (driver orfront passenger side or rear passengerside) when performing whatever operation (excluding temperature change).

❒ min fan speed = one bar lit;
❒ max fan speed = 6 bars lit;
At starting, if climate control system isoperating in automatic mode, the fan
speed is kept at minimum until the engine has started.
With compressor on and engine running,
the fan speed cannot fall below the min.
speed.
The fan can be cut off (all bars off) only if the climate control compressor has
been switched off by pressing button √.

INDEX

To restore automatic fan speed control
after a manual adjustment, press buttons AUTO.

SAFETYDEVICES

Pressing button AUTO (front and rear
controls) the displays will show AUTO
and the system will automatically adjust:

AUTO will also go off if the system (specially when compressor is turned off
manually) cannot reach or cannot keep
the required temperature.

CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

AUTOMATIC OPERATION(AUTO BUTTON)DASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 63

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES

9:40

IN AN
EMERGENCY

4-06-2008

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

046-082 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
63

4-06-2008

9:40

Pagina 64

QUICK FRONT WINDOWDEMISTING/DEFROSTING(MAX-DEF function)
Pressing button - the climate control
automatically activates timed operationof all the functions required to quicken
demisting/defrosting of the windscreen
and front side windows and, on certain
versions, electric windscreen demistingin the windscreen wiper area.
The MAX-DEF can be turned on also withengine off. When this function is on thecircular led around the button will turn on.

The MAX-DEF function activates the following operations:❒ rear panel turning off;
❒ air flow increase;❒ air distribution at DEF;
❒ outside air intake;❒ compressor activation;❒ AQS function deactivation (where
provided)❒ rear window heating activation.
When the MAX-DEF function is on, theonly manual operations possible aremanual adjustment of the fan speed andswitching heated rear window off.

INDEX

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

046-082 Alfa 159 GB

64

Alfawiki.nl

IMPORTANT If the engine is notwarm enough, the function will not engage the predefined fan speed immediately, to limit the flow to the passenger compartment of air that is not warm
enough to demist the windows.
Pressing again one of the following buttons: v, √, AUTO, or - the systemswitches off the MAX-DEF function, resuming the system operating conditions
prior to turning it on, in addition to activating the last function required, if any.
IMPORTANT Don’t turn the MAX-DEF
function on with engine off to prevent
draining the battery.

On certain versions, turning this function
on will also activate windscreen defrosting in the windscreen wiper area.
This function is timed and switches off
automatically after few minutes, or bypressing again the button or by turning
the engine off. It will not be switchedon automatically when restarting the engine.
IMPORTANT Do not apply stickers on
the inside of the rear window over theheating filaments to avoid damage thatmight cause it to stop working properly.

To turn the compressor off press again
button √.
With compressor off, the system will
check whether outside temperature ishigher or lower/same as the set one:
❒ if outside temperature is lower than
the set one, the system will operate
regularly also with compressor off;
❒ if outside temperature is higher than
the set one, the system will not beable to keep the required condition,
the set temperature values will thenstart to flash on the display.

SAFETYDEVICES

Press button √ to turn the compressor
on: when climate control compressor ison the circular led around the button willturn on. Compressor will stay on also after turning the engine off.

Temperature detection (compressor off
and outside temperature higher than set
temperature) is activated each time theelectronic key is fitted into the ignition
device.

WARNING

Operation of the climate control compressor is necessary for coolingand dehumidifying the air; it isadvisable to keep this function
always on, to prevent window
misting problems.

CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

Press button ( to activate the demisting/defrosting function: when this function is on, the circular led around the button will turn on.

CLIMATE CONTROLCOMPRESSOR ON/OFFWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESHEATED REAR WINDOWAND DOOR MIRRORDEMISTING/DEFROSTINGDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 65

IN AN
EMERGENCY

9:40

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

4-06-2008

INDEX

046-082 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
65

INDEXTECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

046-082 Alfa 159 GB

66

4-06-2008

9:40

Pagina 66

AIR DISTRIBUTIONSELECTION
Front seat Two-zone/
Three-zone configuration
Pressing buttons (front controls)
A/S/D you can manually choose oneof the 7 possible modes for air distribution inside the compartment:
D Flow of air to the dashboard centre
and side outlets (passenger’s body).

D Splitting of the air flow betweenS

the vents to the lower part of thepassenger compartment (warmestair) and the dashboard centre andside outlets and the rear outlet(coolest air).

S Air flow towards the front and rear
lower part of the passenger compartment. This type of distribution allows heating of the passenger compartment in the shortest time byproper setting of the temperature.

A Splitting of the air flow between
S windscreen and front side window
demisting/defrosting vents and thelower part of the passenger compartment. This type of air distribution
allows satisfactory heating of the passenger compartment while preventing possible misting of the windows.
A Air flow to the windscreen and front
side window vents to demist or defrost them.
A Splitting of the air flow between
D the central/side dashboard vents,
rear vents and windscreen and side
window defrosting / demistingvents. This type of air distribution
allows satisfactory ventilation of
the passenger compartment while
preventing possible misting of thewindows.
A Splitting of the air flow between
D all vents.
S

Alfawiki.nl

Rear seat Three-zone
configuration controls
Pressing buttons A/S (rear controls)
you can manually choose one of the 3
possible modes for air distribution to therear side of passenger's compartment
A Air flow to the vents on the central
console (passengers’ body).
S Air flow towards the rear lower partof the passenger compartment. This
type of distribution allows heating of
the passenger compartment in the
shortest time by proper setting of thetemperature.
A Splitting of the air flow between
S the vents to the lower part of the passenger compartment (warmest air)and the rear vents (coolest air).
To restore automatic air distribution control after a manual selection, press buttons AUTO (front controls) or AUTO (rearcontrols).

❒ automatic control, indicated by button led “A”;
❒ forced switching on (inside air recirculation always on), indicated by theturning on of the circular led aroundthe button;❒ forced switching off (air recirculation
always off with air inlet from the outside), indicated by the turning off ofthe circular led around the button.

With the outside temperature below -1°C theclimate control compressor is unable to work. It istherefore inadvisable to use theinside air recirculation function
with low outside temperature
as windows may mist overquickly.

INDEXWith A.Q.S. (air quality sensor - where
provided), the operating logics becomessequential by pressing button v.

In certain weather conditions (e.g. outside
temperaturearound0°C) and with automatic air recirculation control on, mist may
form on the windows. In thiscase press button v toswitch off recirculation and if
necessary press button + to increase the flow of air to thewindscreen.

SAFETYDEVICES

Inside air recirculation is controlled according to the following operating logics:

IMPORTANT The inside air recirculation system makes it possible to reachthe required heating or cooling conditions faster. It is however inadvisable touse it on rainy/cold days as it would
considerably increase the possibility of
the windows misting inside, especially
if the climate control compressor is off.
It is advisable to turn on the inside air
recirculation system in queues or tunnels
to avoid admitting polluted air from outside. The prolonged use of this function
should however be avoided, especiallywith several persons on board, to avoid
the possibility of the windows mistinginside and to guarantee the required
fresh air inlet.

CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

AIR RECIRCULATION AND
AQS FUNCTION (AIRQUALITY SYSTEM)
ON/OFF (where provided)

DASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 67

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES

9:40

IN AN
EMERGENCY

4-06-2008

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

046-082 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
67

INDEXTECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

046-082 Alfa 159 GB

68

4-06-2008

9:40

Pagina 68

AQS function (Air Quality
System) (where provided)

POLLEN FILTER/ ACTIVATEDCARBON POLLEN FILTER

The AQS function turns on automatically air recirculation when it detects thepresence of polluted air (e.g. in queues
and tunnels).

According to versions, the car can be fitted with pollen filter or activated carbon
pollen filter (where provided). The filter
has the specific capability of admitting to
the passenger compartment purified air,free from particles such as dust, pollen,
etc. The filtering action takes place under all air inlet conditions and it is clearly most effective with the windows shut.

IMPORTANT With AQS function on,
after a preset time with recirculation on,
the compressor will enable outside air
inlet (for about 1 minute) to change air
inside the passenger compartment, regardless of outside air pollution level.
IMPORTANT The AQS function is disabled when the outside temperature iscold to prevent window misting up. To
reactivate this function, press button
v. Led “A” on button v willturn on to indicate that the function ison.

Have the conditions of the filter checked
by Alfa Romeo Authorized Services atleast once a year, preferably at the onset of summer.
If the car is used mainly in polluted or
dusty areas it should be checked and if
necessary replaced at shorter intervals
than specified in the Service Schedule(see section “Car Maintenance”).

Alfawiki.nl

Failure to replace the filter may considerably reduce the effectiveness ofthe climate control system up to
blocking the air flow from theoutlets and vents.

With climate control system off:
❒ the system stores performed operations;❒ the display is off;
❒ air recirculation is active (button led
on);❒ compressor is active;❒ ventilation is off.
To turn the climate control system on
again press button AUTO or any otherbutton (excluding ( and v).

ADDITIONALHEATER (diesel
versions only)(where provided)

After connecting/disconnecting the battery,
wait for 3 minutes atleast before fitting the electronic
key into the ignition device inorder to allow the climate control system control unit to reset
the positions of the electric actuators that adjust air temperature and distribution.

The car is fitted with an additional heaterthat supports the engine during cold or
winter weather to quickly reach a comfortable temperature in the passenger
compartment.
The additional heater works with the engine running when the outside temperature is below 20°C and the engine has
not yet reached normal operating temperature.

SAFETYDEVICES

Press OFF button. The circular led aroundthe button turns on, signalling the OFF
state.

Pressing button OFF on the rear control
will display the wording OFF on the reardisplay and will stop air flow to rearseats.

CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SWITCHING THE CLIMATECONTROL SYSTEM OFFDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 69

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES

9:40

IN AN
EMERGENCY

4-06-2008

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

046-082 Alfa 159 GB

INDEXTurning the climate control system on
again, air recirculation will be again controlled automatically.

Alfawiki.nl
69

4-06-2008

9:40

Pagina 70

Direction indicators

EXTERNAL LIGHTS

Push the stalk to (stable) position:❒ up: to turn the right-hand direction
indicator on;

LEFT-HAND STALK fig. 51
The left-hand stalk control almost all external lights.
The external lights can only be switchedon with electronic key fitted into ignition
device.

A0E0064m

fig. 51

Main beam headlamps

Turn the knurled ring A to 6. The warning light 3 on the instrument panel
will turn on.

To turn the main beams off, pull again
the stalk towards the steering wheel (2ndunstable position).

Dipped beam headlamps

Flashing the main beams

Turn the knurled ring A to 2. The warning light 2 on the instrument panel willturn on.

Pull the stalk towards the steering wheel(1st unstable position) regardless of theposition of the knurled ring A. Warning light 1 on the instrument panel
will turn on.

INDEX

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES

Sidelights

With knurled ring A at 2 pull the stalktowards the steering wheel (2nd unstable position). Warning light 1 on the
instrument panel will turn on.

IN AN
EMERGENCY

Lights switched off❒ down: to turn the left-hand direction
indicator on.

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCECORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

046-082 Alfa 159 GB

70

Knurled ring at O.

Alfawiki.nl

Warning light Î or ¥ will come on flashing on the instrument cluster at thesame time.
Indicators are switched off automatically when the steering wheel is straightened.
If you want to show that you are about
to change lane, move the left-hand stalkto unstable position. The required direction indicator will flash 3 times and thenit will turn off automatically.

At each single movement of the stalk,the staying on of the lights is extended
by 30 seconds up to a maximum of 3.5
minutes; then the lights are switched off
automatically.

On certain versions, the daylight sensor sensitivity can be adjusted throughthe “Setup Menu” of the display (seesection “Reconfigurable multifunction
display” in this section).

Each time the stalk is operated, the 3
warning light turns on together with themessage on the display (see section“Warning lights and messages”).

Activation

Activation

Deactivation
Keep the stalk pulled towards the steering wheel for more than 2 seconds.

A:
Turn the knurled ring A-fig. 51 to 2
in this way, the automatic activation of
the side/taillights and dipped beam
headlights is simultaneously enabled according to outside brightness.

With lights switched on automaticallyand in the presence of a switching off
control by the sensor, the main beams
will be switched off first and a few seconds after also the sidelights.

As a result of the sensor control, thedipped beam headlights will switch off
and, after a few seconds, sidelights willswitch off too. The sensor is not able
to detect the fog presence, under thiscondition lights shall therefore be
switched on manually.
Failure warnings
On certain versions headlight sensor failure is shown by the instrument panel
warning light 1, whereas on other versions a dedicated message is shown on
the display (see section “Warning lights
and messages”).

SAFETYDEVICES

Pull the stalk towards the steering wheel
within 2 minutes from when the engine
is turned off.

It detects the changes of the external
light intensity of the car according to thelight sensitivity set: the greater the sensitivity is, the smaller the amount of external light necessary to control theswitching-on of the external headlights
will be.

Deactivation

CORRECT USE
OF THE CARThis function allows the illumination of
the space in front of the car for a preset period of time.

AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTSSENSOR (daylight sensor)(where provided)

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES“FOLLOW ME HOME”
DEVICEDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 71

IN AN
EMERGENCY

9:40

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

4-06-2008

INDEX

046-082 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
71046-082 Alfa 159 GB

4-06-2008

9:40

Pagina 72

DASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Parking lights

INDEX

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESWith instrument panel off they turn on
by pressing button C. When pressing the
button a buzzer will sound and the instrument panel warning light 3 willturn on.

72

fig. 52

A0E0061m

DASHBOARD BUTTONS
fig. 52
Front fog lights(where provided)
To turn front fog lights on, press button
A; to activate these lights it is necessary
to have the side/taillights switched on.
The instrument panel warning light 5will turn on. Press the button again or turnside/taillights off to turn the lights off.

Press the button again to turn the lights
off.
With parking lights on, move the external lights left-hand stalk upwards or
downwards to select on which side(right or left) the lights must stay on. In
this event warning light 3 will turnoff.
With left stalk at central position the fourparking lights and the number plate lightwill turn on.

A0E0100m

fig. 53

Hazard lights
These lights are turned on by pressing
button A-fig. 53.
When these lights are on, the switch
flashes and warning lights Î and ¥ on
the instrument panel will turn on at thesame time.
Press switch A again to turn the lights
off.

Rear fog lights
To turn rear fog lights on, press button
B to activate these lights it is necessary
to have the dipped beams or front fog
lights switched on. The instrument panel warning light 4 will turn on. They turnoff by pressing the button again, turning the front or rear fog lights off or byturning the engine off.

WARNINGUse of the hazard
warning lights is ruledby the Highway Code of thecountry in which the car isused. Observe regulations.

Alfawiki.nl

RIGHT-HAND STALK
Right-hand stalk fig. 54 controls windscreen washer/wiper operation.

Windscreen washer/wiper
The stalk can be moved to five different
positions:
0: windscreen wiper off;
1: intermittent.
With the stalk in position 1, turning theknurled ring A four possible intermittent
speeds are obtained:

A0E0066m

fig. 54

2: continuous slow
3: continuous fast
4: fast temporary (unstable position)
Operation in position 4 is limited to thetime the stalk is held in this position.
When the stalk is released, it returns
to position 0 automatically stopping thewiper.

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

With external lights on, activating thewindscreen washer will also activate theheadlight washer, if provided.

Never use the window
wiper to remove ice orsnow from the windscreen. In these conditions, thewiper is submitted to excessive
effort that results in motor protection cutting in and wiper operation inhibition for few seconds
as a consequence. If operation is
not restored contact Fiat Dealership.

SAFETYDEVICESWINDOW WASHINGDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 73

CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

9:40

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES

4-06-2008

IN AN
EMERGENCY

046-082 Alfa 159 GB■ = slow intermittent■ = intermittent medium■ = intermittent medium-fast

INDEX■ = fast intermittent

Alfawiki.nl
73

INDEXTECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

046-082 Alfa 159 GB

74

4-06-2008

9:40

Pagina 74“Smart washing” function

Turning the knurled ring A-fig. 54 it
is possible to increase the sensitivity of
the rain sensor, obtaining a quicker
change from stationary (no wiping)when the windscreen is dry, to first continuous speed (continuous, slow). A further stroke will confirm operation.

Pulling the lever towards the steering
wheel (unstable position) operates thewindscreen washer.
Keeping the stalk pulled with just one
movement it is possible to operate thewasher jet and the wiper at the sametime; the wiper actually comes into operation automatically when the stalk ispulled for more than half a second.
The wiper stops working 3 strokes after
releasing the stalk; a further stroke after about 6 seconds will complete thewiping operation.

A0E0227m

fig. 55

RAIN SENSOR(where provided)
The rain sensor A-fig. 55, located behind the driving mirror, is an electronic device combined with the windscreen wiper
which has the purpose of automaticallyadjusting the number of wipes to intensity of the rain. All the other functions controlled by the right-hand stalk remain unchanged.
The rain sensor is activated automatically moving the right-hand stalk to position 1-fig. 54 and it has a range ofadjustment that gradually varies between wiper stationary (no wiping)when the windscreen is dry, to wiper
at second speed (continuous, medium
wiping) with heavy rain.

Alfawiki.nl

Operating the windscreen washer withthe rain sensor activated (stalk at position 1-fig. 54) the normal washingcycle is performed at the end of which
the rain sensor resumes its normal automatic function.
Removing the electronic key from theignition device, the rain sensor is deactivated and the next time the engine isstarted it will not be reactivated even if
the stalk has remained in position 1fig. 54. In this case to activate the rain
sensor, simply move the stalk to 0 or 2
and then back to 1.
When the rain sensor is reactivated inthis way, the wiper performs one stroke,even if the windscreen is dry, to indicatethat reactivation has occurred.

❒ impurities on the controlled surface(salt, dirt, etc.);❒ difference between day and night.
Failure warnings
On certain versions rain sensor failure isshown by the instrument panel warning
light u, whereas on other versions a
dedicated message is shown on the display (see section “Warning lights andmessages”).

SAFETYDEVICESwash.

Make sure the rain sensor is deactivated if
there is ice on the windscreen.

fig. 56

A0E0046m

HEADLIGHT WASHERS(where provided) fig. 56

Streaks of water could
cause unrequired blade
movements.

WARNING

Make sure the device is
off when cleaning thewindscreen.

Headlight washers are visible and are fitted with a nozzle for each external lightfunction. They come into operation automatically when operating the windscreen washer with external lights
turned on.
IMPORTANT Check at regular intervals correct operation and cleanness of
nozzles.

CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

The rain sensor is able to recognize andautomatically adjust itself in the presence of the following particular conditions:

Rain sensor shall be deactivated when washing
the car at automatic car-WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESIMPORTANT In the event of rain sensor failure, windscreen wiper operation
with right-hand stalk at 1-fig. 54 shallbe intermittent. If failure occurs during
automatic operation, the system willkeep the last wiper operating condition.
Operation is however guaranteed although moving the stalk to other positions.

DASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 75

IN AN
EMERGENCY

9:40

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

4-06-2008

INDEX

046-082 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
75

INDEXTECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

046-082 Alfa 159 GB

76

4-06-2008

9:40

Pagina 76

CRUISE CONTROL(where provided)

TO MEMORISE SPEED
Proceed as follows:❒ turn the knurled ring A-fig. 57 toÜ and press the accelerator pedal to
the required speed;

GENERAL
The speed regulator (CRUISE CONTROL), with electronic control, makes
it possible to drive the car at the required
speed, without pressing the accelerator
pedal. This reduces driving fatigue during long journeys (specially on highways) because the speed memorised is
automatically maintained.
IMPORTANT The Cruise Control mustbe activated at speeds of between 45
and 180 k.p.h., in fourth, fifth and sixth
gears.

A0E0095m

fig. 57

DEVICE ENGAGEMENT
Turn knurled ring A-fig. 57 to Ü.
The device cannot be engaged in first
speed or reverse. It is recommended toengage it in 4th or higher speeds. Travelling downhill with the device engaged,
the car speed may increase more thanthe memorised one.
When the device is activated the instrument panel warning light Ü turnson (on certain versions together with amessage on the display) (see section“Warning lights and messages”).

❒ push the stalk upwards (+) or downwards (–), then release it: car speed
is memorised and it is therefore possible to release the accelerator pedal.
In the case of need (when overtaking
for instance) acceleration is possible simply pressing the accelerator pedal: releasing the accelerator pedal, the car will
return to the speed memorised previously.
TO RESET THE MEMORISED
SPEED
If the device has been disengaged forexample pressing the brake or clutch
pedal, the memorised speed can be reset as follows:❒ accelerate gradually until reaching a
speed approaching the one memorised;

Alfawiki.nl

TO INCREASE THE
MEMORISED SPEED
The speed memorised can be increasedin two ways:❒ pressing the accelerator and thenmemorising the new speed reached;or❒ moving the stalk upwards (+).
Each operation of the stalk will correspond to a slight increase in speed(about 1.5 km/h), while keeping thestalk upwards will correspond to a continuous speed increase.

❒ disengaging the device and thenmemorising the new speed;or❒ moving the stalk downwards (–) until reaching the new speed which will
be memorised automatically.
Each operation of the stalk will correspond to a slight decrease in speed(about 1.5 km/h), while keeping thestalk downwards will correspond to acontinuous speed decrease.
DEVICE DISENGAGEMENT
The device is disengaged in one of thefollowing cases:❒ turning the knurled ring A-fig. 57
to O;❒ turning the engine off or removing
the electronic key from the ignition
device;Alfawiki.nl❒ pressing the accelerator pedal; in thiscase the system is disengaged only
temporarily; device operation will beresumed automatically when releasing the pedal;❒ with car speed below the preset limit (in these cases the last stored
speed will stay memorised, to resume
it press button RES);
Automatic Cruise Control
deactivation
The Cruise Control is temporarily deactivated when the ABS or VDC systems
come into operation (above a max. preset time): in this case the last set speed
will stay memorised, to recall it press
button RES.
In the event of Cruise Control or engine
control system failure, the device is deactivated until removing the electronic
key from the ignition device. In thisevent contact Alfa Romeo Authorized
Services.

SAFETYDEVICESThe speed memorised can be increasedin two ways:❒ pressing the brake pedal, pressing theclutch pedal (in these cases the last
stored speed will stay memorised, toresume it press button RES);CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR❒ press the RES button (set at stalkend).

TO REDUCE MEMORISEDSPEED

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES❒ engage the gear selected at the timeof speed memorising (4th or 5thgear);DASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 77

IN AN
EMERGENCY

9:40

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

4-06-2008

INDEX

046-082 Alfa 159 GB

77

INDEXTECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

046-082 Alfa 159 GB

78

4-06-2008

9:40

Pagina 78

The device is automatically deactivatedwhen operating accidentally or incorrectly the stalk, the knurled ring A or
button RES: in this event to reactivate
the device: bring the car to the required
speed and then move the stalk upwards(+) or downwards (–).

CEILING LIGHTSFRONT CEILING LIGHT
fig. 58
Press button:
A: to turn on/off the driver’s courtesy
light;WARNINGIn the event of device
malfunction or failure,turn the knurled ring A-fig. 57
to O and contact Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services after
checking the protection fuse integrity.

B: to turn on/off the central light;
C: to turn on/off the passenger’s courtesy light.
Keeping pressed button B will turn off
all front ceiling lights and rear ceilinglights. Turning off is also indicated by thesound of a buzzer. To turn these lights
on again press briefly button B.

WARNING

When travelling withthe device on, never
set the gearshift lever to neutral.

Alfawiki.nl

fig. 58

A0E0481m

IMPORTANT Leaving inadvertently adoor open, the front ceiling light and thepuddle lights will turn off automaticallyafter a few minutes. To turn them on
again, open another door or close andopen again the same door.

Opening one of the front/rear doors

Central front light and rear light turning on for a few minutes.
This timed operation will be reactivated each time a door is opened.

Closing all the doors

With electronic key removed from ignition device: ceiling lights
will stay on for other 10 seconds. This timed operationis stopped when refitting the electronic key into the ignition
deviceStarting the engine: front central and rear courtesy lights willturn off

Removing the electronic key from the ignition device

Front central and rear courtesy lights turning on for about
10 seconds

Locking the doors

Front central and rear courtesy lights turning off

Unlocking the doors

Front central and rear courtesy lights turning on for about
10 seconds

Cutting in of the fuel cut-off switch

Front central and rear courtesy lights turning on for a few
minutes. Reactivating the fuel cut-off switch will turn off theceiling lights

In all the cases tabulated above, front and rear ceiling lights turning on/off is gradual, for 2 seconds.

SAFETYDEVICES

Front and rear ceiling lights turning on/off mode

CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

Cause

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES

In the following table are summarised the causes that make front/rear ceiling lights turn on/off and their turning on/off
mode:

DASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 79

IN AN
EMERGENCY

9:40

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

4-06-2008

INDEX

046-082 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
79046-082 Alfa 159 GB

4-06-2008

9:40

Pagina 80

DASHBOARDAND
CONTROLSDOOR PUDDLE LIGHTSINDEXTECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESThe door light will turn on when opening the door regardless of the electronic key position. It will stay on for about
3 minutes when the door is open, thenit will go off automatically.

80

fig. 59

A0E0094m

REAR CEILING LIGHT

A0E0037m

fig. 60

Press button:

IMPORTANT Leaving inadvertently adoor open, the ceiling lights will turn off
automatically after a few minutes. To
turn them on again, open another door
or close and open again the same door.

A: to turn on/off the driver’s courtesy
light;

Versions with sunroof(where provided) fig. 60

B: to turn on/off the passenger’s courtesy light.

Versions with sunroof are fitted with tworear ceiling lights located above the rears
doors.

Versions without sunroof
fig. 59

Closing the doors, the ceiling lights will
stay on for a few seconds, then they willswitch off automatically. Ceiling lights
will turn off when fitting the electronic
key into the ignition device.

Press lens A-fig. 60 to turn theselights on/off.

Alfawiki.nl

Certain versions are equipped with anadditional safety switch that in the eventof a crash comes into operation by cutting off the power supply.
These two safety switches therefore prevent dangerous fuel leaks due to fuelline cracking, and sparks or electric discharges due to damaging or malfunctioning of the electric components of the
car in the event of a crash.
IMPORTANT After a crash, remember to remove the key from the ignition
device to prevent battery run-down.

Door unlocking in the eventof a crash
In the event of a crash that triggers thefuel cut-off switch, the doors will unlock
automatically to enable getting into the
car and at the same time the passenger’s compartment lights will turn on.
It is however always possible to open
the doors from the passenger’s compartment by means of the internal door
handles.
If, after a crash no fuel leaks or damages to the electric devices (e.g. headlights) are found and the car can bestarted again, reset the fuel cut-off
switch and the power supply cut-off
switch (where provided). Follow the instructions given below.

If central door locking
has been activatedfrom inside the car and after acrash the fuel cut-off switch
cannot activate automatic door
unlocking, it will not be possible to get into the car. In any
case, door opening from theoutside depends on door conditions after the crash: if adoor is badly damaged it will
be impossible to open it. In thisevent try to open one of theother doors.

SAFETYDEVICESThe car is fitted with a safety switch thatin the event of a crash comes into operation by cutting off fuel and turning
off the engine as a consequence.

If, after a crash, you
smell fuel or see leaks
from the fuel system, do notreset the switches to avoid
fire risk.

WARNING

CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

POWER SUPPLY AND FUEL
CUT-OFF SWITCHESWARNINGWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCONTROLSDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 81

IN AN
EMERGENCY

9:40

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

4-06-2008

INDEX

046-082 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
81

4-06-2008

9:40

Pagina 82

INDEX

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

046-082 Alfa 159 GB

82

A0E0221m

fig. 61

Resetting the fuel cut-off
switchA0E0126m

fig. 62

Resetting the power supply
cut-off switch(where provided)

WARNING

Before resetting the fuel cut-off switch carefully inspect the car for fuelleaks or damages to electric
devices (e.g. headlights).

WARNING

Before resetting thepower supply cut-off
switch carefully inspect the car
for fuel leaks or damages toelectric devices (e.g. headlights).

To reset the fuel cut-off switch, press button A-fig. 61.

Alfawiki.nl

fig. 63

A0E0071m

The switch is located inside the fuse box
at battery positive terminal.
To reset the power supply cut-off switch,
proceed as follows:❒ press button A-fig. 61 to reset thefuel cut-off switch;❒ open the bonnet;❒ operate the retaining clips A-fig. 62
and remove the protection cover B;❒ press button C-fig. 63 to reset thepower supply cut-off switch.

Pagina 83

DASHBOARDAND
CONTROLSINTERIOR FITTINGS

Oddment compartment
To open the oddment compartment,press button A-fig. 64 and raise thecover B.

fig. 65

A0E0141m

fig. 66

A0E0139m

Air-conditioned food box(where provided)

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES

On certain versions the central armrest
can be adjusted forward or backward by
operating the cover B-fig. 64.

A0E0039m

fig. 64

Access to the food box is gained fromthe oddment compartment by lifting tab
A-fig. 65. Turn wheel B to adjust the
air flow inside the food box.
IMPORTANT Function of the foodbox is to keep the temperature of thedrinks placed inside it; drinks shall bewarmed or cooled as required before being put inside the food box.

Pay attention not tospill the drinks: the foodbox bottom however isprovided with a hole to drain
spilled liquids, if any.

IN AN
EMERGENCY

The central armrest is located between
the front seats. Inside the armrest arehoused an oddment compartment andan air-conditioned food box (where provided) (see next paragraphs).

SAFETYDEVICESCENTRAL ARMREST

CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

9:40

REAR ARMREST(where provided)
To use the central armrest A-fig. 66
lower it as shown in the figure.

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

4-06-2008

INDEX

083-128 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl

83

4-06-2008

9:40

Pagina 84

fig. 67

A0E0142m

IN AN
EMERGENCYINDEXTECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

84

A0E0146m

fig. 69

fig. 70

A0E0199m

fig. 71

A0E0200m

REAR ARMREST WITHODDMENT COMPARTMENT(where provided)

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

083-128 Alfa 159 GB

fig. 68

A0E0143m

To use the central armrest B-fig. 69,
take it from tab A and then lower it.
Inside the armrest is fitted an oddmentcompartment fig. 71. To open it, press
button B-fig. 70 and raise the coverC-fig. 70.

Ski compartment(where provided)

Ski compartment(where provided)

This compartment can be used for carrying long loads.

This compartment can be used for carrying long loads.

To have access to this compartment,
lower the armrest, pull the lid tab Afig. 67, then lower it on the armrest
fig. 68.

To have access to this compartment,
lower the armrest, press button A-fig.
72 of the lid B, then lower it on thearmrest.

Alfawiki.nl

4-06-2008

9:40

Pagina 85

GLOVE COMPARTMENT

A0E0148m

To open the lid B, switch A-fig. 73(accessible from the boot) shall be set
in vertical position (horizontal positionÁ = compartment locked).

Do not travel with theglove compartment open;
it could harm the passenger in the event of an accident.

A0E0031m

CIGAR LIGHTER
Front cigar lighter(optional for versions/markets where applicable)
It is located on the central console, near
the handbrake lever. To use the cigar
lighter, raise cover A-fig. 75 as shownby the arrow.

INDEX

fig. 73

To open the glove compartment use leverA-fig. 74. When the glove compartment is opened, the internal courtesy lightturns on. Leaving inadvertently open the
glove compartment, this light will turn off
automatically after a few minutes. The
folding top is also provided with a recess
for a pen or a pencil.

fig. 75

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES

A0E0149m

fig. 74

IN AN
EMERGENCY

A0E0147m

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

fig. 72

CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

083-128 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
85

4-06-2008

9:40

Pagina 86

DASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

083-128 Alfa 159 GB

Do not plug electric accessories with absorption
exceeding the max. specified value. Prolonged current absorption could drain the battery
and impair next engine start up.

I

INDEX

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICES

O

86

OFF

AUTO

AUTO

fig. 76

A0E0152m

A0E0068m

fig. 77

Press button B-fig. 76 to switch on
the cigar lighter with key fitted into ignition device.

Rear cigar lighter(optional for versions/markets where applicable)

IMPORTANT Always check that the cigar lighter has turned off.

It is located on the central console between the seats (see fig. 77).

IMPORTANT The cigar lighter getsvery hot. Handle it with care and makesure that it is not used by children: danger of fire and/or burns.
IMPORTANT Do not plug electric accessories with power exceeding 100W
to the front cigar lighter seat.

IMPORTANT Do not plug electric accessories with power exceeding 140W
to the rear cigar lighter seat.
IMPORTANT Oversize plugs could
damage the cigar lighter outlet tabs.

Alfawiki.nl

IMPORTANT To safeguard the lighting life of certain internal devices (e.g.:cigar lighter ring and ashtray), whenswitching on the external lights, thesedevices will switch on according to thepassenger's compartment brightness:with enough daylight these devices will
not switch on. On the contrary they willswitch on with poor daylight.

4-06-2008

9:40

Pagina 87

It is located on the central console, near
the handbrake lever.
To use the cigar lighter, raise cover Afig. 78 and open lid B.
Front ashtray is removable: to removeit, pull it upwards.

A0E0101m

fig. 81

A0E0156m

Rear ashtray
It is located on the central console, between front seats. To use the ashtray,
lift lid A-fig. 79 as shown by the arrow.
Rear ashtray is removable: to remove it,press on the central part and pull it upwards.
IMPORTANT Do not use the ashtrayas paper bin: it could set on fire on contact with cigarette stubs.

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES

Front ashtray

fig. 80IN AN
EMERGENCYASHTRAY(optional for versions/markets where applicable)

A0E0153m

fig. 79

GLASS/CAN HOLDER
fig. 80
It is located on the central console, near
the handbrake lever. To use it lift coverA-fig. 75.

IMPORTANT Do not use the ashtrayas paper bin: it could set on fire on contact with cigarette stubs.

EYEGLASSES HOLDER(where provided)

Alfawiki.nl

It is located near the front ceiling light.
To use it, press lid A-fig. 81.

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

A0E0140m

INDEX

fig. 78

CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

083-128 Alfa 159 GB

87

4-06-2008

9:40

Pagina 88

fig. 82

A0E0197m

INDEX

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

083-128 Alfa 159 GB

88

A0E0154m

fig. 84

fig. 83

SUN VISORS(where provided)
Certain versions are provided with sunvisors behind the rear seats.

A0E0102m

ODDMENTS COMPARTMENTS(where provided) fig. 84

To use the mirror open cover A-fig.
85.

They are located on the central console
between the front seats.

Mirror lights will turn on automaticallywhen lifting the cover and they will turnoff when lowering it or few minutes after removing the electronic key from theignition device.

SUN VISORS
A0E0198m

fig. 85

These are positioned to the sides of therear-view mirror. They can swing to thesides and up or down.
On certain versions, sun visors are fitted
on the back with a courtesy mirror anda light which enables to use the mirror
also with poor sunlight.

To use it, take the tab A-fig. 82, pull it
forwards and secure it to the hooks set on
the top of the car roof (see fig. 83).

Alfawiki.nl1) press and keep pressed the outer buttons (A and C): 20 seconds after led D
will start flashing. Release both buttons;

DESCRIPTION

A0E0311m

fig. 86

PROGRAMMINGIMPORTANT While programming thesystem, check for the absence of people, animals or objects within the manoeuvre space of main doors or gates toprevent the risk of injuries or damages.
IMPORTANT Pull up the handbrakeand fit the key into the ignition device.
Do not start the engine.

NOTE This operation clears the standard codes programmed by the manufacturer. It will not be necessary to repeat this operation the next time you
program the buttons.
2) press and keep pressed the required
HomeLink button A or B or C. Do notrelease the button until completing operation 4;3) when the HomeLink led D starts
flashing slowly (about 20 seconds after) bring the portable remote control(keeping the button to program
pressed) as close as possible to the
HomeLink.

INDEX

The HomeLink fixed-system installed onyour car enables to control up to threedifferent devices for opening/closing
garage doors or gates, or for turning
on/off lighting system and for activating/deactivating alarm systems installedat home and/or office.

SAFETYDEVICES

Proceed as follows:

CORRECT USE
OF THE CARHOMELINK(where provided)

DASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 89

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES

9:40

IN AN
EMERGENCY

4-06-2008

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

083-128 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
89

INDEXTECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

083-128 Alfa 159 GB

90

4-06-2008

9:40

Pagina 90

The distance required between the
portable remote control and the HomeLink depends on the system to be programmed (type of frequency of maindoor, gate or other system).
If D does not start to flash quickly try
again changing the distance between
HomeLink and portable remote control(move them away slightly). If 20 seconds later the led is still flashing slowing, repeat the operation changing again
the distance between Homelink and remote control.
4) the HomeLink led D will start blinking, first slowly and then quickly. Whenit starts flashing quickly, release both
buttons (HomeLink and portable remotecontrol).

HOW TO USE THE
HOMELINK SYSTEMSYNCHRONISINGALTERNATE CODESThe HomeLink remote control activatesthe operation of the garage door motor or gate motor exactly as the portableremote control. The car shall be within
the range of the motor and the key shallbe fitted into the ignition device.

To ascertain whether your garage door
motor or gate motor is provided with analternate code, proceed as follows:

Press the programmed button (A or Bor C). During signal transmission the led
D will stay on and the set system(garage door, gate, etc.) will obey.
If the HomeLink system set as describedabove does not work, this may be dueto the fact the original portable remotecontrol has an alternate code (see paragraph "Synchronising alternate codes").
It is however always possible to use theoriginal portable remote control to operate the system (garage door, gate,etc.).

Alfawiki.nl

consult the owner handbook provided
by the garage door motor's or gate motor's manufacturer;
the portable remote control seems tohave programmed HomeLink; HomeLink
however is not up to open or to close
the garage door or the gate;press and keep pressed the programmed
button (A or B or C).
With an alternate code system, the led
D blinks fast for short and then it stays
on glowing steadily for two seconds.
This sequence is repeated for 20 seconds.

IMPORTANT The car shall be within
the range of the motor. Pull up the handbrake and fit the key into the ignition
device. Do not start the engine.

❒ find the set-up button on the upperside of the garage door/gate motor.
Colour and position may vary according to the manufacturer (consult
the motor handbook);

It is possible to programme another original portable remote control on one
HomeLink button already programmed.
Previous programming will be cancelled.

❒ press the motor set-up button (thisaction will usually turn up the "setup" pilot light). After operation 2,
start to perform operation 3 within
30 seconds;

IMPORTANT While programming thesystem, check for the absence of people, animals or objects within the manoeuvre space of main doors or gates toprevent the risk of injuries or damages.

❒ press the programmed button (A or
B or C) and release it. Press again
the programmed button and then release it to end the operation. Certain
motors could require to repeat once
again the operation for concluding
the setting.

IMPORTANT Pull up the handbrakeand fit the key into the ignition device.
Do not start the engine.

Now the motor should be up to recognise the signal transmitted by HomeLink
and therefore to open/close the garage
door or the gate.

Proceed as follows:
1) press and keep pressed the required
HomeLink button A or B or C. Do notrelease the button until completing operation 3;2) when the HomeLink led D starts
flashing slowly (about 20 seconds after) bring the portable remote control(keeping the button to program
pressed) as close as possible to the
HomeLink.

SAFETYDEVICESRE-PROGRAMMING ONESINGLE BUTTONCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

IMPORTANT While synchronising thesystem, check for the absence of people, animals or objects within the manoeuvre space of main doors or gates toprevent the risk of injuries or damages.

Proceed as follows:

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESHomeLink can only work if the programmed alternate code is synchronisedwith the system of the device (garage
door, gate, etc.).

DASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 91

IN AN
EMERGENCY

9:40

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

4-06-2008

INDEX

083-128 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
91

INDEXTECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

083-128 Alfa 159 GB

92

4-06-2008

9:40

Pagina 92

The distance required between the
portable remote control and the HomeLink depends on the system to be programmed (type of frequency of maindoor, gate or other system).
If D does not start to flash quickly try
again changing the distance between
HomeLink and portable remote control(move them away slightly). If 20 seconds later the led is still flashing slowing, repeat the operation changing again
the distance between Homelink and remote control.
3) the HomeLink led D will start blinking, first slowly and then quickly. Whenit starts flashing quickly, release both
buttons (HomeLink and portable remotecontrol).

CLEARING THE
PROGRAMMED BUTTONSTECHNICAL DATA FOR THE
ASSISTANCE SERVICE

You are recommended to clear the
HomeLink programming before sellingthe car.

If after following the previous instructions you are still unable to set the
HomeLink system, contact the Assistance Service (HomeLink toll free number 00800046635465) and communicate the following data:

Programming is cleared on all the threebuttons at the same time.
Proceed as follows:❒ press and keep pressed the outerbuttons (A and C): 20 seconds after led D will start flashing.
❒ Release both buttons.

❒ make and model of your car, including the date of manufacture andthe country where you bought it;❒ make, model, date of manufacture
and operating frequency of the original portable remote control (ifknown).
IMPORTANT Certain phone carriers
do not permit the use of the toll-freenumber. It is therefore required to dial
the alternative pay-number, +49 6838
907-277 (dialling this number will start
an international call).

In this way the system previously programmed on HomeLink is cleared andthe new system is ready for use. This
operation has no effect on the other two
HomeLink buttons.

Alfawiki.nl

The sunroof is provided with manuallyoperated sun curtain with handle and air
vents.
Sunroof can only be operated when the
key is fitted into the ignition device.

Do not open the sunroof
if there is snow or ice on
it: it could be damaged.

SAFETYDEVICES

When closed it enables sunlight to get
into the passenger compartment, whereas when open it enables wide openingof the whole glass sunroof surface.

When leaving the car,the ignition key should
be removed to prevent the
sunroof from being operated
inadvertently and harming
anyone remaining in the car.
Improper use of the sunroof
can be dangerous. Before andduring its operation ensurethat any passengers are not at
risk from the moving roof either by personal objects getting caught in the mechanism
or by being injured by it directly.

C

fig. 87

A0E0238m

IMPORTANT Top comfort position
with sunroof open is obtained by turning selector A-fig. 87 to position.
Operating the selector it is possible toopen/close the sunroof in one of the following cases:❒ fitting the electronic key into the ignition device;

SUNROOF OPENING
Opening from inside the car
Turn selector A-fig. 87, as shown by thearrow. The sunroof will stop in position assoon as the selector is released.
The movement of the roof may be interrupted and restarted by means of slightpressure on selector A.

❒ in the first 2 minutes after removing
the key from the ignition device or up
to door opening.
Opening from outside the car
Press the electronic key button Ë forover 2 seconds.

CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

The sunroof consists of a moving panesliding horizontally and retractable.

WARNINGWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESSUNROOF(where provided)

DASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 93

IN AN
EMERGENCY

9:40

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

4-06-2008

INDEX

083-128 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
93

4-06-2008

9:40

Pagina 94

SUNROOF CLOSINGThe movement of the roof may be interrupted and restarted by means ofslight pressure on selector A.
Though the selector A (by pressing it)
it is possible to use the “Inhibit” position that will exclude the anti-crushingsafety system.

INDEX

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESSAFETYDEVICES

Turn selector A-fig. 87 counter-clockwise.

CORRECT USE
OF THE CARDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

083-128 Alfa 159 GB

94

If when removing the key from the ignition device, you activate sunroof sliding by pressing the electronic key button Ë while sunroof sliding by manualcontrol (by pressing the selector) is being performed, this last control will prevail. To make the sunroof sliding automatically you have to press again button Ë.

Sunroof sliding by pressing the electronic
key button Ë can be stopped by operating selector A-fig. 87 (by changing its
position or pressing it).
Changing selector position, will makethe sunroof slide to the new position ignoring button Ë.
fig. 88

WARNING

Open and close the roof
only when the vehicle
is stationary.

Alfawiki.nl

A0E0070m

SUN CURTAIN fig. 88
The sun curtain shall be used to adjust
brightness inside the passenger compartment. Sun curtain is fitted with handle and air vents.

The anti-crushing safety system fitted on
the front curtain outline is active duringhorizontal closing (front edge) and vertical closing of the panel (rear edge) andit will cut in when it finds an obstacle(e.g.: finger, hand, etc …), thus guaranteeing sunroof reversal for a short section.

After disconnecting the battery or failingthe protection fuse, the sunroof shall be“initialised” again, proceed as follows:❒ during horizontal closing it is active
along the whole stroke of the sunroof
and when it finds an obstacle on thefront side of the pane it guarantees
a 10 cm stroke reversal;❒ during vertical closing it is active
along the whole stroke of the sunroof
and when it finds an obstacle on therear side of the pane it guarantees
stroke reversal.

A0E0187m

fig. 89

EMERGENCY OPERATION
In a emergency or during servicing (without power supply), the sunroof can be
operated manually; proceed as follows:❒ press and keep pressed selector until
sunroof locking;❒ release selector;❒ press selector again within 3 seconds,
and keep it pressed;❒ press the light notches to release theclips and remove the front ceiling lightA-fig. 89.

❒ a few seconds after the sunroof will
move automatically (during this stage
keep on pressing the knob);❒ fit the setscrew wrench into the proper slot B;❒ initialisation will end when the sunroof stops. Release selector.

❒ turn the key to open or to close (according to rotation direction) the sunroof.

INDEX

When an obstacle is found, sunroof
stroke is stopped immediately and its
stroke is reversed to the preset position:❒ turn selector fully leftwards (counterclokwise);

SAFETYDEVICES

SUNROOF INITIALISATIONPROCEDURE

CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

ANTI-CRUSHING SAFETY
SYSTEMDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 95

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES

9:40

IN AN
EMERGENCY

4-06-2008

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

083-128 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
95

INDEXTECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

083-128 Alfa 159 GB

96

4-06-2008

9:40

Pagina 96

DOORS
CENTRAL DOOR LOCKING/UNLOCKING SYSTEM
Door locking from the outside
With the doors closed, press the electronic key button Á or fit and turn themetal insert (inside the key) into thelock of the driver’s door. Central door
locking can only be activated if all thedoors are closed. If one or more doors
are open after pressing the electronic
key button Á the direction indicators andthe driver’s door led will flash fast for
about 3 seconds.
If one or more doors are open by turning
the metal insert of the electronic key, only the driver’s door led will flash fast for
about 3 seconds. If the doors are closed
but the tailgate is open, central locking
is actuated: the direction indicators (onlyfor locking performed by pressing buttonÁ) and the driver’s door led will flash fast
for about 3 seconds.

Through the “Setup menu” (or the Radionavigation system for certain versions)
it is possible to activate the function thatenables to unlock only the driver’s door
lock by pressing the electronic key buttonË (see paragraph “Reconfigurable multifunction display” in this section).
With this function on (ON) it is however possible to unlock the other doors bypressing button q (fig. 90) set on thecentral console.
Door unlocking fromthe outside
Press the electronic key button Ë or, fit
and turn the metal insert (inside thekey) into the lock of the driver’s door.
Door locking/unlocking fromthe inside
Press button q (fig. 90) to lock/unlock all the doors.
The button is provided with a circular led
indicating the car condition (doors
locked or unlocked). When doors arelocked the led is on: in this case pressing the button again will unlock all thedoors and will turn the led off.

Alfawiki.nl

fig. 90

A0E0025m

With key removed the led will turn off
after about 2 minutes.
When doors are unlocked the led is off;pressing the button will lock all thedoors. Central door locking will only takeplace if all doors are perfectly closed.

A0E0155m

fig. 91

CHILD LOCK
Rear doors are fitted with a locking device fig. 91 that inhibits door opening from the inside.
This device can be engaged/disengaged(by the metal insert of the key) onlywith doors open:❒ position 1: engaged (door locked);❒ position 2: disengaged (door canbe opened from the inside).

IMPORTANT After engaging the childlock on both rear doors, check for proper engagement by trying to open a reardoor with the internal handle.

SAFETYDEVICESIMPORTANT Always use this device
when transporting children.

CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

IMPORTANT With central locking system on, pulling the internal door handle
will unlock all the doors. Lacking power (blown fuse, battery disconnected,etc.) it is however possible to lock thedoors manually.

IMPORTANT Each device acts only
on the relevant door.

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES

Button q is disabled after door locking
carried out by operating the remote control, the driver's door revolving plug, orby automatic door locking after about
2.5 minutes and it will be enabled again
after door unlocking carried out by pressing the key button Ë, by turning themetal insert of the key into the driver's
door lock or by fitting the key into theignition device.

DASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 97

IN AN
EMERGENCY

9:40

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

4-06-2008

INDEX

083-128 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
97

INDEXTECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

083-128 Alfa 159 GB

98

4-06-2008

9:40

Pagina 98

DOOR LOCKING WITH RUN
DOWN BATTERY
If the car battery is run down, to lockthe doors proceed as described in thefollowing points.
Right front door
Proceed as follows:❒ remove the protection plug on thedoor;

A0E0237m

fig. 92

Doorknobs can be realigned (only after
recharging the battery) as follows:

IMPORTANT As concerns rear doors,with child lock device on and the previously described locking active, operating the internal door handle will notopen the door but will only realign doorknobs; to open the door pull the external door handle. Emergency locking will
not disable central door locking/unlocking button q.
IMPORTANT After disconnecting thebattery or failing the protection fuse, thedoor locking/unlocking mechanism shallbe “initialised” again, proceed as follows:❒ fit the electronic key metal insert into A-fig. 92;❒ pressing the electronic key button Ë;❒ turn the key clockwise (counter-clockwise for right-hand drive versions);❒ pressing door locking/unlocking button q;❒ remove the key from A-fig. 92 andthen efit the plug on the door.

❒ opening with the key in front door revolving plug;❒ press the remote control button Á or
the button q on the central console;❒ pulling internal door handle.

❒ press the remote control button Ë or
the button q on the central console.

Alfawiki.nl❒ lock the doors;This system is particularly useful whenchildren operate the windows inadvertently and make it possible to close/
open (where provided) the windows using the remote control when leaving thecar.

In this case it is necessary to carry out
system restore procedure as follows:❒ open the windows;or❒ remove and then refit the key into theignition device.
If no malfunction is present, the window
returns to its normal operation automatically. In the event of a failure see section“Warning lights and messages”.

Alfawiki.nl

By the metal insert of the key
On all versions:❒ turning clockwise the metal insert of
the key into the driver's door revolving plug will open all the windows and the sunroof (where provided) at the same time.
❒ turning counterclockwise the metal
insert of the key into the driver's
door revolving plug will close all thewindows and the sunroof (where
provided) at the same time.

By remote control
On all versions, keep button Ë pressedfor over 2 seconds to open all the windows and the sunroof (where provided)at the same time.

The system complies
with the forthcomingStandard 2000/4/ EC
concerning the safety of passengers leaning out of the passenger compartment.

SAFETYDEVICES

Versions with 4 power windows are fitted with automatic window opening/closing on all doors. For versions/markets where applicable the passenger
side electrical window and the rear electrical windows are provided with a safety system with anti-crushing seal able torecognize the eventual presence of an
obstacle during the closing movementof the window; upon verification of thisevent the system interrupts and immediately inverts the run of the window.

Windows and sunroof
opening/closing by theelectronic key(where provided)

CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

Versions with 2 front power windows
are fitted with automatic window opening/closing only on the driver’s side.

IMPORTANT In the event the anticrushing function is activated 5 times in
only 1 minute or in the event of a failure, the system will automatically enter
the “recovery” mode (self-protection).
This condition is pointed out by the fact
that, in the closing stroke, the windows
goes up in jerks.

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES

POWER WINDOWSDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 99

IN AN
EMERGENCY

9:40

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

4-06-2008

INDEX

083-128 Alfa 159 GB

99

083-128 Alfa 159 GB

4-06-2008

9:40

Pagina 100

DASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

C (where provided) – rear left window
opening/closing; “automatic continuous” mode operation during window
opening/closing;INDEX

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESD (where provided) – rear right window opening/closing; “automatic continuous” mode operation just during window opening;100

fig. 93

A0E0051m

CONTROLS
Driver side
On the driver’s door panel are set the
buttons fig. 93 for controlling, withelectronic key fitted into the ignition device:
A – front left window opening/closing;window opening or closing in “automatic continuous” mode;B – front right window opening/closing; window opening or closing in “automatic continuous” mode (only versions with 4 power windows);

E (where provided) – rear power window enabling/disabling controls (whenrear power window controls are disabled, the led on button E will turn on
and disabled controls will turn off).
Press buttons A, B, C or D to open/
close the required window.
Pressing briefly one of the buttons thewindow “jerks” whereas a prolonged
pressing makes the window opening or
closing in “automatic continuous”
mode.
Pressing button A, B, C or D again willstop the window in the required position.

Alfawiki.nl

Improper use of thepower windows can be
dangerous. Before andduring its operation ensure thatany passengers are not at risk
from the moving glass either by
personal objects getting caught
in the mechanism or by being injured by it directly. Always remove the ignition key when
getting out of the car to preventthe power windows being operated accidentally and constituting a danger to the passengers in the car.
Front passenger door/
rear doors
Front passenger door and, on certain
versions, rear doors are fitted with button panels controlling opening/closingof the corresponding window.

The boot lock is electric and it is disabled when the car is running.

Opening the boot its internal light willturn on and it will turn off automatically when re-closing the tailgate.
Leaving the tailgate inadvertently
open, the light will turn off automatically after a few minutes.
A0E0498m

fig. 94

On certain versions, improper bootclosing is indicated by the instrument
panel warning light ´, whereas onother versions the symbol R and amessage are displayed (see section“Warning lights and messages”).
When unlocked, the boot can be
opened from outside the vehicle pressing the electric logo (fig. 94) until it
snaps unlocked.

INDEX

Through the “Setup menu” (or theRadionavigation system for certain
versions) boot opening can be set by
selecting the option “Indep. boot”(see paragraph “Reconfigurable multifunction display” in this section):when this function is on, the boot can
only be opened by pressing the electronic key button `.

SAFETYDEVICES

Tailgate opening is facilitated by theside gas shock springs.

CORRECT USE
OF THE CARBOOTDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 101

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES

9:40

IN AN
EMERGENCY

4-06-2008

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

083-128 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
101

083-128 Alfa 159 GB

4-06-2008

9:40

Pagina 102❒ lock the doors and the tailgate;
A0E0228m

EMERGENCY OPENING OF
THE BOOT FROM THE
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT(foreseen only on the
3-volume saloon version)
If the battery is disconnected, the bootcan be opened by pulling the leverA-fig. 95 set under the rear left seat.

INDEX

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCEWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES

fig. 95

IN AN
EMERGENCY

CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLSIMPORTANT After disconnecting thebattery or failing the protection fuse, thetailgate locking/unlocking mechanism
shall be “initialised” again, proceed asfollows:

102❒ press the remote control button Á or
the button q on the central console;❒ press the remote control button Ë or
the button q on the central console.

OPENING BY REMOTE
CONTROL
Press the electronic key button `.
Opening is indicated by double flashingof direction indicators.
Opening the boot with alarm (where
provided) on will cause the following:❒ volumetric protection deactivation;❒ anti-raising protection deactivation;❒ tailgate monitoring sensor.
Re-closing the tailgate will restore all theabove functions and direction indicators
will turn on for about 1 second.

Refit the handle under the cushion afterusing it.

Alfawiki.nl

IMPORTANT If the option for ”Indep.
boot” is on, before closing the boot,check whether you have with you theignition key since the boot will be locked
automatically.

The addition of objects(speakers, spoilers, etc.)
on the rear shelf or bootlid, except those envisaged by
the manufacturer, may preventthe gas filled struts at the sidesof the boot from working properly.

WARNING

When using the boot,make sure the loads do
not exceed the permitted
weight (see “Technical specifications” chapter). Also makesure the items in the boot arearranged properly to prevent
them being thrown forwards
and injuring passengers should
you brake sharply.
EXTENDING THE BOOT
(where provided)
To extend the boot proceed as follows:❒ remove rear head restraints;❒ move aside the seat belt, check that
it is not twisted;

Never travel with objects on the rear shelf
to prevent them being thrownforwards and injuring passengers in case of accident or
sharp braking.

fig. 96

A0E0085m❒ lift seat back lever A-fig. 96 andtilt the seat back forward. Lever raising is indicated by a “red band” B.
IMPORTANT Before folding the backrest over onto the cushion, in order toavoid interference, make sure that theseat belt branches are in their housingson the cushion.

INDEXWARNINGSAFETYDEVICES

Lower the tailgate pressing the lock until hearing the locking click.

CORRECT USE
OF THE CARTAILGATE CLOSINGDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 103

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES

9:40

IN AN
EMERGENCY

4-06-2008

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

083-128 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
103

INDEXTECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

083-128 Alfa 159 GB

104

4-06-2008

9:40

Pagina 104

TO RETURN THE REAR SEATBACK TO ITS ORIGINALPOSITIONWARNING

Move aside the seat belts, check thatthey are not twisted.
Raise the seat backrests and push themback until hearing the locking click ofboth retainers; the “red band” B aside
the levers A shall no longer be visible.
The “red band” B actually indicates thatthe backrest is not properly secured.
IMPORTANT Make sure the head restraints are properly positioned.

WARNING

Make sure the backrestis properly secured atboth sides (“red bands” Bfig. 96 not visible) to prevent
it moves forward in the eventof sharp braking causing injuries to passengers.

A0E0131m

fig. 97

ANCHORING THE LOAD
The boot houses 4 hooks A-fig. 97
for anchoring ropes in order to guarantee perfect load anchoring.

WARNINGA heavy load that has
not been secured may
cause serious harm.

Alfawiki.nl

If you want to carryreserve fuel in a can,follow law regulations, only
using a certified can, suitably
fastened to the load securing
eyelets. Even in this way therisk of fire is increased in thecase of an accident.

❒ pull lever A-fig. 98 until hearing
the releasing click;❒ press the safety lever B-fig. 99 upwards and raise the bonnet.

A0E0122m

fig. 98

WARNING

IMPORTANT Bonnet raising is aided
by two gas springs. Do not tamper withthese springs and guide the bonnet
while raising it.
IMPORTANT Before opening the bonnet, check that windscreen wiper arms
are not lifted from the windscreen.

IMPORTANT Always check that thebonnet is closed properly to avoid its
opening while the car is travelling.

Carry out operations
only when the car is
stationary.
WARNING
A0E0470m

fig. 99

TO CLOSE THE BONNET
Lower the bonnet at approx. 20 centimetres from the engine compartment
and then let it drop, ensuring that it isfully closed and not just held in positionby the safety catch. If the bonnet does
not close properly, do not push it down
but open it again and repeat the above
procedure.

Alfawiki.nl

For safety reasons thebonnet must be closed
properly to avoid its opening
while the car is travelling.
Therefore, always check it isproperly closed and the catch
engaged. Should you noticethat the catch is not perfectly
engaged when travelling, stop
the car immediately and close
the bonnet.

SAFETYDEVICES

Proceed as follows:

CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

TO OPEN THE BONNETWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES

Improper bonnet closing is indicated (oncertain versions) by the instrument panel warning light ´ (where provided), orby symbol S and a message on thedisplay (see section “Warning lights andmessages”).

BONNETDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 105

IN AN
EMERGENCY

9:40

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

4-06-2008

INDEX

083-128 Alfa 159 GB

105

4-06-2008

9:40

Pagina 106

HEADLIGHTS

ROOF RACK/SKI RACKADJUSTING THE HEADLIGHT
BEAM

The car is preset for mounting roof
racks/ski racks.
Front hooks are in points A-fig. 100.
Rear hooks are in points B.

A0E0097m

fig. 100

IMPORTANT After few kilometers,
check that fastening screws are firmly
tightened.

Distribute the load evenly and when driving, bearin mind the increased
sensitivity to side wind.

IMPORTANT Never exceed the max.
permissible loads (see section “”Technical specifications”).

INDEX

106

Proper adjustment of the headlightbeams is of vital importance for yoursafety and comfort and also for the other road users. To ensure you and otherdrivers have the best visibility conditions
when travelling with the headlights on,
the headlights must be set properly. Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services tohave the headlights properly adjusted.
HEADLIGHT AIMING DEVICE
It works with the key fitted into the ignition device and dipped beams on.

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

083-128 Alfa 159 GB

When the car is loaded, it slopes backwards. This means that the headlightbeam rises. In this case, it is necessary
to return it to the correct position.

Alfawiki.nl

083-128 Alfa 159 GB

4-06-2008

9:40

Pagina 107

DASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Control has four positions corresponding
to the loads given below:

SAFETYDEVICES❒ position 0: one or two passenger onfront seats and kerb weight (including full fuel tank, tools and accessories);

FRONT FOG LIGHT
ADJUSTMENT
Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services
to have the headlights correctly adjusted.

HEADLIGHT ADJUSTMENTABROAD
The dipped beam headlights are adjusted for circulation in the country in which
the car is marketed. In countries with
opposite circulation, to avoid glaring oncoming vehicles, proceed as follows:❒ remove headlight cover (see paragraph “Dipped beam headlights” insection “In an emergency”);❒ move lever A-fig. 102 aside;

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESIMPORTANT Check headlight slant
each time the transported load changes.

A0E0050m

IN AN
EMERGENCY

If the car is fitted with bixenon headlights, headlight aiming is electronic andtherefore control A is not present.

❒ position 3: driver plus 300 kg load
completely stored into the boot.

fig. 102TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

In this event, to adjust the headlightslant use control A-fig. 101 set on the
button control panel near the steering
wheel.

❒ position 2: five passengers and bootfully loaded (about 50 kg);

INDEX

fig. 101

CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR❒ position 1: five passengers;
A0E0226m

Alfawiki.nl
107

INDEXTECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

083-128 Alfa 159 GB

108

4-06-2008

9:40

Pagina 108

ABS SYSTEM
The car is fitted with ABS braking system, which prevents the wheels fromlocking when braking, makes the mostof road grip and gives the best control
when emergency braking under difficultroad conditions.
System is completed by EBD (Electronic Braking Force Distribution), which distributes the braking action between front
and rear wheels.
IMPORTANT To have the maximum
efficiency of the braking system, it isnecessary a setting period of about 500
km: during this period it is better toavoid sharp, repeated and prolonged
brakes.

ABS SYSTEMINTERVENTION
The driver can tell the ABS system hascome into action because the brake pedal pulsates slightly and the system getsnoisier: it means that the car speed
should be altered to fit the type of roadsurface.

WARNING

The ABS exploits thetyre-road grip at the
best, but it cannot improve it;
you should therefore takeevery care when driving on
slippery surfaces without taking unnecessary risks.

WARNING

If the ABS system cuts
in, it is a sign that thegrip between tyre and theroad surface has reached thelimit: you must slow down tomatch the speed to the road
grip available.

Alfawiki.nl

WARNING

When the ABS cuts in,and you feel the brake
pedal pulsating, do not remove
your foot, but keep it pressed;
in doing so you will stop in the
shortest amount of space possible under the current roadconditions.

Drive carefully to the closest Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services to have the system
checked.

In this case with sharp braking the rear
wheels might lock too early, with thepossibility of skidding. Drive extremely
carefully to the closest Alfa Romeo Authorized Services to have the system
checked.

The system, which cannot be cut out,
recognizes emergency braking (on the
ground of the brake pedal operation
speed) and considerably increases thepressure in the brake circuit.
Brake Assist is deactivated on the versions equipped with VDC system in theevent of VDC system failure, indicatedby the turning on of warning light á on
the instrument panel (on certain versions together with a message on thedisplay).

SAFETYDEVICESABS failure is indicated by the turning
on of warning light > on the instrument panel (on certain versions together
with the dedicated message on the display) (see section “Warning lights andmessages”). In this case the braking
system is still efficient, though without
the aid of the ABS system.

EBD failure is indicated by the turning
on of warning lights > + x on the instrument panel (on certain versions together with the dedicated message on
the display) (see section “Warning lights
and messages”).

BRAKE ASSIST(emergency braking
assistance)

CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

ABS failure

EBD failure

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESFAILURE WARNING LIGHTSDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 109

IN AN
EMERGENCY

9:40

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

4-06-2008

INDEX

083-128 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
109

INDEXTECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

083-128 Alfa 159 GB

110

4-06-2008

9:40

Pagina 110

VDC SYSTEM(Vehicle Dynamics
Control)(where provided)
The VDC system is an electronic system
controlling the car stability in the eventof tyre grip loss.
The VDC system is therefore particularly useful when grip conditions of theroad surfaces changes.
VDC SYSTEMINTERVENTION
It is signalled by the blinking of thewarning light á on the instrument panel, to inform the driver that the car isin critical stability and grip conditions.

TURNING THE VDC SYSTEM
ON/OFF
The VDC system is automatically activated when the engine is started. When
travelling, to turn the VDC off press the
ASR/ VDC button on the central console
fig. 103 for 2 seconds. Turning off the
VDC will also turn off the ASR. Both functions can be reactivated by pressing the
ASR/VDC button.
VDC system deactivation is indicatedby the instrument panel warning lightá (on certain versions a symbol is displayed) and by the circular led aroundthe ASR/VDC button.
If the VDC has been turned off whentravelling, at next engine start-up it willturn on again automatically.

Alfawiki.nl

fig. 103

A0E0026m

FAILURE WARNING LIGHTS
In the event of failure, the VDC system
is automatically disconnected and thewarning light á comes on with fixed
light on the instrument panel (on certain versions together with a message
on the display) (see section “Warning
lights and messages”). In this case contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services assoon as possible.

WARNING

For correct operation of
the VDC system, thetyres must absolutely be of
the same brand and type on allwheels, in perfect conditions
and, above all, of type, brandand size specified.

This system is an integral part of the VDC
system and it is provided to facilitatestarting on slopes:❒ uphill: car at a standstill on a roadwith a gradient higher than 6%, engine running, clutch and brake pedal depressed, gearbox to neutral orengaged gear other than reverse;❒ downhill: car at a standstill on a roadwith a gradient higher than 6%, engine running, clutch and brake pedal depressed and reverse gear engaged.
At pickup the VDC system control unit
will keep brake force on wheels until
reaching the torque suitable for starting,or in any case for about 1 second in order to pass easily from the brake pedal
to the accelerator pedal.

SAFETYDEVICESDuring the use of thespace-saver
sparewheel (where provided), the
VDC system carries on working. However, you must remind that the space-saver
spare wheel has dimensions
smaller than the standard tyreand therefore its grip is reduced as to the other car tyres.

HILL HOLDER SYSTEM(where provided)

CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

Performance of the
VDC system, in termsof active safety should not induce the driver to take pointless and unnecessary risks.
The style of driving must in
any case always be adapted tothe conditions of the road surface, visibility an traffic. Road
safety is always the driver’s
responsibility.

WARNINGWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESWARNINGDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 111

IN AN
EMERGENCY

9:40

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

4-06-2008

INDEX

083-128 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
111

4-06-2008

9:40

Pagina 112

This time elapsing without starting, thesystem will deactivate automatically by
releasing gradually the brake force.
At releasing, the typical brake disengagement noise indicating that the car
is going to move will be heard.

Failure warnings
System failure is indicated by the turning on of warning light * (where provided) on the instrument panel (on certain versions together with the dedicated message on the display) (see section“Warning lights and messages”).
IMPORTANT The Hill Holder system
is not a parking brake. Never get outof the car without engaging the handbrake, switching the engine off and engaging the first gear.

INDEX

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE112

ASR SYSTEM(AntiSlip Regulation)
This system is an integral part of the VDC
system, it controls car drive and cuts in
automatically every time one or both driving wheels slip.
According to slipping conditions, two different control systems are activated:❒ if slipping involves both driving
wheels, the ASR function intervenes
reducing the power transmitted by
the engine;❒ if slipping involves only one driving
wheel, the ASR system cuts in automatically braking the wheel that isslipping.

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

083-128 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl❒ acceleration on slippery, snowy or
frozen surfaces;❒ in the case of loss of grip on a wet
surface (aquaplaning).

ASR turns on automatically when turning the instrument panel on.
When travelling the ASR can beswitched off by pressing briefly the
ASR/VDC button on the central console.
When the ASR is switched off this isshown by the lighting up of the
ASR/VDC button led (on versions fittedwith “Reconfigurable multifunction display” symbol V will also be displayed).
If the ASR is switched off when travelling, it will turn on again automaticallythe next time the engine is started.
When travelling on snowy roads withsnow chains, it may be helpful to turn
the ASR off: in fact, in these conditions,slipping of the driving wheels when moving off makes it possible to obtain better drive.

SAFETYDEVICES❒ too much power transmitted to thewheels also in relation to the conditions of the road surface;

The performance of thesystem, in terms of active safety should not induce
the driver to take pointlessand unnecessary risks. The
style of driving must in any
case always be adapted to theconditions of the road surface,visibility an traffic. Road safety is always the driver’s responsibility.

Switching the ASR system
on/off

CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR❒ slipping of the inner wheel due to theeffect of dynamic load changes or excessive acceleration;

WARNINGWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES

The action of the ASR is particularly helpful in the following circumstances:

DASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 113

IN AN
EMERGENCY

9:40

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

4-06-2008

INDEX

083-128 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
113

4-06-2008

9:40

Pagina 114

Failure warnings
In the event of malfunctioning, the ASR
system is automatically disconnected
and on versions fitted with “Reconfigurable multifunction display” symbol
V is displayed. In this case contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services as soon
as possible.

WARNINGFor correct operation of
the ASR system, thetyres must absolutely be of
the same brand and type on allwheels, in normal conditions ofuse, at the proper inflationpressure values and, above all,of type, brand and size specified (see paragraph “Wheels”
in section “Technical Specifications”).

INDEX

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

083-128 Alfa 159 GB

114

Alfawiki.nl

MSR system (engine braking
torque control)
It is an integral part of the ASR systemthat in case of sudden gear shifting, cutsin providing torque to the engine thus
preventing excessive driving wheel drive that, specially in poor grip conditions,
can lead to loss of stability.

It also alerts the driver, by turning on thewarning light U on the instrument panel (on certain versions together with themessage on the display) (see section“Warning lights and messages”), whenthese conditions are no longer in peakconditions.

❒ to warn when a fault causes emission
levels to increase;❒ to warn of the need to replace deteriorated components.
The system also has a diagnostic connector that can be interfaced with appropriate tools, which makes it possible
to read the error codes stored in the control unit, together with a series of specific parameters for engine operationand diagnosis. This check can also be
carried out by the traffic police.
IMPORTANT After eliminating the inconvenience, to check the system completely, Alfa Romeo Authorized Services
are obliged to run a bench test and, if
necessary, road tests which may also
call for a long journey.

If when fitting the key
into the ignition device,
the warning light U
does not turn on or if, while
travelling it turns on glowing
steadily or flashing, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services
as soon as possible. Warning
light U operation can bechecked by means of special
equipment by traffic agents. Always comply with the traffic
regulations in force in the country where you are travelling.

SAFETYDEVICES❒ to keep system efficiency under control;

CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

The EOBD system (European On Board
Diagnosis) allows continuous diagnosisof the components of the car correlated with emissions.

The objective is:

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESEOBD SYSTEM(for versions/markets whereapplicable)

DASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 115

IN AN
EMERGENCY

9:40

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

4-06-2008

INDEX

083-128 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
115

INDEXTECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

083-128 Alfa 159 GB

116

4-06-2008

9:40

Pagina 116

SOUND SYSTEMPRESETTING(where provided)
When the sound system has not beenrequested the car is provided with two
oddment compartments on the instrument panel.
Sound system presetting includes:❒ sound system power cables;

If you decide to install
the sound system after
buying the car, contact
first Alfa Romeo Authorized
Services that will give you useful advice about installation andhow to safeguard the battery.
Excessive loadless absorption
damages the battery and thebattery warranty can be invalidated.

❒ front and rear speakers cables;❒ aerial power cable;❒ sound system compartment;❒ aerial on car roof.
The sound system shall be installed in
the proper space occupied by the oddment compartment that shall be removed by pressing the two retainingtabs set in the oddment compartment:
here you will find the power cables.

ACCESSORIESPURCHASEDBY THE OWNER
If after buying the car, you decide to install electrical accessories that require apermanent electric supply (alarm, satellite antitheft system, etc.) or accessories
that in any case burden the electric supply, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services, whose qualified personnel, besides
suggesting the most suitable devices belonging to Lineaccessori Alfa Romeo, will
also evaluate the overall electric absorption, checking whether the car’s electric
system is able to withstand the load required, or whether it needs to be integrated with a more powerful battery.
WARNING

Alfawiki.nl

Take care when fitting
additional spoilers, alloy rims and non-standard
wheel caps: they might reduce
ventilation of the brakes, thus
their efficiency, during abrupt
and repeated braking, or long
downhill slopes. Make surethat nothing (mats, etc.) getsin the way of the pedals when
they are pushed down.

Fiat Auto S.p.A. declines all responsibility for damages caused by the installation of non-genuine accessories or notrecommended by Fiat Auto S.p.A. andinstalled not in compliance with the specified requirements.

Fiat Auto S.p.A. authorizes the installation of transceivers provided that installation is carried out at a specialized
shop, workmanlike performed and incompliance with manufacturer’s specifications.

RADIO TRANSMITTERS AND
CELLULAR TELEPHONES
Mobile phones and other radio transceiver equipment (e.g.: HAM radio systems and the like) shall not be used inside the car unless a separate aerial ismounted.
IMPORTANT The use of mobile
phones, HAM radio systems or othersimilar devices inside the passenger
compartment (without separate aerial)
may cause electronic systems equipping
the car to malfunction. This could compromise safety in addition to constituting a potential hazard for the passengers.
In addition, transmission and receptionof these devices may be affected by theshielding effect of the car body.

INDEX

As concerns the use of mobile phones(GSM, GPRS, UMTS) with homologation, keep strictly to the mobile
phone manufacturer’s specifications.

SAFETYDEVICESElectric/electronic devices installed after buying the car or in aftermarket shallbear the and marking:

IMPORTANT Installation of devices
resulting in modifications of car characteristics may cause driving license seizing by traffic agents and also the lapseof the warranty as concerns defects dueto the abovementioned modification or
traceable back to it directly or indirectly.

CORRECT USE
OF THE CARINSTALLATION OF
ELECTRIC/ELECTRONIC
DEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 117

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES

9:40

IN AN
EMERGENCY

4-06-2008

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

083-128 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
117

INDEXTECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

083-128 Alfa 159 GB

118

4-06-2008

9:40

Pagina 118

Versions with 8 sensors

PARKING SENSORS(where provided)
Parking sensors inform the driver about
the presence of obstacles behind the car(versions fitted with 4 rear sensors) or
behind and in front of the car (versions
fitted with 4 rear sensors and 4 front
sensors).
This system is therefore an aid for thedriver when parking the car since it detects obstacles out of the driver’s sightrange.
The presence and the distance from thecar of an obstacle is indicated by a warning buzzer - as the distance from the obstacle decreases, the acoustic alarm becomes more frequent - and, only on certain versions, by an image on the display (see paragraph “Indications on thedisplay).

Front and rear sensors are automatically activated with electronic key fitted into the ignition device when reverse gearis engaged or when pressing the front
ceiling light button A-fig. 104 withspeed below 15 km/h.

Versions with 4 sensors

Sensors are deactivated by pressing
again button A-fig. 104 if the speed
is lower than 15 km/h or when exceeding 18 km/h. If the system is off,the button led is off.

Front sensors are automatically activated with electronic key fitted into the ignition device when reverse gear is engaged or when pressing the front ceiling light button A-fig. 104 with speed
below 15 km/h.

When sensors are on, front and rear indicators will sound warning signals assoon as an obstacle is detected: as the
distance from the obstacle decreases,
the acoustic alarm becomes more frequent.

Sensors are deactivated when exceeding 18 km/h or, on certain versions bypressing again the button if the speed islower than 15 km/h A-fig. 104. If
the system is off on versions with deactivation button, the button led is off.

When the distance between the car andthe obstacle is less than 30 cm, theacoustic alarm becomes continuous. According to obstacle position (in front or
behind the car), the acoustic alarm will
be emitted by front or rear indicators.

A0E0482m

fig. 104

ACTIVATIONIn any case the system will indicate the
obstacle closest to the car.

Alfawiki.nl

BUZZERThe presence of any obstacle and its distance from the car is indicated by thebuzzers installed inside the passenger
compartment:

fig. 105

A0E0231m

fig. 106

A0E0232m❒ on versions with 8 sensors (4 front
sensors and 4 rear sensors) obstacles
are indicated by rear and front
buzzers. This feature gives the driver the direction (front/rear) of the
obstacle.

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNINGSENSORS
Obstacles are detected by 4 sensors located in the front bumper (where provided) fig. 105 and 4 sensors locatedin the rear bumper fig. 106.

INDEX

Parking manoeuvres
however are always
under the driver’s responsibility that shall always check theabsence of people (speciallychildren) or animals in the manoeuvre space. This system isjust a help for the driver but
she/he shall never reduce attention during dangerous manoeuvres even if performed at
low speed.

❒ on versions with 4 rear sensors, therear buzzer will indicate the presenceof rear obstacles;

SAFETYDEVICESThe acoustic alarm will stop immediately
as distance raises. The acoustic alarm isconstant if the distance measured bycentral sensors is unvaried, whereas if
this situation takes place for side sensors the acoustic alarm is muted after
about 3 seconds to prevent sound indications when performing manoeuvresnear walls.

DASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 119

CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

9:41

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES

4-06-2008

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

083-128 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
1194-06-2008

9:41

Pagina 120

INDEX

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

083-128 Alfa 159 GB

120

fig. 107

A0E0239m

INDICATIONS ON THE
DISPLAY (where provided)
On versions with 8 sensors, sensor activation is indicated on the “Reconfigurable multifunction display” (where provided) by screen fig.107; therefore obstacle presence and distance is indicated(in addition to buzzer) also on the instrument panel display.
In the event of several obstacles, the obstacle closest to the car will be indicated.

For proper operation,
the parking sensors shallalways be clean frommud, dirt, snow or ice. Whencleaning the sensors, take theutmost care to prevent their
damaging; do not use therefore
dry or rough clothes. Sensors
shall be washed with clean water and car detergent, if required. In washing stations,clean sensors quickly keeping
the vapour jet/high pressure
washing nozzles at 10 cm atleast from the sensors.

Repainting the bumpers
or touch-up in the sensor area, if required,shall be carried out at Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services only. Incorrect repainting may impair regular operation of theparking sensors.

Alfawiki.nl

SENSOR DETECTION
RANGE
Sensors enable the system to monitor
the front part (versions with 8 sensors)
and the rear part of the car.
Actually their position covers the central
and side areas of the front and rear partof the car.
An obstacle positioned at central area is
detected at a distance less than 0.9 m(front) and 1.40 m (rear).
An obstacle positioned at side area is detected at a distance less than 0.6 m.

Rear sensors operation
is deactivated automatically when the trailer
electric cable plug is fitted into
the car tow hook socket.

FAILURE INDICATIONSThe system control unit checks every
system component each time the key isfitted into the ignition device. Sensors
and relevant electrical connections arethen constantly monitored during system operation.
Sensor failure is indicated by turning onof warning light t (where provided)on the instrument panel (on certain versions together with the message on thedisplay) (see section “Warning lights
and messages”).

If the warning light stays on, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services to havethe system inspected, although the system keeps on working. If the failure detected does not impair system operation,
the system keeps on working and failure is stored in order to be then detected by Alfa Romeo Authorized Services
at next inspection.

When parking, take the utmost care to
obstacles that may be set above or under the sensors. Objects set close to the
car front or rear part, under certain circumstances are not detected and could
therefore cause damages to the car or
be damaged.
Indications sent by the sensors can bealtered by dirt, snow or ice deposited on
the sensors or by ultrasound systems(e.g.: truck pneumatic brakes or pneumatic hammers) set nearby the car.

SAFETYDEVICESGENERAL WARNINGS

CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

Rear sensors are reactivated automatically when removing the trailer cableplug.

If a failure is indicated, stop the car, turnthe engine off and then clean the sensors. Make sure to be far from possible
ultrasound sources (e.g.: truck pneumatic brakes or pneumatic hammers).
If failure cause has been eliminated thesystem will resume regular operation
and warning t and the corresponding
warning message will turn off.

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESTOWING TRAILERSDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 121

IN AN
EMERGENCY

9:41

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

4-06-2008

INDEX

083-128 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
121

INDEXTECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

083-128 Alfa 159 GB

122

4-06-2008

9:41

Pagina 122

TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM T.P.M.S. (where provided)(optional for versions/markets where applicable)
The car may be equipped with a Tyre
Pressure Monitoring System, which indicates to the driver the tyre pressure
status by two different indications:“Check tyre pressures” and “Low tyrepressures”. For a detailed description of
the two indications, see the “Warning
Lights and Messages” section. This system consists of a radio-frequency sensor, installed on each wheel (on the rim
inside the tyre) that sends pressure information to the control unit.

WARNINGThe T.P.M.S. does notexempt the driver fromchecking tyre pressure, including the space-saver spare
wheel (where provided) atregular intervals.

IMPORTANT NOTES
Failure indications will not be stored andtherefore will not be displayed whenturning the engine off and on again. If
failure persists, the control unit will send
warning indications to the instrument
panel only after a few seconds when the
car is moving.

Alfawiki.nl

Tyre pressure should be checked withtyres cold. Should it become necessary
for whatever reason to check pressure
with hot tyres, do not reduce pressure
although it is higher than the prescribedvalue but repeat the check when tyres
are cold (see section “Wheels” in section “Technical Specifications”).
T.P.M.S. cannot indicate sudden tyrepressure drops (e.g.: tyre burst). In thisevent, brake the car cautiously andavoid sudden steering.
The T.P.M.S. system requires special
equipment. Consult Alfa Romeo Authorized Services to know what type of accessories are compatible with the system (wheels, wheel caps, etc.). Usingother accessories could cause system
malfunctioning. Due to inflation valve
special characteristics, use only tyre repair sealants approved by Alfa Romeo;
other sealants could cause system malfunctioning.

Pagina 123

If after repairing a punctured tyre with
the Fix&Go automatic kit and restoring
the initial conditions the flat tyre warning light continues to stay on, contact
Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

Strong radio-frequency disturbances
could inhibit proper TPMS system operation. This condition is indicated by a
dedicated massage on the display. This
indication will go off automatically assoon as the radio-frequency disturbanceceases.

Tyre pressure could change according tooutside temperature. For this reason the
T.P.M.S. system could temporarily indicate low tyre pressure. In this event
check pressure with cold tyres and restore proper inflation values if required.

If the car is fitted with T.P.M.S. system,
tyre and/or rim removal and refitting
operations involve special precautions;to prevent damages or wrong sensor refitting, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized
Services to have tyre and/or rimchanged.

INDEXTECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES

If the car is fitted with T.P.M.S. system,
when changing a tyre, change also therubber seal of the valve and the fastening ring of the sensor. Contact Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services.

DASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

9:41

SAFETYDEVICES

4-06-2008

CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

083-128 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
123

INDEXTECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

083-128 Alfa 159 GB

124

4-06-2008

9:41

Pagina 124

In order to use the system properly, refer to the following table when you have to change wheels/tyres:

Operation

Sensor presence

Failure Indication

Alfa Romeo Authorized
Services operation

–

–

YES

Contact Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services

Wheel changewith space-saver spare wheel

NO

YES

Repair damaged
wheel

Wheel changewith snow tyres

NO

YES

Contact Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services

Wheel changewith snow tyres

YES

NO

–

Wheel changewith others of different
size (*)

YES

NO

–

Wheel cross switching(front/rear) (**)

YES

NO

–

(*) Given as an alternative on the owner's manual and to be found in Lineaccessori Alfa Romeo.
(**) Not crossed (tyres shall remain on the same side).

Alfawiki.nl

Use only unleaded petrol. To prevent errors, the diameter of the fuel tank filler
is too small to introduce a lead petrol
pump filler. Use petrol with a rated octane number (R.O.N.) not lower than95.

If the outside temperature is very low,the diesel thickens due to the formationof paraffins and could clog the diesel fuel filter.

IMPORTANT An inefficient catalyst
leads to harmful exhaust emissions, thus
contributing to air pollution.
IMPORTANT Never use leaded
petrol, even in small amount or in an
emergency, as this would damage thecatalyst beyond repair.

In order to avoid these problems, different types of diesel are distributed according to the season: summer type,winter type arctic type (mountains/coldareas).
If refuelling with diesel fuel not suitable
for the current temperature, mix diesel
fuel with TUTELA DIESEL ART additive in the proportions stated on thecan, putting first the antifreeze in thetank and then the diesel fuel.
If driving or parking the vehicle for a long
period in cold areas/mountains, refuelwith the diesel fuel available at local filling stations. In this situation you are also recommended to have in the tank an
amount of fuel 50% higher than usable
capacity.

SAFETYDEVICESDIESEL ENGINESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

IMPORTANT Refuelling shall always
be performed with engine off. Failing toobserve this precaution could cause thegauge to provide wrong indications.
Should this occur, to restore proper indication just have next refuelling withthe engine off. Otherwise contact Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services.

PETROL ENGINESWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES

AT THE FILLINGSTATIONDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 125

IN AN
EMERGENCY

9:41

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

4-06-2008

INDEX

083-128 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
125

INDEXTECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

083-128 Alfa 159 GB

126

4-06-2008

9:41

Pagina 126

The car must only befilled with diesel fuel for
motor vehicles, in compliance with European Standard
EN590. The use of other products or mixtures may irreparably damage the engine with invalidation of the warranty due
to the damage caused. In theevent of accidentally filling withanother type of fuel, do notstart the engine and empty thetank. If the engine has been run
even for only a very short time,in addition to the tank, it is also necessary to drain out thewhole fuel circuit.

REFUELLING

A0E0159m

fig. 108FUEL FILLER CAP
The fuel filler cap is unlocked when central door locking is off and it is automatically locked when activating thecentral door locking. To open the fuelfiller cap, operate as shown by the arrow in fig. 108.

A0E0160m

fig. 109

When refuelling, position the cap on thedevice inside the flap as shown in the
figure.
IMPORTANT The sealing of the tank
may cause light pressurising in the tank.
A little breathing off, while slackening
the cap, is absolutely normal.

The fuel filler cap is A-fig. 109 fittedwith an antiloss device B which fastens
it to the flap C so it cannot be mislaid.
WARNINGTo guarantee full tank filling, carry out
two refuelling operations after the firstclick of the fuel delivery gun. Avoid further topping up operations that could
cause damages to the fuel system.

Do not put naked flamesor lighted cigarettes
near the fuel filler hole as thereis danger of fire. Do not bend
too close to the hole either so
as not to breathe in harmful
vapours.

Alfawiki.nl❒ three-way catalytic converter;
A0E0130m

EMERGENCY OPENING OF
THE FUEL FILLER CAP
In case of failure, the fuel filler cap canbe opened by pulling string set on theright side of the boot fig. 110.

❒ Lambda sensor;❒ fuel evaporation system.
In addition, do not let the engine run,even for a test, with one or more spark
plugs disconnected.
The devices for curtailing diesel fuel engine emissions are the following:❒ oxidising catalytic converter;❒ exhaust gas recirculation system(E.G.R.);❒ diesel particulate filter (DPF) (whererequired).

INDEX

fig. 110

During normal service
the diesel particulate
filter (DPF) (where required)reaches high temperatures.
Do not therefore park the carover inflammable materials(grass, dry leaves, pine needles, etc.): fire hazard.

SAFETYDEVICESThe devices for curtailing petrol engine
emissions are the following:

WARNING

CORRECT USE
OF THE CARPROTECTINGTHE ENVIRONMENTDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 127

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES

9:41

IN AN
EMERGENCY

4-06-2008

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

083-128 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
127

4-06-2008

9:41

Pagina 128

DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER(DPF) (where required)

The diesel particular filter has been
adopted to eliminate almost totally particulates in compliance with current /future law regulations.
During normal use of the car, the engine
control unit records a set of data (e.g.:travel time, type of route, temperatures,etc.) and it will then calculate how muchparticulates has been trapped by the filter.

Since this filter physically traps particulates, it shall be cleaned (reclaimed) atregular intervals by burning carbon particles. Reclaiming procedure is controlled
automatically by the engine control unit
according to the filter conditions and theconditions of use of the car. During reclaiming the following phenomena could
take place: idling slight increase, fan activation, slight smoke increase, high exhaust temperatures. These situations
shall not be considered as faults and they
do not affect car performance and environment.

INDEX

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCY

CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

The Diesel Particulate Filter is a mechanical filter, integral with the exhaustsystem, that physically traps particulatepresent in the exhaust gases of Diesel
engines.

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESSAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

083-128 Alfa 159 GB

128

Alfawiki.nl

Diesel particulate filter
cloggedWhen the Diesel particulate filter isclogged, the instrument panel warning
light h will turn on (on certain versions symbol h is displayed). In
this case keep the car running until
warning light h (or symbolh) turns off.

SEAT BELTS ...................................................... 130
S.B.R. SYSTEM ................................................ 131
PRETENSIONERS ............................................... 132

SAFETYDEVICESSAFETY DEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 129

PRESETTING FOR MOUNTING THE“UNIVERSAL ISOFIX”CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM..... 140

CORRECT USE
OF THE CARCARRYING CHILDREN SAFELY .............................. 135

SIDE AIR BAGS (Side bag - Window bag) ............. 145

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESFRONT AIR BAGS............................................... 142

IN AN
EMERGENCY

9:41

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

4-06-2008

INDEX

129-148 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
1294-06-2008

9:41

Pagina 130

SEAT BELTS

SAFETYDEVICESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

To fasten seat belts, take the tongue
A-fig. 1 and insert it into the buckle
B, until hearing the locking click.
At removal, if it jams, let it rewind fora short stretch, then pull it out again
without jerking.
To unfasten the seat belts, press button
C. Guide the seat belt with your hand
while it is rewinding, to prevent it fromtwisting.

INDEX

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

The belt should be worn keeping thechest straight and rested against the seatback.

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES

USING THE SEAT BELTS

IN AN
EMERGENCYDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

129-148 Alfa 159 GB

130

A0E0083m

fig. 1WARNING

Never press button C
when travelling.

Through the reel, the belt automatically
adapts to the body of the passenger
wearing it, allowing freedom of movement.
When the car is parked on a steep slope
the reel mechanism may block; this isnormal. The reel mechanism prevents
the webbing coming out when it is jerked
or if the car brakes sharply, in a collisionor when cornering at high speed.

Alfawiki.nl

fig. 2

A0E0055m

The rear seat is fitted with inertial seatbelts with three anchor points and reelfor side and central seats.
Rear seat belts shall be worn as shownin the figure fig. 2.

fig. 3

A0E0085m

IMPORTANT On certain versions, correct backrest fastening is guaranteed
when the “red band” A-fig. 3 aside
levers B is no longer visible. The “redband” actually indicates that the backrest is not properly secured.
IMPORTANT After putting the seatsback to their travelling position, restore
the seat belt position to make themready for use.

WARNING

Make sure the backrestis properly secured atboth sides (red band A-fig. 3
not visible) to prevent it moves
forward in the event of sharp
braking causing injuries to passengers.

The buzzer can be muted temporarily by
the following procedure:❒ fasten the front seat belts;❒ fit the electronic key into the ignition device;❒ wait for over 20 seconds but less than
1 minute and then unfasten one of thefront seat belts.
This procedure will stand valid till next engine switching off.
For permanent deactivation, contact Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services. The S.B.R.
system can only be reset through the setup menu (see paragraph “Reconfigurable
multifunction display“ in section “Dashboard and controls”).

SAFETYDEVICESThe car is fitted with the S.B.R. system(Seat Belt Reminder), consisting of abuzzer which, together with the turning
on of warning light <, warns the driverand the front passenger to fasten theseat belt.

CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

Remember that in theevent of a violent collision, back seat passengers notwearing seat belts also represent a serious danger for thefront seat passengers.

S.B.R. SYSTEM(Seat Belt Reminder)

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESWARNINGDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 131

IN AN
EMERGENCY

9:41

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

4-06-2008

INDEX

129-148 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
131

INDEXTECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

129-148 Alfa 159 GB

132

4-06-2008

9:41

Pagina 132

PRETENSIONERS
To increase the efficiency of the seatbelts, the car is fitted with front pretensioners. These devices, in the event ofa violent crash, rewind the seat belts a
few centimetres. In this way they ensure that the seat belt adheres perfectly to the wearer before the restraining
action begins.
Front pretensioners activation is indicated by buckle withdrawal downwards.
IMPORTANT To obtain the highest
degree of protection from the action of
the pretensioning device, wear the seatbelt keeping it firmly close to the chestand pelvis.
Front seat pretensioners activate only
if front seat belts are properly fitted into buckles.
A small amount of smoke may be produced. This smoke is in no way toxic andpresents no fire hazard.

Anything that modifies its original conditions invalidates its efficiency. Anythingthat modifies its original conditions invalidates its efficiency. If due to unusual natural events (floods, seas storm,etc.) the device has been affected bywater and mud, it must necessarily be
replaced.

WARNING

The pretensioner can
only be used once. After a collision that has triggered it, have it replaced at Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
Pretensioner validity is indicated on the label inside theglovebox. Pretensioners should
be replaced at Alfa Romeo Authorized Services as this dateapproaches.

Alfawiki.nl

Operations which leadto knocks, vibrations or
localised heating (over100°C for a maximum of 6hours) in the area around thepretensioners may cause damage or trigger them. These devices are not affected by vibrations caused by irregularities of
the road surface or low obstacles such as kerbs, etc. Contact
Alfa Romeo Authorized Services
for any assistance.
LOAD LIMITERS
To increase passenger’s safety, the front
seat belt reels contain a load limiter
which allows controlled sag in such a
way as to dose the force acting on thechest and shoulders during the belt restraining action in case of front crash.

fig. 5

A0E0104m

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONSFOR USING
THE SEAT BELTS
The driver must comply with (and havethe vehicle occupants follow) all the local legal regulations concerning the useof seat belts.

A0E0103m

fig. 6IMPORTANT The belt should not be
twisted. The upper part should pass overthe shoulder and cross the chest diagonally. The lower part should adhere to
the pelvis fig. 6 and not the abdomenof the passenger. Do not use any objects(pegs, stoppers, etc.) to keep the belts
away from the body.

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

Always fasten the seat belts before starting.

For maximum protection keep the back ofyour seat upright, lean back into it and make sure the seatbelt fits closely across yourchest and hips. Make sure thatthe seat belts of the front andrear passengers are fastenedat all times! You increase therisk of serious injury or deathin a collision if you travel withthe belts unfastened.

SAFETYDEVICESWARNINGDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 133

CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

9:41

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES

4-06-2008

IN AN
EMERGENCY

129-148 Alfa 159 GB

INDEX

Seat belts are also to be worn by expectant mothers: the risk of injury in thecase of accident is greatly reduced forthem and the unborn child if they are
wearing a seat belt. Of course they must
position the lower part of the belt very
low down so that it passes under the abdomen fig. 5.

Alfawiki.nl
133129-148 Alfa 159 GB

4-06-2008

9:41

Pagina 134

INDEX

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLSWARNING

134

fig. 7

A0E0105m

IMPORTANT Never travel with a childsitting on the passenger’s lap with a single belt to protect them both fig. 7.
Do not fasten other objects to the body.

Under no circumstances
should the componentsof the seat belts and pretensioners be tampered with orremoved. Any operation
should be carried out by qualified and authorised personnel.
Always contact Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services.

WARNING

If the belt has been
subjected to heavy
stress, for example after an
accident, it should be changed
completely together with theanchors, anchor fastening
screws and the pretensioners.
In fact, even if the belt has no
visible defects, it could havelost its resilience.

Alfawiki.nl

HOW TO KEEP THE SEATBELTS ALWAYS INEFFICIENT CONDITIONS❒ Always use the belt with the tape tautand never twisted; make sure that
it is free to run without impediments;❒ after a serious accident, replace thebelt being worn at that time, even if
it does not appear damaged. Always
replace the seat belts if pretensioners
have been activated;❒ to clean the belts, wash by hand withneutral soap, rinse and leave to dry
in the shade. Never use strong detergents, bleach or dyes or otherchemical substance that might weaken the fibres;❒ prevent the reels from getting wet:their correct operation is only guaranteed if water does not get inside;❒ replace the seat belt when showing
significant wear or cut signs.

This prescription is compulsory in all EC
countries according to EC Directive
2003/20/EC.
Compared with adults, a child’s head is
proportionately larger and heavier than
the rest of the body, while muscles andbone structure are not completely developed. Therefore, in order to restraint
them correctly in the event of a crash,different systems are needed than adultseat belts.

Group 0 - 0-10 kg in weight

SAFETYDEVICES

Lineaccessori Alfa Romeo offers seats foreach weight group, which are the recommended choice, as they have been
designed and experimented specifically for Alfa Romeo cars.

Group 0+ - 0-13 kg in weightGroup 1

9-18 kg in weightGroup 2

15-25 kg in weightGroup 322-36 kg in weight

As it may be noted, the groups overlap
partly and in fact, in commerce it is possible to find devices that cover morethan one weight group.
All restraint devices must bear the certification data, together with the control
brand, on a solidly fixed label whichmust absolutely never be removed.
Over 1.50 m in height, from the pointof view of restraint systems, children are
considered as adults and wear the seatbelts normally.

WARNING

With passenger’s air
bag active, never placechild’s seats with the cradle
facing backwards since the air
bag activation could cause to
the child serious injuries, evenmortal, regardless of the seriousness of the crash that triggered it. You are advised tocarry children always withproper restraint systems on
the rear seats, as this is themost protected position in thecase of a crash.

CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

For optimal protection in the event ofa crash, all passengers must be seated
and wearing adequate restraint systems.
This is even more important for children.

The results of research on the best child
restraint systems are contained in theEuropean Standard ECE-R44. This Standard enforces the use of restraint systems classified in five groups:

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCARRYING
CHILDREN SAFELYDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 135

IN AN
EMERGENCY

9:41

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

4-06-2008

INDEX

129-148 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
135

INDEXTECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

129-148 Alfa 159 GB

136

4-06-2008

9:41

Pagina 136

WARNINGSERIOUS DANGER If it
is absolutely necessary
to carry a child on thefront passenger seatwith the cradle child’sseat facing backwards, thefront passenger’s air bags
(front air bag, knees air bag,where provided, and side bagon seat), must be deactivatedusing the key switch. In thiscase it is absolutely necessary
to check the warning light F
on the front ceiling light panel (see paragraph “Passenger’s front air bag”) to makesure that deactivation has actually taken place. Moreover,the front passenger’s seatshall be adjusted in the mostbackward position to prevent
any contact between thechild’s seat and the dashboard.

A0E0106m

fig. 8

A0E0106m

fig. 9

GROUP 0 and 0+

GROUP 1Babies up to 13 kg must be carried facing backwards fig. 8 on a cradle seat,
which, supporting the head, does not induce stress on the neck in the event of
sharp deceleration.

Starting from 9 kg to 18 kg in weight,
children may be carried facing forwards,
with seat fitted with front cushion
fig. 9, through which the car seat belt
restrains both child and seat.

The cradle is restrained by the car seatbelts and in turn it must restrain the childwith its own belts.
WARNING

The figure is only an example for mounting. Attain to the instructions for fastening which must be enclosedwith the specific child restraining system you are using.

Alfawiki.nl

Pagina 137

SAFETYDEVICES
A0E0109m

fig. 11

GROUP 2

GROUP 3

Starting from 15 kg to 25 kg in weight,
children may be restrained directly by
the car belts. The only function of theseat is to position the child correctly in
relation to the belts, so that the diagonal part adheres to the chest and not
to the neck and that the horizontal partclings to the child’s pelvis and not theabdomen fig. 10.

For children from 22 kg to 36 kg thesize of the child’s chest no longer requires a support to space the child’s backfrom the seat back. Fig. 11 shows
proper child seat positioning on the rearseat.
Children taller than 1.50 m can wear
seat belts like adults.
WARNING

The illustrations are indicative only for assembly. Assemble the seat according to the compulsory instructions provided with it.

CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

A0E0108m

fig. 10WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES

Seats exist which aresuitable for covering
weight groups 0 and 1 with arear connection to the car belts
and their own belts to restrain
the child. Due to their size, they
can be dangerous if installed incorrectly fastened to the car
belts with a cushion. Carefully
follow the instructions for installation provided with theseat.

DASHBOARDAND
CONTROLSWARNINGIN AN
EMERGENCY

9:41

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

4-06-2008

INDEX

129-148 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
137

SAFETY
DEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

129-148 Alfa 159 GB

4-06-2008

9:41

Pagina 138

PASSENGER SEAT COMPLIANCE WITH REGULATIONS ON CHILD’S SEAT USEYour car complies with the new European Directive 2000/3/EC regulating child’s seat assembling on the different car seatsaccording to the following tables:
Front and rear seat (fixed and double seat)INDEX

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SEAT

138

Group

Range
of weight

Front

Rear

Seat with
6 positions

Seat with
8 positions

Rear seat side

Rear seat central

up to 13 kg

U (*)

U (*)

U

U

Group 1

9-18 kg

U (*)

U (*)

U

U

Group 2

15-25 kg

U (*)

U (*)

U

U

Group 322-36 kg

U (*)

U (*)

U

U

Group 0, 0+

Key:
U = suitable for child restraint systems of the “Universal” category, according to European Standard EEC-R44 for the specified “Groups”.
(*) = on cars not fitted with passenger’s seat adjustable in height, the seat back shall be positioned perfectly upright. On cars fitted withpassenger’s seat adjustable in height, the seat shall be raised as much as possible.

Alfawiki.nl❒ if the passenger’s air bag is deactivated always check that the warning light F on the front ceiling light
panel is glowing steadily to indicatethat the air bag has been deactivated;❒ attain to the instructions for fastening the specific child restraint system
which you are using. These instructions must be provided by the manufacturer. Keep the child restraint system installation instructions with the
car documents and this Handbook.
Never use a child restraint system
without installation instructions;❒ always check the seat belts do not fit
around the child’s throat;❒ while travelling, do not let the childsit incorrectly or release the belts;❒ passengers should never carry children on their laps. No-one, howeverstrong they are, can hold a child in
the event of a crash;❒ in case of an accident, replace theseat with a new one.

With passenger’s air
bag active, never placechild’s seats with the cradle
facing backwards since the air
bag activation could cause to
the child serious injuries, evenmortal, regardless of the seriousness of the crash that triggered it. You are advised tocarry children always withproper restraint systems on
the rear seats, as this is themost protected position in thecase of a crash.

SAFETYDEVICES❒ only one child is to be strapped toeach retaining system;WARNING

CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR❒ the recommended position for installing child’s seat is on the rear seat,
as it is the most protected in the caseof a crash;❒ always check the seat belt is well fastened by pulling the webbing;WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES

Below is a summary of therules of safety to be followed
for carrying children:

DASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 139

IN AN
EMERGENCY

9:41

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

4-06-2008

INDEX

129-148 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
139

4-06-2008

9:41

Pagina 140

CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

Fig. 11/a shows an example of child
restraint system. The Universal Isofix
child’s seat covers weight group: 1.
Due to its different anchoring system,
the Universal Isofix child's seat shall beanchored to the proper lower metal rings
A-fig.12, set between rear seat backand cushion. The upper belt (provided
with the child's seat) shall be then secured to fasteners B-fig.13 set behind
head restraints.

INDEX

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

This car is preset for mounting the Universal Isofix child restraint system, a
new European standardised system forcarrying children safely.

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESPRESETTING FOR
MOUNTING THE“UNIVERSALISOFIX” CHILDRESTRAINT SYSTEMIN AN
EMERGENCY

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

129-148 Alfa 159 GB

140

It is possible to mount at the same time
both the traditional restraint system andthe “Universal Isofix” one.
Remember that in case of Universal Isofix
child’s seat, you can only use all thoseseats approved with the marking ECE
R44/03 “Universal Isofix”.

A0E0241m

fig. 11/a

At Lineaccessori Alfa Romeo is available
the “Universal Isofix” “Duo Plus” child’sseat shown in.
For any further installation/use detail,refer to the “Instructions Manual” thatmust be provided by the child restraint
system Manufacturer.

Alfawiki.nl

fig. 12

A0E0174m

fig. 13

A0E0190m

WARNING
Mount the child restraint
system only with the car
stationary. The Isofix child restraint system is properly anchored to the mounting brackets
when clicks are heard. In any
case, keep to the installation instructions that must be provided by the child restraint system
Manufacturer.

4-06-2008

9:41

Pagina 141

PASSENGER SEAT COMPLIANCE WITH REGULATIONS ON UNIVERSALS ISOFIX CHILD’SSEAT USE

Group 0 - 0 to 10 kg

Facing backwards

E

IL

Facing backwards

E

IL

Facing backwards

DIL

Facing backwards

CIL

Facing backwards

DIL

Facing backwards

CIL

Facing forwards

B

IUF

Facing forwards

BI

IUF

Facing forwards

A

IUF

Group 0+ - 0 to 13 kgGroup I - 9
to 18 kg

IUF: suitable for Isofix child restraint systems to be set facing forwards, universal class (fitted with third upper fastener), approved forthe weight group.
IL: suitable for Isofix Type child restraint systems, specific and approved for this type of car. The child's seat can be installed by moving
forward the front seat
Alfawiki.nl

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES

Isofix positionside rear

IN AN
EMERGENCY

Isofixsize group

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

Child’s seat
direction

INDEX

Range of weight

CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESThe table below, according to ECE 16 European Directive, shows the different installation possibilities of Isofix restraint systems on seats fitted with Universals Isofix fasteners.

DASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

129-148 Alfa 159 GB

141

INDEXTECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

129-148 Alfa 159 GB

142

4-06-2008

9:41

Pagina 142

FRONT AIR BAGS
The car is fitted with front multistage airbags (“Smart bags”) for the driver andthe passenger and with knees air bag
for the driver and for the passenger(where provided).
“SMART BAG” SYSTEM(FRONT MULTISTAGE AIR
BAGS)
The front air bags (driver and passenger) and knees air bags (driver and passenger) have been designed to protect
the occupants in the event of head-on
crashes of medium-high severity, by placing cushions between the occupant andthe steering wheel or dashboard.
In case of crash, an electronic control
unit, when required, triggers the inflation of the cushions that inflate, as a protection, between the body of the front
occupants and the structure that could
cause injuries. Immediately after, thecushions deflate.

The front air bags (driver and passenger) and knees air bags (driver and passenger) are not a replacement of but
complementary to the use of belts,
which should always be worn, as specified by law in Europe and most non European countries.
In case of crash, a person not wearing
the seat belt moves forward and may
come into contact with the cushion while
it is still inflating. Under this circumstance the protection offered by the air
bag is reduced.
Front air bags may not be activated in
the following situations:❒ front collisions against highly deformable objects not affecting the car
front surface (e.g. bumper collision
against guard rail, etc.);❒ in case of wedging under other vehicles or protective barriers (for example under a truck or guard rail);

Alfawiki.nl❒ the air bag is not triggered as it offers
no additional protection compared withthe seat belts, consequently it would
be pointless. Therefore, failure to comeinto action in the above circumstancedoes not mean that the system is notworking properly.

WARNING

Do not apply stickers
or other objects to thesteering wheel or to the air
bag cover on the passenger’s
side or on the side roof lining.
Never put objects (e.g. mobile
phones) on the dashboard on
passenger side since they
could interfere with proper
passenger air bag inflation andalso cause serious injury.

A0E0077m

DRIVER’S FRONT AIR BAG
It consists of an instant-inflating cushion
contained in a special recess in the centre of the steering wheel fig. 14.

A0E0078m

fig. 15

PASSENGER’S FRONTAIR BAG
It consists of an instant-inflating cushion contained into a special recess in thedashboard fig. 15, this cushion has avolume bigger than that of the driver.

WARNING

With passenger’s air
bag active, never placechild’s seats with the cradle
facing backwards since the air
bag activation could cause to
the child serious injuries, evenmortal.

SAFETYDEVICES
INDEX

fig. 14

CORRECT USE
OF THE CARWARNINGOn cars fitted withfront passenger’s air
bag deactivation (front
air bag, knees air bag(where provided) andside on seat), these air bags
shall be deactivated whenplacing the child’s seat on thefront passenger’s seat. Moreover, the front passenger’s
seat shall be adjusted in themost backward position toprevent any contact between
the child’s seat and the dashboard. Even if not compulsory
by law, you are recommended to reactivate the air bag immediately as soon as the childtransport is no longer necessary.

DASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 143

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES

9:41

IN AN
EMERGENCY

4-06-2008

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

129-148 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
143

4-06-2008

9:41

Pagina 144

INDEX

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

129-148 Alfa 159 GB

144

fig. 16

A0E0079m

A0E0092m

fig. 17

fig. 18

A0E0062m

DRIVER’S AND
PASSENGER’S KNEES AIRBAG (where provided)

MANUAL DEACTIVATION (where provided) OF PASSENGER’SFRONT AIR BAG , KNEES AIR BAG (where provided) AND
PASSENGER’S FRONT SIDE BAG

Knees air bag consists of an instant-inflating cushion housed into a special
compartment provided for the purpose
under the steering wheel for the driver
fig. 16 and into the lower part of thedashboard for the passenger fig. 17,
to give further protection in the event offrontal crash.

Should it be absolutely necessary to carry a child on the front seat, the passenger’s front air bag, knees air bag(where provided) and the side bag canbe deactivated. Deactivation/activation
shall be performed (with key removed
from ignition device) using the key
switch set on the right side of dashboard
fig. 18. You can reach the switch only if the door is opened. When the door
is open, the metal insert of the key canbe inserted and removed in both positions.

Alfawiki.nl

IMPORTANT Operate the switch only when the engine is not running andthe ignition key is removed.
The key-operated switch has two positions:❒ passenger's front air bag and knees
air bag (where provided) and side
bag activated (ON position P):
warning light F on front ceiling light
panel off; it is absolutely prohibitedto carry a child on the front seat;

Pagina 145

Passenger's air bags deactivation will
not inhibit the operation of the head protection side bag (Window Bag).

DASHBOARDAND
CONTROLSSAFETYDEVICESThe car is fitted with front side bags fordriver and passenger for protecting thechest and window bags for protecting front
and rear occupant’s head.

fig. 19

Side bags protect car occupants fromside crashes of medium-high severity, byplacing the cushion between the occupant and the internal parts of the sidestructure of the car.

Side air bags are not a replacement of
but complementary to the belts, which
you are recommended to always wear,
as specified by law in Europe and most
non-European countries.

Non-activation of side bags in othertypes of collisions (front collisions, rearshunts, roll-overs, etc...) is not a system
malfunction.

FRONT SIDE BAGS - CHEST
AND PELVIS ZONEPROTECTION

In case of side crash, an electronic control unit, when required triggers the inflation of the cushion. The cushion immediately inflates, placing itself as a protection, between the occupant’s bodyand the structure that could cause injuries. Immediately after, the cushion deflates.

A0E0093m

They are composed by two types of instant inflation cushions and are housedin the back rest of the front seats fig.
19. The task of the side air bags is toincrease protection of the occupants’chest and pelvis zone in the event of aside crash of medium-high severity.

CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

The warning light F on front ceilinglight panel stays on permanently until thepassenger’s air bags are reactivated.

SIDE AIR BAGS(Side bag Window bag)WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES❒ passenger's front air bag and knees
air bag (where provided) and sidebag deactivated (OFF position F):
warning light Fon front ceiling light
panel on; it is possible to carry a childprotected by special restraint systems
on the front seat.

IN AN
EMERGENCY

9:41

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

4-06-2008

INDEX

129-148 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
145129-148 Alfa 159 GB

4-06-2008

9:41

Pagina 146

INDEXTECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLSIMPORTANT In the event of sidecrash, you can obtain the best protection by the system keeping a correct position on the seat, allowing thus a correct window bag unfolding.

146

fig. 20

A0E0185m

SIDE WINDOW BAGS HEAD PROTECTION
They are “curtain” cushions located behind the side coverings of the roof fig.
20 and covered by proper finishing.
Window bags have been designed forprotecting the head of front and rear occupants in the event of side crash,thanks to the wide cushion inflation surface. In minor side crashes (for which
the restraining action of the seat belts issufficient), the air bags are not deployed.
Also in this case it is of vital importanceto wear the seat belts since in case ofside crash they guarantee proper positioning of the occupant and prevent theoccupants to be pitched out of the car incase of violent crashes.

IMPORTANT The front air bags
and/or side bags may be deployed if
the car is subject to heavy knocks or
accidents involving the underbody area,such as for example violent shocks,
against steps, kerbs or low obstacles,
falling of the car in big holes or sags in
the road.
IMPORTANT When the airbag inflates it emits a small amount of dusts.
These dusts are harmless and is not the
beginning of a fire; then the unfold cushion surface and the car interiors can becovered by a dusty remains: this dust
can irritate skin and eyes. In case of contact, wash yourself using neutral soap
and water.

Alfawiki.nl

Expiration dates of pyrotechnic charge
and coil contact are indicated on the label inside the glovebox. As this date approaches, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services to have the device replaced.
IMPORTANT Should an accident occur in which any of the safety devices is
activated, take the car to Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services to have the devices
activated replaced and to have the system checked.
All control, repair and replacement operations concerning the air bags must
only be carried out c/o Alfa Romeo Authorized Services. If you are having the
car scrapped, have the air bag system deactivated at Alfa Romeo Authorized Services first. If the car changes ownership,
the new owner must be informed of themethod of use of air bags and the above
warnings and also be given this “Owner’s Manual”.

Never rest head, arms
and elbows on thedoor, on the windows and in
the window bag unfolding
area to prevent possible injuries during the inflation
phase.

If when fitting the key
into the ignition device,
the warning light ¬ does notturn on or if it stays on whentravelling (on certain versions
together with the message on
the display) there could be a
failure in safety systems; inthis event air bags or pretensioners could not trigger incase of impact or, in a minor
number of cases, they could
trigger accidentally. Contact
Alfa Romeo Authorized Services immediately to have thesystem checked.

WARNING

Never lean head, arms
and elbows out of thewindow.

Never travel with objects on your lap, infront of your chest or with apipe, pencil, etc. between yourlips; injury may result in theevent of the air bag being triggered.
WARNING

Always keep yourhands on the steering
wheel rim when driving, sothat if the air bag is triggered,it can inflate without meetingany obstacles which could
cause serious harm to you. Do
not drive with the body bent
forwards, keep the seat backrest in the erect position andlean your back well against it.

WARNING

Do not cover the backrest of front seats withtrims or covers that are notsuitable to be used with sidebags.

Alfawiki.nl

WARNING

If the car has beenstolen or an attempt tosteal it has been made, if it
has been subjected to vandals
or floods, have the air bag
system checked by Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services.

SAFETYDEVICESWARNINGWARNING

CORRECT USE
OF THE CARWARNING

GENERAL WARNINGSWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESIMPORTANT The triggering of pretensioners, front air bags and side bags
is decided in a differentiated manner according to the type of impact. The failure to deploy one or more of them does
not mean that the system is not working properly.

DASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 147

IN AN
EMERGENCY

9:41

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

4-06-2008

INDEX

129-148 Alfa 159 GB

147

INDEXTECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

129-148 Alfa 159 GB

148

4-06-2008

9:41

Pagina 148

WARNING

Remember that withthe key fitted into theignition device and engine off,
the air bags may be triggeredon a stationary car if it isbumped by another movingcar. Therefore, never seat children on the front seat evenwhen the car is stationary. On
the other hand remember that
if the key is not fitted into theignition device, no safety system (air bags or pretensioners) is triggered in the eventof an impact; in this case, failure to come into action cannot
be considered as a sign thatthe system is not working
properly.

WARNING

When the key is fitted
into the ignition device,
the warning light F (with passenger’s front air bags deactivation switch at ON) turns onand flashes for few seconds toremind that passenger’s front
air bag, knees air bag and side
bag will be deployed in a crash,after which it should go off.

WARNING

Never wash seat backrests with pressurised
water or steam (by hand or at
automatic seat washing stations).

Alfawiki.nl

WARNING

The front air bag is triggeredforshocksgreater in magnitude than thepretensioners. For impacts between these two thresholds,
it is therefore normal that only the pretensioners are triggered.
WARNING

Do not hook rigid objects to the coat hooks
and to the support handles.
WARNING

The air bag does notsubstitute the seatbelts, but only increases theireffectiveness. Moreover, since
the front air bags do not comeinto operation in the event offront impact at low speed, sidecollisions, bumps from behindor overturning, in these circumstances the occupants
would only be protected by
the seat belts which must
therefore always be fastened.

ENGINE STARTING ............................................. 150
PARKING.......................................................... 155
USING THE GEARBOX......................................... 156
CONTAINING RUNNING COSTS............................. 157
TOWING TRAILERS............................................. 159
SNOW TYRES ................................................... 162
SNOW CHAINS ................................................. 163

IN AN
EMERGENCYCAR INACTIVITY ............................................... 164

SAFETYDEVICESCORRECT USE OF THE CARDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 149

WARNING CORRECT USE
LIGHTS AND OF THE CARMESSAGES

9:42

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

4-06-2008

INDEX

149-164 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
149

4-06-2008

9:42

Pagina 150

ENGINE STARTING
The car is fitted with an electronic engine
immobilising system. If the engine fails
to start, see paragraph “Alfa Romeo
CODE system” in section “Dashboard
and controls”.
IMPORTANT Tampering with the ignition device can cause unrequired steering lock.
IMPORTANT Fit completely the electronic key into the ignition device until
it locks into place.

IMPORTANT Never take the electronic key out of the ignition device while
the car is moving unless you have to carry out an emergency removal (see paragraph “Removing the electronic key fromthe ignition device in an emergency”),
this ensures that the steering column lockis deactivated while the car is moving(e.g.: towing the car).

We recommend thatduring the initial period
you do not drive to fullcar performance (e.g.: excessive
acceleration, long journeys at
top speed, sharp braking, etc.).

INDEX

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND CORRECT USE
MESSAGES OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

149-164 Alfa 159 GB

150

Alfawiki.nl

When the engine isswitched off never leave
the electronic key into theignition device to prevent pointless current absorption fromdraining the batter.

WARNING

Running the engine inconfined areas is extremely dangerous. The engine
consumes oxygen and produces carbon monoxide which
is a highly toxic and lethal gas.

The starter automatically operates until
the engine starts.

STARTING PROCEDURE FORDIESEL VERSIONS

Proceed as follows:

With engine off and electronic key inserted in the ignition device, it is possible
to operate the automatic ignition briefly
pressing the START/STOP button andkeeping the clutch pedal pressed.

Proceed as follows:

IMPORTANT It is possible to start theengine keeping pressed only the brake
pedal. In that case, automatic start is notenabled. Then press the START/STOP
button and release it as soon as the engine starts.

❒ Put the gear lever neutral;❒ Fully press the clutch pedal, withoutpressing the accelerator;❒ Put the gear lever neutral;❒ Fit the electronic key into the ignition
device to stop limit;❒ Briefly press the START/STOP button.

❒ Ensure that the handbrake is up;❒ Fully press the clutch pedal, withoutpressing the accelerator;❒ fit the electronic key down into theignition device until it stops. The instrument panel warning light mwill turn on;❒ Wait for the warning light m toturn off. The hotter the engine is, thequicker this will happen;❒ Briefly press the START/STOP button as soon as the warning light mturns on. Waiting for too long means
making spark plugs heating useless.

INDEX❒ Ensure that the handbrake is up;

SAFETYDEVICESSTARTING PROCEDURE FORPETROL VERSIONSDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 151

WARNING CORRECT USE
LIGHTS AND OF THE CARMESSAGES

9:42

IN AN
EMERGENCY

4-06-2008

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

149-164 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
151

4-06-2008

9:42

Pagina 152

The starter automatically operates until
the engine starts.
With engine off and electronic key inserted in the ignition device, it is possible to operate the automatic ignition
briefly pressing the START/STOP button and keeping the clutch pedal
pressed.
In the event of cold weather, we recommend to wait for warning light mturn off before operating the starter.
IMPORTANT It is possible to start theengine keeping pressed only the brake
pedal. In that case, automatic start is notenabled. Then press the START/STOP
button and release it as soon as the engine starts.

IMPORTANT
If at start-up the engine turns off, restart
it by pressing the clutch or brake pedal
and then press button START/STOP.
If after a few attempts the engine does
not start, do not insist but contact Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services.
With car started the electronic key islocked into the ignition device and it canbe removed only after switching the engine off. With car running and key
locked into the ignition device, forced
key removal could damage the ignition
device.

INDEXTECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND CORRECT USE
MESSAGES OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

149-164 Alfa 159 GB

152

Alfawiki.nl

Start-up failures, if any, are indicated by
the turning on of the warning light Y
on the instrument panel (on certain versions a dedicated message is displayed).
In this case contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
If the engine will not start after pressing
button START/STOP, repeat thestart-up procedure by pressing the other pedal (clutch or brake).

The system can recognise start-up failures.
In the event of failure, the electronic key
can be removed from the ignition device toenable the driver to carry out the following operations:❒ turn the instrument panel off bypressing button START/STOP or
removing the electronic key from theignition device;❒ start the engine again by pressing theclutch/brake pedal and button
START/STOP.

HOW TO WARM UP THE
ENGINE AFTER IT HASJUST STARTED(petrol and diesel engines)
Proceed as follows:❒ Drive off slowly, letting the engine
turn at medium revs. Do not accelerate abruptly;❒ Do not drive at full performance forthe initial kilometres. Wait until thecoolant temperature gauge starts
moving.

IMPORTANT In the event of engine
locking while the car is running, due tosafety reasons it will not be possible totake the electronic key out of the ignition device. To remove it, press button
START/STOP with brake pedal (orclutch pedal) released and car stopped.

STOPPING THE ENGINEWith car stopped press button START/STOP. When the engine is off it will bepossible to remove the electronic key
from the ignition device.

WARNINGIn an emergency, andfor safety reasons theengine can be turned off when
the car is running by pressing
repeatedly (3 times within
2 seconds) or by keepingpressed button START/STOP
for a few seconds. In this casethe steering lock cannot be engaged.

INDEX

IMPORTANT After a taxing drive, you
should allow the engine to “catch its
breath” before turning it off by letting it
idle to allow the temperature in the engine compartment to fall.

SAFETYDEVICES

Start-up failuresDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 153

WARNING CORRECT USE
LIGHTS AND OF THE CARMESSAGES

9:42

IN AN
EMERGENCY

4-06-2008

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

149-164 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
153

INDEXTECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND CORRECT USE
MESSAGES OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

149-164 Alfa 159 GB

154

4-06-2008

9:42

Pagina 154

IMPORTANT Turning the car off willdeactivate the electronic safety systems
and turn off the external lights.

REMOVING THE ELECTRONIC
KEY FROM THE IGNITION
DEVICE IN AN EMERGENCYIMPORTANT In the event of engine
locking while the car is running, due tosafety reasons it will not be possible totake the electronic key out of the ignition device. To remove it, turn the instrument panel on and off by pressing
button START/STOP with brake pedal (and clutch pedal) released and car
stopped.

In the event of a failure at engine switching off system or at electronic key unlocking system proceed as follows:

A quick burst on the accelerator before turning
off the engine serves
absolutely no practical purpose,it wastes fuel and is damaging
especially to turbocharged engines.

❒ press the unlocking button to remove
the metal insert (see paragraph“Electronic key” in section “Dashboard and controls”);❒ fit the metal insert B-fig. 1 of theelectronic key into the slot A;❒ remove the electronic key from theignition device.

Alfawiki.nl

fig. 1

A0E0043m

IMPORTANT Only fit the metal insert
B of the electronic key into slot A-fig.1.
IMPORTANT Stop the car before
emergency removal of the key, since removing the key with the engine runningwill turn both the engine and the instrument panel off and the steering lock
will not be engaged.

To release the handbrake proceed as follows:

Proceed as follows:❒ Slightly lift the handbrake A andpress release button B;❒ Stop the engine and engage thehandbrake;

Block the wheels with a wedge or a stone
if the car is parked on a steep slope. Do
not leave the electronic key in the ignition switch to prevent draining the battery.

WARNING

Never leave children unattended in the car. Always remove the electronic key
from the ignition device whenleaving the car and take it out
with you.

A0E0030m

fig. 2

HANDBRAKE
The handbrake lever A-fig. 2 is located between the two front seats. Pull thehandbrake lever A upwards, until the
car cannot be moved.
With electronic key fitted into the ignition device, the instrument panel warning light x will come on.
IMPORTANT The car shall stop aftera few clicks of the handbrake lever. If
this is not the case, contact Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services to have the handbrake adjusted.

Press the brake pedal when carrying out
this operation to prevent the car frommoving accidentally.

INDEX❒ Engage a gear (on a slope, engage
first gear if the car is faced uphill orreverse if it is faced downhill) andleave the wheels steered.

❒ Keep button B pressed and lower thelever. Warning light x on the instrument panel will turn off.

SAFETYDEVICES

PARKING THE CARDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 155

WARNING CORRECT USE
LIGHTS AND OF THE CARMESSAGES

9:42

IN AN
EMERGENCY

4-06-2008

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

149-164 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
155

INDEXTECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND CORRECT USE
MESSAGES OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

149-164 Alfa 159 GB

156

4-06-2008

9:42

Pagina 156

USING THEGEARBOXWARNING

The car can be fitted with 6-gear or
5-gear manual gearbox (1.8 version).
Gear positions are shown on thegearshift lever knob.
Always press down the clutch pedal
when shifting gears. To engage the 6thgear, move the gearshift lever pressing
slightly rightwards to prevent engaging
the 4th gear accidentally.
To engage reverse R from neutral, raisering A-fig. 3 or A-fig. 4 under theknob and at the same time move thegearshift lever leftwards and then forward. After engaging reverse release thering. To shift from reverse to anothergear it is not necessary to raise the ring.

A0E0397m

fig. 3

A0E0151m

fig. 4IMPORTANT The car can only be put
into reverse gear when it has stopped
moving completely. With the engine running, before engaging the reverse, wait
at least 3 seconds with the clutch pedal fully down to prevent damage andgrating of the gears.

Alfawiki.nl

To change gears properly you must push the
clutch pedal fully down. It istherefore essential that there
is nothing under the pedals:
make sure mats are lying flatand do not get in the way ofthe pedals.

Do not drive with yourhand resting on the gear
lever as the force exerted, even if slight, could leadover time to premature wear on
the gearbox internal components. The clutch pedal must be
used for gear shift only. Neverdrive with the foot resting,even if slightly, on the clutch
pedal. For versions/markets
where applicable the clutch pedal control electronics can intervene interpreting the wrong drive style as a fault.

Climate control

Do not travel with too much luggage
stowed in the boot. The weight of thecar (especially when driving in town)
and its trim greatly affects consumption
and stability.

The air conditioner is an additional load
which greatly affects the engine leading
to higher consumption. When the temperature outside the car permits it, use
the air vents where possible.

Roof rack/ski rackSpoilers

Have checks and adjustments carried out
in accordance with the “Service schedule”.

Remove the roof rack or the ski rackfrom the roof as soon as they are nolonger used. These accessories lower air
penetration and adversely affect consumption levels. When needing to carry particularly voluminous objects, preferably use a trailer.

The use of aerodynamic optional extras
which are not certified for the specificuse on the vehicle, may reduce the aerodynamic penetration of the vehicle andincrease consumption.

Tyres

Electric devices

Check the pressure of the tyres routinely at an interval of no more than 4
weeks: if the pressure is too low, consumption levels increase as resistanceto rolling is higher.

Use electric devices only for the amountof time needed. Rear heated window,
additional headlights, windscreen wipers
and heater fan need a considerable
amount of energy, therefore increasing
the requirement of current increases fuel consumption (up to +25% in the urban cycle).

Here are some suggestions which may
help you to keep the running costs ofyour car down and lower the amount of
toxic emissions released into the atmosphere.
GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS
Car maintenance

INDEX

Unnecessary loads

SAFETYDEVICESCONTAININGRUNNING COSTSDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 157

WARNING CORRECT USE
LIGHTS AND OF THE CARMESSAGES

9:42

IN AN
EMERGENCY

4-06-2008

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

149-164 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
157

INDEXTECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND CORRECT USE
MESSAGES OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

149-164 Alfa 159 GB

158

4-06-2008

9:42

Pagina 158

DRIVING STYLE
Starting
Do not warm the engine with the car
at a standstill or at idle or high speed:
under these conditions the engine
warms up much more slowly, increasing
electrical consumption and emissions. It
is therefore advisable to move off immediately, slowly, avoiding high speeds.
This way the engine will warm faster.
Unnecessary actions
Avoid accelerating when waiting at traffic lights or before switching off the engine. This and also double declutchingis absolutely pointless on modern cars
and also increase consumption and pollution.

Gear selection

CONDITIONS OF USE

As soon as the conditions of the traffic
and road allow, use a higher gear. Using a low gear to obtain brilliant performance increases consumption. In thesame way improper use of a high gearincreases consumption, emissions an engine wear.

Cold starting

Top speed
Fuel consumption considerably increases with speed. Avoid superfluous braking and accelerating, which cost in termsof both fuel and emissions.
Acceleration
Accelerating violently increasing the revs
will greatly affect consumption and emissions: acceleration should be gradual andshould not exceed the maximum torque.

Short journeys and frequent cold starts
do not allow the engine to reach optimum operating temperature. This results
in a significant increase in consumption
levels (from +15 to +30% on the urban
cycle) and emission of harmful substances.
Traffic and road conditions
Rather high consumption levels are tied
to situations with heavy traffic, for example in queues with frequent use of
the lower gears or in cities with many
traffic lights. Also winding mountainroads and rough road surfaces adversely affect consumption.
Traffic hold-ups
During prolonged hold-ups (e.g.: levelcrossings) the engine should beswitched off.

Alfawiki.nl

For towing caravans or trailers the car
must be fitted with a certified tow hook
and an adequate electric system. Installation should be carried out by specialised personnel who release a special
document for circulation on the road.
Install any specific and/or additional
rear-view mirrors as specified by law.
Remember that when towing a trailer,
steep hills are harder to climb, the braking spaces increase and overtaking takes
longer depending on the overall weight.

The weight the trailer exerts on the car
tow hook reduces by the same amountthe actual car loading capacity. To makesure the maximum towable weight is
not exceeded (given in the log book)account should be taken of the fully
laden trailer, including accessories andpersonal belongings.
Do not exceed the speed limits of thecountry you are driving in. In any casedo not exceed 100 km/h.

WARNING

The ABS system withwhich the car may befitted does not control the
trailer braking system. Drive
with extreme care on slippery
roadbeds.

WARNING

Under no circumstances
should the car brakesystem be altered to control
the trailer brake. The trailer
braking system must be fully
independent of the car hydraulic system.

SAFETYDEVICESIMPORTANT NOTESEngage a low gear when driving downhill, rather than constantly using thebrake.

WARNING CORRECT USE
LIGHTS AND OF THE CARMESSAGESTOWING TRAILERSDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 159

IN AN
EMERGENCY

9:42

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

4-06-2008

INDEX

149-164 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
159

INDEXTECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND CORRECT USE
MESSAGES OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

149-164 Alfa 159 GB

160

4-06-2008

9:42

Pagina 160

INSTALLING THE TOW HOOK
The towing device should be fastened
to the body by specialised personnel according to any additional and/or integrative information supplied by the Manufacturer of the device.
The towing device must meet current
regulations with reference to 94/20/EC
Directive and subsequent amendments.
For any version the towing device usedmust match the towable weight of the
car on which it is to be installed.

For the electric connection a unified connector should be used which is generally placed on a special bracket normallyfastened to the towing device.
For the electrical connection, 7 pin
12VDC connection is to be used (CUNA/UNI and ISO/DIN Standards). Follow the instructions provided by the car
manufacturer and/or the tow hitch manufacturer.
An electric brake or other device (electric winch, etc.), if required, should be
supplied directly by the battery througha cable with a cross section of no lessthan 2.5 mm2. In addition to the electrical branches, the car’s electric system
can only be connected to the supply cable for an electric brake and to the cable for an internal light, though notabove 15W.

Alfawiki.nl

Assembly diagram fig. 4
The structure of the tow-hook must be
fixed in the indicated points with Ø withn. 2 M10 screws and n. 4 M12 screws.
The fixing points (1) must be provided
with Ø 25x6 mm spacers.
The counter-plates (2) must have a minimum thickness of 4 mm.
The counter-plates (3) must have a minimum thickness of 6 mm.
IMPORTANT It is compulsory to fasten a label (plainly visible) of suitablesize and material with the following
wording:
MAX LOAD ON BALL 75 kg
After fitting, screw holes shall be sealed
to prevent exhaust gas inlet.
IMPORTANT The hook should be fastened to the body avoiding any type ofdrilling and trimming of the bumper.

INDEXTECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

fig. 4
SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

9:42

Alfawiki.nl
WARNING CORRECT USE
LIGHTS AND OF THE CARMESSAGES

full load

4-06-2008

IN AN
EMERGENCY

Standard tow ball

REAR AXLE

149-164 Alfa 159 GB
Pagina 161

A0E0428m

161

INDEXTECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND CORRECT USE
MESSAGES OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

149-164 Alfa 159 GB

162

4-06-2008

9:42

Pagina 162

SNOW TYRES
Use snow tyres of the same size as thenormal tyres provided with the car.
Alfa Romeo Authorized Services will beglad to provide advice concerning themost suitable type of tyre for the customer’s requirements.
For the type of tyre to be used, inflationpressures and the specifications of snow
tyres, follow the instructions given in paragraph “Wheels” in section “Technicalspecifications”.
The winter features of these tyres are reduced considerably when the tread
depth is below 4 mm. In this case, theyshould be replaced.

Due to the snow tyre features, undernormal conditions of use or on long motorway journeys, the performance of
these tyres is lower than that of normal
tyres. It is therefore necessary to limit
their use to the purposes for which they
are certified.
IMPORTANT When snow tyres areused with a max speed index below theone that can be reached by the car (increased by 5%), place a notice in thepassenger compartment, plainly in thedriver’s view which states the max permissible speed of the snow tyres (as per
EC Directive).
All four tyres should be the same (brandand track) to ensure greater safety
when driving and braking and better driveability.
Remember that it is inappropriate tochange the direction of rotation of tyres.

Alfawiki.nl

WARNING

The max speed forsnow tyres with “Q”
marking is 160 km/h; 190km/h for tyres with “T”
marking and 210 km/h fortyres with H marking. The
Road Traffic Code speed limits must however be always
strictly observed.

Snow chains should only be applied tothe driving wheels (front wheels).
Check the tension of the chains after the
first few metres have been driven.
Use snow chains with reduced size: fortyres 205/55 R16” and 215/55
R16” use snow chains with reduced sizewith max protrusion beyond the tyre profile of 9 mm.
Use of snow chains may be compulsory also for cars with four-wheel drive.

Also for 3.2 JTS version,
snow chains shall be fitted on the FRONT axle ofthe car.

Traditional snow chains
may not be used on tyres
type 225/50 R17” only spider type chains can be used.

Tyres 235/45 R18” cannot be fitted with snow
chains due to interferencewith the fender.

WARNING

Keep your speed downwhen snow chains are
fitted. Do not exceed
40 km/h. Avoid potholes, steps and pavements and avoid also to drive
for long distances on roads notcovered with snow to prevent
damaging the car and theroadbed.

When snow chains are
fitted, switch the ASR
system off. Press the
ASR/VDC button (see paragraph “ASR system” in section“Dashboard and controls”).

SAFETYDEVICESUse of snow chains should be in compliance with local regulations.

IMPORTANT Snow chains cannot be
fitted to the space-saver spare wheel.
So, if a front (drive) wheel is punctured
and chains are needed, a rear wheel
should be fitted to the front of the car
and the spare wheel should be fitted to
the rear (adjust tyre pressure to the specified value as soon as possible). Thisway with two normal drive wheels,snow chains can be fitted to them tosolve an emergency.

WARNING CORRECT USE
LIGHTS AND OF THE CARMESSAGESSNOW CHAINSDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 163

IN AN
EMERGENCY

9:42

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

4-06-2008

INDEX

149-164 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
163

INDEXTECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND CORRECT USE
MESSAGES OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

149-164 Alfa 159 GB

164

4-06-2008

9:42

Pagina 164

CAR INACTIVITY❒ clean and protect the painted parts
using protective wax;

If the car is to be left inactive for longer
than a month, the following precautions
should be noted:❒ clean and protect the shiny metalparts using special compounds readily available;❒ park the car in covered, dry and if
possible well-ventilated premises;❒ sprinkle talcum powder on the rubber
windscreen and rear window wiper
blades and lift them off the glass;❒ engage a gear;❒ check that the handbrake is not engaged;❒ disconnect battery negative terminaland check the battery charge. This
check is to be repeated every threemonths when the car is left inactive.
Recharge if the optical(where provided) indicator shows a dark colour
without the central green area (seeparagraph “Battery” in “Car maintenance” section);❒ slightly open the windows;❒ cover the car with a cloth or perforated plastic sheet. Do not use sheetsof non-perforated plastic as they do
not allow moisture on the car bodyto evaporate;❒ inflate tyres to +0.5 bar above thenormal specified pressure and checkit at intervals;

Alfawiki.nl❒ if you don’t disconnect the battery
from the electric system, check its
charge every month and recharge it
if the optical indicator shows a darkcolour without the central green area;❒ do not drain the engine cooling system.
IMPORTANT If the car is fitted withalarm system, switch off the alarm withthe remote control.

SAFETY
DEVICESLOW BRAKE FLUID/HANDBRAKE ON .................... 166
VDC SYSTEM ................................................... 175
BRAKE PAD WEAR ............................................. 167
HILL HOLDER FAILURE ....................................... 176
SEAT BELTS NOT FASTENED................................. 167
ASR SYSTEM (WHEEL ANTISKID SYSTEM) ............ 176
AIR BAG FAILURE............................................... 168
EXTERNAL LIGHTS FAILURE ................................. 176
PASSANGER’S FRONT AIR BAGS DEACTIVATED........ 168
BRAKE LIGHTS FAILURE ...................................... 177
ENGINE COOLANT HIGH TEMPERATURE ................. 169
REAR FOGLIGHTS .............................................. 177
ENGINE OIL HIGH TEMPERATURE.......................... 169
FRONT FOG LIGHTS ........................................... 177
MINIMUM ENGINE OIL LEVEL .............................. 170
SIDE/TAILLIGHTS/FOLLOW ME HOME.................. 177
LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE/EXHAUST OIL ........... 170
DIPPED BEAM HEADLIGHTS................................. 177
LOW BATTERY CHARGE....................................... 170
MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHTS ................................... 177
INCOMPLETE DOOR LOCKING .............................. 171
LEFT-HAND DIRECTION INDICATOR ........................ 177
BONNET OPEN.................................................. 171
RIGHT-HAND DIRECTION INDICATOR...................... 177
BOOT OPEN ..................................................... 171
LIGHT SENSOR FAILURE....................................... 178
INJECTION SYSTEM FAILURE/
RAIN SENSOR FAILURE ........................................ 178
EOBD SYSTEM FAILURE...................................... 171
PARKING SENSORS FAILURE................................ 178
CAR PROTECTION SYSTEM FAILURE/
FUEL RESERVE – LIMITED CRUISING RANGE .......... 178
STEERING LOCK INHIBITION ................................ 172
CRUISE CONTROL ............................................. 178
ALARM FAILURE/BREAK-IN ATTEMPTDIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER CLOGGED .................. 178
ELECTRONIC KEY NOT RECOGNIZED...................... 172
ANTIPINCH SYSTEM FAILURE............................... 179
POSSIBLE PRESENCE OF ICE ON THE ROAD ........... 173
WINDSCREEN WASHER FLUID LOW LEVEL ............. 179
PRE-HEATING GLOW PLUGS/SPEED LIMIT EXCEEDED ..................................... 179
PRE-HEATING GLOW PLUG FAILURE....................... 173
T.P.M.S. SYSTEM FAILURE................................... 179
WATER IN DIESEL FUEL FILTER............................. 174
CHECK TYRE PRESSURE...................................... 179
INERTIAL FUEL CUT-OFF SWITCHED ON ................ 174
LOW INFLATION PRESSURE................................. 180
ABS SYSTEM FAILURE........................................ 175
Alfawiki.nl
TYRE PRESSURE UNSUITABLE FOR SPEED ............ 180
EBD SYSTEM FAILURE........................................ 175

WARNING CORRECT USE
LIGHTS AND OF THE CARMESSAGES

WA R N I N G L I G H T S A N D M E S S A G E SDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 165

IN AN
EMERGENCY

9:42

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

4-06-2008

INDEX

165-180 Alfa 159 GB

165

INDEXTECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND CORRECT USE
MESSAGES
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

165-180 Alfa 159 GB

166

4-06-2008

9:42

Pagina 166

WARNING LIGHTSAND MESSAGES
GENERAL WARNINGS
Failure indications shown on the display
are divided into two categories: very serious and less serious failures.
Every failure indication is accompaniedby the turning on of the relevant warning light (where provided) and by dedicated warning messages, if any.
In certain cases, failure indications canbe accompanied by the sound of abuzzer (adjustable).
These indications are concise and cautionary and are aimed to suggest the
prompt action the driver must adopt
when a car malfunctioning appears.
These indications, however, shall not be
considered as exhaustive and/or as analternative to the specifications contained in this “Owner’s Manual”, whichshall always be read through carefully
and thoroughly.
In case of failure indication always referto the specifications contained in thissection.

Very serious failures
These failures are repeated on the display
indefinitely and stop any previous indication on the display. These failures arerepeated each time the key is fitted into
the ignition device until the cause of malfunctioning is removed. To stop this “cycle” press button MENU: in this casethe failure symbol stays on the display atthe bottom of the screen until the causeof malfunctioning is removed.
Serious failures
These failures are repeated on the display
for about 20 seconds and then they gooff. These failures are repeated each time
the key is fitted into the ignition device.
At the end of the displaying cycle (approx. 20 seconds), or when pressing button MENU, the failure symbol will stayon the display at the bottom of the screen
until the cause of malfunctioning is removed.

Alfawiki.nlx

LOW BRAKE
FLUID
(red)
HANDBRAKE ON(red)

Fitting the key into the ignition device
the warning light turns on, but it should
go off after few seconds.
Low brake fluid level
The warning light turns on (on certain
versions a dedicated message is displayed) when the level of the brake fluid in the reservoir falls below the minimum level, due to possible leak in thecircuit.
Handbrake on
The warning light turns on when thehandbrake is on.
WARNING

If the warning lightturns on when travelling, check that the handbrakeis not engaged. If the warning
light stays on with handbrakedisengaged, stop the car immediately and contact Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services.

IMPORTANT Since the car is fittedwith wear sensors for the front brakepads, when changing them, check also
the rear brake pads.

<

The warning light turns on
glowing steadily when:❒ the driver's seat belt is not fastened
correctly;❒ the passenger's seat belt is not fastened correctly, heavy objects areplaced on the passenger's seat;❒ unfastening the driver's or the passenger's seat belt.
With car moving the warning light willturn on flashing together with the buzzer
for a short time.
The warning light will then stay on glowing steadily.

The buzzer can be muted temporarily by
the following procedure:❒ fasten the front seat belts;❒ fit the electronic key into the ignition device;❒ wait for over 20 seconds but less than
1 minute and then unfasten one of thefront seat belts.
This procedure will stand valid till next engine switching off.
For permanent deactivation, contact Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services. The S.B.R.
system can only be reset through the setup menu (see paragraph “Reconfigurable
multifunction display“ in section “Dashboard and controls”).

SAFETYDEVICESThe warning light (where provided) turn on (on certain versions together with the message on the display)
if the front brake pads are worn; in thiscase have them changed as soon as possible.

SEAT BELTS NOTFASTENED (red)WARNING CORRECT USE
LIGHTS AND OF THE CARMESSAGESBRAKE PAD WEAR
(amber)DASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 167

IN AN
EMERGENCY

9:42

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

d4-06-2008

INDEX

165-180 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
167

INDEXTECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND CORRECT USE
MESSAGES
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

165-180 Alfa 159 GB

168¬

4-06-2008

9:42

Pagina 168

AIR BAG FAILURE(red)

Fitting the key into the ignition
device the warning light turns on, but
it should go off after few seconds.
The warning light stays on glowing
steadily (on certain versions together
with the message on the display) to indicate a failure in the air bag system.

WARNING

If the ¬ warning light
does not turn on when
fitting the key into the ignition
device, or if stays on whentravelling (on certain versions
together with the message on
the display), this could indicate
a failure in safety retaining system; under this condition air
bags or pretensioners could not
trigger in the event of collisionor, in a restricted number ofcases, they could trigger accidentally. Before restarting contact Alfa Romeo Authorized
Services.

WARNING

Failure of the ¬ warning light is indicated by
the flashing for more than thenormal 4 seconds of the passenger's front air bag deactivated warning light F. In addition, the air bag system willdeactivate automatically thepassenger's front air bag (frontand side where provided). In
this event warning light ¬could not indicate failure insafety systems. Before restarting contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services immediately tohave the system checked.

F

PASSENGER’SFRONT AIR BAGS
DEACTIVATED(amber)

The warning light (set on the front ceiling light panel) turns on when passenger’s front air bags, passenger’s knees
air bag (where provided) and passenger’s front side bag are deactivatedthrough the relevant key switch (for versions/markets where applicable).
With passenger's air bags active, when
fitting the electronic key into the ignition
device the warning light will turn on forabout 4 seconds, will flash for the next
4 seconds and then it will turn off.
WARNING

Alfawiki.nl

Warning light Ffailure
is indicated by warning
light ¬. In addition, the air bag
system will deactivate automatically the passenger's front
air bag (front and side). Before
restarting contact Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services immediately to have the system
checked.

The warning light turns on (on certain
versions a dedicated message is displayed) to indicate engine overheating.
If the warning light comes on, proceed
as follows:– Normal driving conditions: stop
the car, switch off the engine and check
whether the water level in the reservoir
is not below the MIN marl. Otherwise
wait for few seconds to allow engine
cooling, then open slowly and carefully
the cap, top up coolant and check
whether its level is falling between MIN
and MAX marks in the reservoir. Checkvisually any leak. If when restarting thewarning light comes on again, contact
Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

IMPORTANT Under severe use of thecar, keep the engine on and slightly accelerated for few minutes before switching it off.

WARNING

With engine hot, do notremove the cap: risk ofburnt.

`ENGINE OIL
HIGH TEMPERATURE

Fitting the key into the ignition
device, the warning light (set on engine
oil temperature gauge) turns on but itshould go off after a few seconds. Warning light turning on when travelling (oncertain versions together with the message on the display) indicates that engine oil is too hot; switch the engine off
and contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

If warning light `starts flashing whentravelling contact Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services.

SAFETYDEVICES

Fitting the key into the ignition device,
the warning light (set on engine coolant
gauge) turns on but it shall go off aftera few seconds.

– Car heavy duty (e.g.: towing trailer uphill or fully laden car): decrease
speed, if the warning light stays on, stop
the car. Wait for 2 or 3 minutes leaving
the engine on and slightly accelerated tofurther activate the circulation of thecoolant fluid, then switch the engine off.

WARNING CORRECT USE
LIGHTS AND OF THE CARMESSAGESENGINE COOLANT
HIGH TEMPERATURE(red)

DASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 169

IN AN
EMERGENCY

9:42

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

u

4-06-2008

INDEX

165-180 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
169165-180 Alfa 159 GB

4-06-2008

9:42

Pagina 170

DASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

serted into the starting device the display will show the engine oil level fora few seconds.

INDEX

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND CORRECT USE
MESSAGES
OF THE CAR

k When the electronic key is in-

SAFETYDEVICESMINIMUM ENGINEOIL LEVEL (RED)170

On some versions the display will show
a message and a symbol if the engine
oil level is too low. In this case, top up
the engine oil to the correct level (see“Checking fluid levels” in “Car maintenance” chapter).

LOW ENGINEv OIL PRESSURE
EXHAUST OIL(diesel versions)
Low engine oil pressure
On certain versions, fitting the key into
the ignition device, the warning lightturns on but it should go off as soon as
the engine has started.

WARNING

If the warning light(or as an alternative,on certain versions, a symbol
and a message are displayed)
comes on when travelling,stop immediately and contact
Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

Exhaust oil (diesel versions)
The warning light (where provided) withturn on flashing (on certain versions amessage is displayed) when the system
Alfawiki.nl
detects thatthe engine oil is exhaust.

After the first indication, at each engine
starting the warning light v will goon flashing for about 1 minute and thenevery 2 hours until oil is changed.

If warning light v
starts flashing, contact
Alfa Romeo Authorized
Services as soon as possible tohave the engine oil changed andthe instrument panel (or symbolv on the display) switched
off.

w

LOW BATTERYCHARGE (red)The warning light (where provided) turns on, but it should go off assoon as the engine has started (with theengine running at idle speed a brief delay in going out is allowed).
If the warning light (or as an alternative,on certain versions, a symbol and a message are displayed) stays on glowing
steadily or flashing contact immediately Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

vided) (or symbol on the display) turns
on when one or more doors, the boot or
the bonnet (where provided) are notproperly shut.

S

BONNET OPEN
(where provided)

U

Injection system failure

On certain versions message
and symbol S (red) are displayed toindicate that bonnet is open.

Fitting the key into the ignition device
the warning light turns on, but it should
go off when the engine has started.

BOOT OPEN

The warning light stays on or it turns onwhen travelling to indicate a malfunction in the injection/exhaust systemwith possible lack of performance, poor
driveability and high consumption.

R On certain versions message

and symbol R (red) aredisplayed to indicate that boot is
open.

In these conditions it is possible to continue driving without however requiring
heavy effort or high speed from the engine. In any case, contact Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services as soon as possible.

Alfawiki.nl

EOBD system failure(optional for versions/markets where applicable)
Under normal conditions, fitting the electronic key into the ignition device, thewarning light turns on, but it should go
off when the engine has started. This indicates proper operation of the warning light.
If the warning light stays on or turns onwhen travelling:– glowing steadily (on certain versions together with the message on thedisplay): means a fault in the supply/ignition system which could cause
high emissions at the exhaust, possiblelack of performance, poor handling andhigh consumption levels. In these conditions it is possible to continue driving
without however requiring heavy effort
or high speed from the engine. Prolonged use of the car with the warning
light on may cause damages. Contact
Alfa Romeo Authorized Services as soon
as possible.
The warning light goes off if the fault
disappears, but it is however stored by
the system.

SAFETYDEVICES´ The warning light (where pro-INJECTION SYSTEMFAILURE (diesel
versions - amber)
EOBD SYSTEMFAILURE(petrol versions amber)(optional forversions/markets
where applicable)

WARNING CORRECT USE
LIGHTS AND OF THE CARMESSAGESINCOMPLETE DOORLOCKING (red)DASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 171

IN AN
EMERGENCY

9:42

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

4-06-2008

INDEX

165-180 Alfa 159 GB

171

INDEXTECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND CORRECT USE
MESSAGES
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

165-180 Alfa 159 GB

172

4-06-2008

9:42

Pagina 172– flashing: indicates the possibility ofdamage to the catalyst (see “EOBD system” in section “Dashboard and controls”). If the light flashes, it is necessary to release the accelerator pedal tolower the speed of the engine until thewarning light stops flashing; continue
the journey at moderate speed, trying
to avoid driving conditions that may
cause further flashing and contact Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services as soon as
possible.

If when fitting the key into the ignition device, thewarning light U does
not turn on or if turns on with
fixed light or flashing when the
car is travelling, contact Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services assoon as possible. Warning light
U operation can by checked bytraffic agents by proper equipment therefore, comply withlaws and regulations in force inthe country where you are driving.

>

CAR PROTECTIONSYSTEM FAILURE(amber)STEERING LOCKINHIBITION(amber)Car protection system failure
Warning light (where provided) comingon (on certain versions a message is displayed) indicates car protecting system
failure: in this event contact Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services as soon as possible.
Steering lock inhibition
Warning light (where provided) turns on(on certain versions a message is displayed) when removing the electronic
key from the ignition device when the
car has turned off while travelling.

Y

ALARM FAILURE(where provided)(amber)
BREAK-IN ATTEMPT(amber)
ELECTRONIC KEYNOT RECOGNIZED(amber)Alarm failure
The turning on of the warning light (where
provided) (on certain versions a message
is displayed) indicates that there is a failure in the alarm system. Contact Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services as soon as
possible.
Break-in attempt
The turning on of the warning light (where
provided) (on certain versions a message
is displayed) indicates an attempt ofbreak-in. Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized
Services as soon as possible.
Electronic key not recognized

Alfawiki.nl

The turning on of the warning light (where
provided) (on certain versions a message
is displayed) indicates that the electronic
key being used is not enabled.

When the outside temperature reaches
or falls below 3°C, the display will show
a warning message, symbol √, and abuzzer will sound to warn the driver ofthe possible presence of ice on the road.
On certain versions, once the above
warning indication cycle is over or whenpressing briefly the button MENU:This cycle is performed only once when
the outside temperature read is lower
than or equal to 3°C and it can be repeated only when outside temperature
exceeds
6 °C and then falls down to 3 °C or below.
IMPORTANT In the event of outside
temperature sensor failure, the display
will show dashes instead of the value.

m

PRE-HEATINGGLOW PLUGS(diesel versions amber)
PRE-HEATINGGLOW PLUGSFAILURE (diesel
versions - amber)Pre-heating glow plugs
Fitting the key into the ignition device
the warning light turns on and it will turnoff when glow plugs reach the preset
temperature. Start the engine immediately after warning light switching off.

– the displayed message goes off andpreviously active screen is displayed
again;– temperature indication stops flashing;– symbol √ stays displayed at the bottom right of the screen (until outside
temperature is lower than or equal to
6°C).

INDEX

IMPORTANT With mild or hot ambient temperature, warning light stays on
for very short time.

SAFETYDEVICESPOSSIBLE PRESENCE OF ICE
ON THE ROADDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 173

WARNING CORRECT USE
LIGHTS AND OF THE CARMESSAGES

9:42

IN AN
EMERGENCY

4-06-2008

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

165-180 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
173

INDEXTECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND CORRECT USE
MESSAGES
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

165-180 Alfa 159 GB

174

4-06-2008

9:42

Pagina 174

Pre-heating glow plugs failure
The warning light (on certain versions
together with the message on the display) will flash to indicate a failure in
the pre-heating glow plugs system. Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services assoon as possible to have the failure eliminated.

c

WATER IN
FUEL FILTER(diesel versions amber)

The warning light turns on glowing
steadily when travelling (on certain versions together with the message on thedisplay) to indicate that there is waterin the diesel fuel filter.

The presence of water inthe fuel circuit may
cause serious damage tothe entire injection system andcause irregular engine operation. If the warning light c on
the dial turns on (on certain versions together with the message on the display) contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services
as soon as possible to have thesystem relieved. If the above
indications come on immediately after refuelling, water has
probably been poured into thetank: turn the engine off immediately and contact Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services.

Alfawiki.nl

INERTIAL FUEL CUTOFF SWITCHED ON

s On certain versions, the intervention of the inertial fuel cut-off switch
is indicated by a message + symbol(amber) on the display.

WARNINGIf, after a crash, you
smell fuel or see leaks
from the fuel system, do notreset the switch to avoid firerisk.

The warning light turns on (on certain
versions a dedicated message is displayed) when the system is inefficient.
In this case the braking system keeps
its effectiveness unchanged, but without
the potential offered by the ABS system.
Drive carefully and contact Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services as soon as possible.

xá

VDC SYSTEM(where provided)(amber)Fitting the key into the ignition device

warning light turns on, but it should> With the engine running the thego off after few seconds.

turning on at the same time ofthe > and x warning lights (on certain versions together with the message
on the display) indicates that the EBD
system is inefficient; in this case heavy
braking may cause the rear wheels tolock before time, with the possibility of
skidding.
Drive with the utmost care to the nearest Alfa Romeo Authorized Service tohave the system checked.

The warning light flashes when the VDC
cuts in, to alert the driver that the system is adapting to the road surface grip
conditions.
VDC deactivation
When the VDC is deactivated manually(pressing the ASR/VDC button for 2 seconds) (see paragraph “VDC system” insection “Dashboard and controls”) the
instrument panel warning light turns on(on certain versions a message is displayed).
VDC failure

Alfawiki.nl

In case of failure, the VDC system willdeactivate automatically and the instrument panel warning light á will turnon glowing steadily (on certain versions
a message will also be displayed). In
this case contact Alfa Romeo Authorized
Services as soon as possible.

SAFETYDEVICES

Fitting the key into the ignition
device the warning light turns on, but
it should go off after few seconds.

EBD SYSTEMFAILURE(red)(amber)WARNING CORRECT USE
LIGHTS AND OF THE CARMESSAGESABS SYSTEMFAILURE (amber)

DASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 175

IN AN
EMERGENCY

9:42

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE>

4-06-2008

INDEX

165-180 Alfa 159 GB

175

INDEXTECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND CORRECT USE
MESSAGES
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

165-180 Alfa 159 GB

176*

4-06-2008

9:42

Pagina 176

HILL HOLDERFAILURE(where provided)(amber)Fitting the key into the ignition device,
the warning light (where provided) turns
on, but it should go off after a few seconds.
If the warning light stays on (on certain
versions a message is displayed) there
is a failure in the Hill Holder system. Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

á

ASR SYSTEM(WHEEL ANTISKIDSYSTEM)(amber)Fitting the key into the ignition device
the warning light turns on, but it should
go off after few seconds. The warning
light flashes when the system cuts in, toalert the driver that the system is adapting to the road surface grip conditions.
ASR deactivation
When the ASR is deactivated manually(pressing the ASR/VDC button) (seeparagraph “ASR system” in section“Dashboard and controls”) the
ASR/VDC button turns on (on versions
fitted with “Reconfigurable multifunction
display” symbol V is also displayed).
ASR failure
In the event of a failure the ASR system
is deactivated automatically and on versions fitted with “Reconfigurable multifunction display” the symbol V is displayed. In this case contact Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services as soon as possible.

Alfawiki.nl

W

EXTERNAL LIGHTSFAILURE(amber)

The warning light (where provided)
turns on (on certain versions a message
is displayed) when one of the following
lights is failing:– sidelights– direction indicators– rear fog guards– number plate lights.
The failure referring to these lights could
be: one or more blown bulbs, a blown
protection fuse or an electric connection
cut-off.

The warning light (where provided) turnson (on certain versions a message is displayed) when a failure at brake lights(stop) is detected. The failure could be
due to: blown bulb, blown protection fuseor electric connection cut-off.

3

SIDE/TAILLIGHTS(green)FOLLOW ME HOME
(green)1

The warning light turns onwhen the main beams are turned on.

Sidelights
The warning light turns on whenside/taillights are turned on.

R

Follow me home

The warning light turns onwhen the rear fog lights are turned on.

5

FRONT FOG LIGHTS(green)

The warning light turns onwhen the front fog lights are turned on.

2

DIPPED BEAMHEADLIGHTS(green)

The warning light turns on when thedipped beams are turned on.

LEFT-HAND
DIRECTION
INDICATOR(green)

The warning light turns on when the direction indicator stalk is moved downwards or, together with the right indicator, when the hazard light button ispressed.

E

RIGHT-HAND
DIRECTION
INDICATOR (green)

The warning light turns on when the direction indicator stalk is moved upwards
or, together with the left indicator, when
the hazard light button is pressed.

INDEX

4

REAR FOG LIGHTS(amber)

The warning light comes on (together withthe message on the display) when the
Follow me home device is activated (seeparagraph “Follow me home” in section“Dashboard and controls”).

MAIN BEAMHEADLIGHTS (blue)

SAFETYDEVICESBRAKE LIGHTSFAILURE(amber)DASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 177

WARNING CORRECT USE
LIGHTS AND OF THE CARMESSAGES

9:42

IN AN
EMERGENCYT

4-06-2008

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

165-180 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
177

INDEXTECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND CORRECT USE
MESSAGES
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

165-180 Alfa 159 GB

178

1

4-06-2008

9:42

Pagina 178

LIGHT SENSOR
FAILURE(where provided)(amber)

The warning light (or as an alternative,on certain versions, a symbol and a message are displayed) turns on to indicate
a failure at the light sensor.

u

RAIN SENSOR
FAILURE(where provided)(amber)

The warning light (where provided) turnson (on certain versions a message is displayed) when the rain sensor is failing.

t

PARKING SENSOR
FAILURE(where provided)(amber)

The warning light (or as an alternative,on certain versions, a symbol and a message are displayed) turns on to indicate
a failure at parking sensors.

K

FUEL RESERVE –LIMITED CRUISING
RANGE (amber)

The warning light on the fuel level gauge
turns on when about 10 litres fuel areleft in the tank. On certain versions. thedisplay will show a warning message
when the cruising range is less than 50
km (or 31 mi).

If warning light K
starts flashing whentravelling contact Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services.

Alfawiki.nl

Ü

CRUISE CONTROL(where provided)(green)

The warning light turns on (on certain
versions a dedicated message is displayed) when turning the the knurledring of the Cruise Control to Ü.

DIESEL PARTICULATE

h FILTER CLOGGED(diesel versions)(amber)

The warning light (or as an alternative,on certain versions, a symbol and a message are displayed) turns on when the
diesel particulate filter is clogged and thedriving conditions do not enable to activate automatically the reclaiming procedure.
To enable the cleaning procedure, keep
the car running until the warning lightturns on (or, on certain versions, symbol h disappears from the display).

Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

)

WINDSCREENWASHER FLUID
LOW LEVEL (amber)

The warning light (where provided)
turns on (on certain versions a message
is displayed) when the windscreen
washer fluid level falls down the preset
min. level.

The display will show a warning message + symbol (red) and thebuzzer will sound when the car exceeds
the speed limit set through the “Setupmenu” (e.g.: 120 km/h) (see paragraphs “Multifunction Display” or “Reconfigurable Multifunction Display” insection “Dashboard and controls”).

nT.P.M.S. SYSTEMFAILURE(where provided)

On certain versions the display will show
a warning message + symbol (amber)when a failure is detected in the T.P.M.S.
system (Tyre Pressure Monitoring System). Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized
Services as soon as possible.
Should one or more wheels without sensor be fitted, the display will show awarning message until initial conditions
are restored.

n

CHECK TYRE
PRESSURE(where provided)

On some versions, the display shows amessage + symbol (amber) to indicatethat the tyre pressure is below the recommended value which ensures thelong life of the tyre and optimum fuelconsumption, and/or to indicate a slow
pressure leak. If two or more tyres arein one of the above-mentioned conditions, the display will show the message
relating to each tyre in succession. In
this case, it is advisable to check and adjust the tyre pressures (see “Technical
Specification” section).

SAFETYDEVICESThe warning light (or as an alternative,on certain versions, a symbol and a message are displayed) turns on when a failure is detected in the antipinch system.

X

SPEED LIMITEXCEEDEDWARNING CORRECT USE
LIGHTS AND OF THE CARMESSAGESANTIPINCH SYSTEMFAILURE(amber)DASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 179

IN AN
EMERGENCY

9:42

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

54-06-2008

INDEX

165-180 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
179

INDEXTECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND CORRECT USE
MESSAGES
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

165-180 Alfa 159 GB

180n

4-06-2008

9:42

Pagina 180

LOW TYRE
PRESSURE(where provided)

On certain versions the display will show
a warning message + symbol (red) (andbuzzer will sound) when the pressure of
one or more tyres falls below the preset
threshold. In this way the T.P.M.S. system warns the driver that tyre/s is/are
dangerously flat; possible puncture.
IMPORTANT Stop immediately with
one or more tyres flat, avoid braking
sharply and abrupt turns. Replace immediately the punctured tyre with thespace-saver spare wheel (where provided) or repair the puncture tyre using theproper kit (see paragraph “If a tyre ispunctured” in section “In an emergency”) and then contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services as soon as possible.

n

TYRE PRESSURE
UNSUITABLE FOR
SPEED(where provided)

Should it be required to journey at a
speed higher than 160 km/h, inflate
tyres at full load pressures (see paragraph“Cold inflation pressures” in section "Technical Specifications").
On certain versions, if the T.P.M.S. system detects that the pressure of one ormore tyres is unsuitable for the current
speed the display will show a message +symbol (amber) that will stay on until the
car speed slow downs below the preset
threshold.

Alfawiki.nl

IMPORTANT In this case slow down
immediately since tyre overheating could
impair tyre performance and life beyond
repair, and even make the tyre to blowout.
IMPORTANT Should you have to journey anyway a speed higher than 160
km/h, stop the car when the display
shows the warning symbol to inflate tyres
to the proper pressure values (see paragraph "Cold inflation pressures" in section"Technical Specifications ").

In an emergency we recommend that you call the toll-free number foundon the Warranty Booklet. You can also connect to the site www.alfaromeo.com
to search for the nearest Alfa Romeo Authorized Services point.

JUMP STARTING ............................................... 182
IF A TYRE IS PUNCTURED ................................... 183
QUICK TYRE REPAIR KIT
FIX&GO automatic ............................................ 190
WHEN NEEDING TO CHANGE A BULB ................... 196
IF AN EXTERIOR LIGHT BURNS OUT ...................... 199
IF AN INTERIOR LIGHT BURNS OUT ...................... 205
IF A FUSE BLOWS ............................................. 209
IF THE BATTERY IS FLAT...................................... 219
JACKING THE CAR.............................................. 220

INDEX

TOWING THE CAR ............................................. 221

SAFETYDEVICESIN AN EMERGENCYDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 181

CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

9:43

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES

4-06-2008

TECHNICALCAR
IN AN
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY

181-222 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
181

SAFETY
DEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

181-222 Alfa 159 GB

4-06-2008

9:43

Pagina 182

JUMP STARTING

Under no circumstances
should a battery charger
be used to start the engine: it could damage the electronic systems and in particular
the ignition and injection control
units.

If the battery is flat, it is possible to start
the engine using an auxiliary battery
with the same capacity or a little higher than the flat one.

CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR❒ With a second lead, connect the negative terminal (–) of the auxiliary
battery and to an earthing point E
on the engine of the car to be started;

INDEX

IN AN
TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY❒ Connect positive terminals (+ near
the terminal) of the two batteries
with a jump lead;

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES

Proceed as follows fig. 1:

182❒ Start the engine;❒ When the engine has been started,
remove the leads reversing the order above.

A0E0201m

fig. 1

If after a few attempts the engine does
not start, do not insist but contact Alfa
Romeo Authorized Service.
IMPORTANT Do not directly connect
the negative terminals of the two batteries: sparks could ignite the flammable gas from the battery. If the other battery is fitted in another car, prevent accidental contacts between the metalparts of the two cars.

Alfawiki.nl

WARNING

Do not carry out thisprocedure if you lackexperience; if it is not done
correctly it can cause very intense electrical discharges. In
addition, the fluid contained in
the battery is poisonous andcorrosive. Avoid contact withskin and eyes. You are also advised not to put naked flamesor lighted cigarettes near thebattery and not to cause
sparks.

WARNING

Remember that thebrake booster and thepower steering system are notoperating until the engine isstarted, a greater effort will
therefore be required to press
the brake pedal or turn thesteering wheel.

IF A TYRE
IS PUNCTURED
For versions/markets where applicable,
the car can be equipped with the “Quicktyre repair kit Fix&Go automatic“. Operations required to change a wheel aredescribed in the following chapter.
As an alternative to the kit “Fix & Go
automatic”, the car can be provided (upon request) with space-saver spare
wheel or standard size spare wheel;
wheel changing and correct use of thejack and space-saver spare wheel call forsome precautions as listed below.

WARNING

Alert other drivers thatthe car is stationary incompliance with local regulations: hazard warning lights,
warning triangle etc. Any passengers on board should leave
the car, especially if it is heavily laden. Passengers should
stay away from oncoming
traffic while the wheel is being changed on. If the wheel isbeing changed on a steep orbadly surfaced road, place thewedges or other suitable material under the wheel to stop
the car. Never start the engine
when the car is jacked up. If
you were towing a trailer, uncouple the trailer before jacking the car.

SAFETYDEVICES

Never bump start the engine (by pushing, towing, or coasting downhill) as this
could cause fuel to flow into the catalytic
exhaust system and damage it beyond
repair.

CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

BUMP STARTINGDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 183

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES

9:43

TECHNICALCAR
IN AN
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY

4-06-2008

INDEX

181-222 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
183

INDEXIN ANTECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

181-222 Alfa 159 GB

184

4-06-2008

9:43

Pagina 184

WARNING

The space-saver spare
wheel (for versions/markets where applicable) is
specific to your car; do not use
it on other models, or use thespare wheel of other models
on your car. The space-saver
spare wheel shall only be usedin an emergency. It shall only
be used for the distance necessary to reach a service point
and the car speed shall not exceed 80 Km/h. The spare
wheel has a sticker that summarises the main cautions foruse and limitations. The sticker should never be removed or
covered!. Never fit a wheel
cap on a space-saver spare
wheel.

WARNING

When driving with aspace-saver
sparewheel fitted, the driving performance of the car changes.
Avoid accelerating or braking
sharply, abrupt turns or fast
cornerings. The life of thespare wheel is approx. 3000
Km, after this distance itshould be replaced with another of the same type. Never attempt to fit a conventional tyre on a rim designed
for use as a space-saver spare
wheel. Have the punctured
wheel repaired and refitted assoon as possible. Two or more
space-saver spare wheels
should never be used together. Do not grease the threadsof bolts before installing them:
they might slip out.

Alfawiki.nl

WARNING

The jack shall only be
used for changing
wheels on the car with which
it is provided or on cars of thesame model. It must not be used
for other purposes such as for
instance raising cars of othermodels. In no case should it beused for repairs under the car.
Incorrect positioning of the jackmay cause the jacked car to fall.
Do not use the jack for higher
capacities than stated on its label. Snow chains cannot be fitted to the space-saver spare
wheel. So, if a front (drive)
wheel is punctured and chainsare needed, a rear wheel should
be fitted to the front of the car
and the spare wheel should be
fitted to the rear. This way with
two normal drive wheels, snow
chains can be fitted to them tosolve an emergency.

Pagina 185

SAFETYDEVICES
A0E0132m

fig. 2

fig. 3

A0E0133m

Please note:

To change a wheel proceed as follows:❒ the jack weight is 1.76 kg;❒ Stop the car in a position that is notdangerous for oncoming traffic where
you can change the wheel safely. The
ground should be flat and adequately firm;❒ the jack requires no adjustment;❒ the jack cannot be repaired. If it
breaks it must be replaced with a
new jack;❒ no tool other than its cranking device
may be fitted on the jack.

❒ Turn the engine off, pull up the handbrake and engage first gear or reverse;❒ Using handle A-fig. 2, lift the stiffcover B and secure it as shown infig. 3;INDEX

Never tamper with the
inflation valve. Neverplace tools between the rim
and tyre. Check and restore, if
required, the pressure of tyres
and spare wheel to the values
given in section “Technical
Specifications”.

DASHBOARDAND
CONTROLSWARNING

CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

9:43

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES

4-06-2008

TECHNICALCAR
IN AN
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY

181-222 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
185

4-06-2008

9:43

Pagina 186

INDEX

IN AN
TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

181-222 Alfa 159 GB

186

fig. 4

A0E0134m

A0E0206m

fig. 5❒ Take out the tool container fig. 4;

fig. 7

A0E0195m❒ The jack shall be fitted as shown infig. 7 (for versions fitted withsideskirts, before fitting the jack, remove cover A-fig. 9 set on thesideskirt as shown in the figure);❒ Loosen the bolts of the wheel to be
replaced by about one turn with thewrench provided A-fig. 5; if the car
is fitted with alloy rims, shake the car
to facilitate removing this rim fromthe wheel hub;A0E0207m

fig. 6❒ Remove the wheel cap A-fig. 6(only versions with steel rims);

Alfawiki.nl

4-06-2008

9:43

Pagina 187❒ Fit the handle L-fig. 8 to operate
the jack and lift the car until thewheel to be changed is several centimetres off the ground;❒ Loosen the fastening bolts and thenremove the wheel;❒ Make sure the contact surfaces between space-saver spare wheel andhub are clean so that the fastening
bolts will not come loose;

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES❒ Warn anybody nearby that the car isabout to be lifted. They must stayclear and not touch the car until it
is back on the ground;

A0E0049m

INDEX❒ Operate the device F-fig. 8 to extend the jack until the top of the jackG fits correctly into catch H;

fig. 9TECHNICALCAR
IN AN
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY

A0E0208m

fig. 8CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

181-222 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
187

181-222 Alfa 159 GB

4-06-2008

9:43

Pagina 188

DASHBOARDAND
CONTROLSREFITTING ANORMAL WHEEL

Versions with steel rims
fig. 10

A0E0209m❒ fit the space-saver spare wheel making one of the holes A-fig. 10 coincide with the relevant pin B;❒ Using the wrench provided, fully tighten the five fastening bolts;

A0E0210m

fig. 11❒ Lower the car and remove the jack;❒ Use the wrench provided to fasten
the bolts completely in a criss-crossfashion according to the sequence
shown in fig. 11.

INDEX

IN AN
TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICES

Following the procedure described previously, raise the car and remove thespare wheel.

188

Proceed as follows:❒ Make sure the contact surfaces between standard wheel and hub areclean so that the fastening bolts will notcome loose;❒ Fit the standard wheel taking into account that pin B-fig. 10 shall coincide with one of the holes A;❒ Place the wheel cap on the wheel rim
making symbol C, (marked inside thewheel cap), coincide with the inflation
valve fig. 12;

Alfawiki.nl❒ Using the wrench provided, tighten thefastening bolts;❒ Lower the car and remove the jack;❒ Using the wrench provided, fully tighten the bolts in the sequence shownin fig. 11;

A0E0211m

fig. 13

Versions with alloy rims
Proceed as follows:❒ tighten pin A-fig. 13 in one of theholes of the wheel hub fastening
bolts;❒ insert the wheel on the pin and, using the wrench provided, tighten thefour bolts available;❒ loosen pin A-fig. 13 and tighten
the last fastening bolt;❒ lower the car and remove the jack,then, using the wrench provided tighten the bolts according to the sequencepreviously shown for the space-saver
spare wheel fig. 11.

SAFETYDEVICESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

A0E0236m

When you have finished:❒ Stow the spare wheel in the spaceprovided in the boot;❒ Fit the jack partially open in its container forcing it lightly to prevent itfrom vibrating when travelling;❒ Put the tools back into their places in
the container;❒ Arrange the container complete withtools on the space-saver spare wheel;❒ Reposition properly the boot stiff covering.

DASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 189

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES

9:43

TECHNICALCAR
IN AN
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY

fig. 12

4-06-2008

INDEX

181-222 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
189

INDEXIN ANTECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

181-222 Alfa 159 GB

190

4-06-2008

9:43

Pagina 190

QUICK TYRE REPAIRKIT FIX&GO
automatic
The car is provided with the quick tyrerepair kit “FIX&GO automatic”, insteadof the traditional tool kit and space-saver
spare wheel.
The kit fig. 14 is placed in the boot. In
this container are also housed the screwdriver and the tow hitch.

A0E0114m

fig. 14

The quick tyre repair kit includes:❒ a bottle A-fig. 14 containing thesealer, fitted with:- filling pipe B- sticker C bearing the notice “max.
80 km/h”, to be placed in a position visible to the driver (on the instrument panel) after fixing the tyre;❒ compressor D with pressure gauge
and fittings;

Alfawiki.nl

fig. 15

A0E0048m❒ instruction brochure fig. 15, to be
used for prompt and proper use of thequick repair kit and to be then handed to the personnel charged with handling the tyre treated with the tyre repair kit;
❒ a pair of protection gloves located in
the side space of the compressor;❒ adapters for inflating different elements.

Hand the instruction
brochure to the personnel charged with treating
the tyre repaired with the kit.

It should be noticed that:
The sealing fluid of the quick tyre repair kit is effective with external temperatures between –20°C and +50°C.
The sealing fluid has limited life.

WARNINGWARNING

Repairs are not possible in case of damages
on the wheel rim (bad groove
distortion causing air loss). Do
not remove foreign bodies(screws or nails) from thetyre.

The cylinder contains
ethylene glycol. The
cylinder contains latex: it cancause allergic reactions. It isharmful if ingested or inhaled
and irritant for the eyes and incase of contact. In case of contact rinse immediately withwater and take off contaminated clothes. If swallowed,
do not induce vomit, rinse out
the mouth, drink a lot of water and call the doctor immediately. Keep away from children. This product must not be
used by asthmatics. Do not inhale vapours. Call the doctor
immediately in case of allergic reactions. Keep the cylinder in the space provided forthe purpose and far from heat.
The sealing fluid has limited
life.

INDEX

In the event of a puncture caused by foreign
bodies, it is possible torepair tyres showing damages
on the track or shoulder up to
max 4 mm diameter.

Holes and damages on
the tyre side walls cannot be repaired. Do not use thequick tyre repair kit if damaging is due to running with flat
tyre.

WARNINGSAFETYDEVICESWARNINGDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 191

CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

9:43

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES

4-06-2008

TECHNICALCAR
IN AN
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY

181-222 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
191

4-06-2008

9:43

Pagina 192

WARNING

The compressor shallnot be operated formore than 20 minutes. Risk ofoverheating!. Tyres repairedwith the quick tyre repair kit
shall be used temporarily only.

INDEX

IN AN
TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

181-222 Alfa 159 GB

192

A0E0212m

fig. 16

fig. 17

A0E0116m

fig. 18

A0E0214m

INFLATING PROCEDUREWARNING

Replace the cylinder if
sealer has run out. Do
not throw away thecylinder and the sealing fluid.
Have the sealing fluid and thecylinder disposed of in compliance with national and local regulations.

Put on the protection
gloves provided together with quick tyre repair
kit.

Proceed as follows:❒ set the wheel to be repaired withvalve A-fig. 16 in the position
shown in the figure, then pull up
the handbrake, take the quicktyre repair kit and put it on the
ground near the wheel to be repaired;

Alfawiki.nl❒ loosen tyre inflation valve cap, takeout the filler hose A-fig. 17 andscrew the ring nut B-fig. 18 on thetyre valve;

WARNING
A0E0213m❒ make sure the compressor switch Afig. 19 is set to 0 (off), start theengine and fit plug A-fig. 20 into
the outlet/cigar lighter on the front
console and then turn on the compressor by setting switch A-fig. 19
to I (on);❒ Inflate the tyre to the pressure specified in paragraph “Wheels” in section“Technical Specifications”. Check tyrepressure on gauge B-fig. 19 withcompressor off to obtain precise reading;

A0E0217m

fig. 20❒ if after 5 minutes it is still impossible to reach at least 1.5 bar, disengage compressor from valve and current outlet, then move the car forth
for approx. 10 metres in order to distribute the sealing fluid inside the tyreevenly, then repeat the inflation operation;❒ If after this operation it is still impossible after 5 minutes to reach atleast 1.8 bar, do start driving since
the tyre is excessively damaged andthe quick tyre repair kit cannot guarantee suitable sealing, contact Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services;

Apply the sticker in avisible position for thedriver to indicate that the tyrehas been treated with thequick tyre repair kit. Drive
carefully especially when cornering and do not exceed 80
km/h. Avoid heavy braking
and accelerating.

❒ after driving for about 10 minutes
stop and check again the tyre pressure; pull up the handbrake;

INDEX

fig. 19

SAFETYDEVICES❒ after reaching the tyre pressure specified in paragraph “Wheels” in section “Technical Specifications”, startdriving immediately;DASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 193

CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

9:43

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES

4-06-2008

TECHNICALCAR
IN AN
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY

181-222 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
193

INDEXIN ANTECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

181-222 Alfa 159 GB

194

4-06-2008

9:43

Pagina 194

WARNING

If pressure falls below
1.8 bar, stop the carsince the tyre is excessively
damaged and the quick tyrerepair kit Fix & Go automaticcannot guarantee suitablesealing, contact Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services.

A0E0215m

fig. 21WARNING❒ if at least 1.8 bar pressure is read, restore proper pressure (with engine
running and handbrake on) andrestart;❒ drive with the utmost care to thenearest Alfa Romeo Authorized
Service.

You shall absolutely
communicate that thetyre has been repaired with
the quick tyre repair kit. Hand
the instruction brochure to thepersonnel charged with treating the tyre repaired with thekit.

Alfawiki.nl

fig. 22

A0E0216m

CHECKING AND RESTORINGPRESSURE ONLY
The compressor can be also used just for
restoring pressure.
Disconnect the quick connection A-fig.
21 and connect it directly to the tyrevalve fig. 22; in this way the cylinder
is not connected to compressor and thesealing fluid will not flow into the tyre.

CYLINDER REPLACEMENTPROCEDURE
To replace the cylinder proceed as follows:❒ disconnect connection A-fig. 23
and hose B;❒ turn counter-clockwise the cylinder toreplace and raise it;❒ fit the new cylinder and turn it clockwise;❒ refit connection A or connect hose
B into its seat.

TECHNICALCAR
IN AN
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY

A0E0047m

Inform other people
driving the car that thetyre has been repaired using
the quick tyre kit. Hand the
sticker to the personnel thatwill carry out restoring operations.

INDEX

fig. 23WARNINGDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 195

SAFETYDEVICES

9:43

CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

4-06-2008

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES

181-222 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
195

INDEXIN ANTECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

181-222 Alfa 159 GB

196

4-06-2008

9:43

Pagina 196

WHEN NEEDING TO CHANGE A BULBGENERAL INSTRUCTIONS❒ When a light is not working, checkthat the corresponding fuse is intact
before changing a bulb. For the location of fuses, refer to the paragraph“If a fuse blows” in this section;❒ Before changing a bulb check the contacts for oxidation;❒ Burnt bulbs must be replaced by others of the same type and power;

WARNING

Halogen bulbs must be
handled touching only
the metallic part. If the transparent bulb is touched with thefingers, its lighting intensity is
reduced and life of the bulb
may be compromised. Iftouched accidentally, rub the
bulb with a cloth moistenedwith alcohol and allow to dry.

❒ Always check the height of the headlight beam after changing a bulb.
IMPORTANT The headlight inner surface may be lightly misted over: this is
not a fault but a natural fact due to lowtemperature and the level of air humidity. It will disappear as soon the headlights are turned on. The presence ofdrops inside the headlights means water infiltration, therefore contact Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services.

WARNING

Modifications or repairs to the electricalsystem (electronic control
units) carried out incorrectly
and without bearing the features of the system in mind
can cause malfunctions withthe risk of fire.

Alfawiki.nl

WARNING

Halogen bulbs containpressurised gas which,if broken, may cause small
fragments of glass to be projected outwards.

WARNING

Due to high voltage,
the bulb of (Bixenon)
gas-discharge headlights must
only be replaced by experts:
danger of death! Contact Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services.

4-06-2008

9:43

Pagina 197

Bayonet type bulbs: press thebulb, turn counter-clockwise to remove this type of bulb from its
holder.

C

Tubular bulbs: release themfrom their contacts to remove.

Various types of bulbs are fitted to yourcar:
A

Glass bulbs: clipped into position. Pull to remove.

D-E Halogen bulbs: to remove thebulb, release the clip holding thebulb in place.
F

Gas-discharge bulbs(Bixenon).

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESB

INDEX

TYPES OF BULBS fig. 24

A0E0117m

TECHNICALCAR
IN AN
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY

fig. 24

CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

181-222 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
197

INDEXIN ANTECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

181-222 Alfa 159 GB

4-06-2008

Pagina 198

BULBS

FIGURE 24

TYPE

POWER

Main beam headlights

D

H7

55W

Dipped beam headlights

D

H7

55W

Main beams/Dipped beams(versions with Bixenon headlights) (where provided)

F

D1S

55W

Additional main beams (where provided)

D

H1

55W

Front sidelights (1 per headlight)

A

W5WB

5W

Taillights(1 on fixed light unit - 1 on mobile light unit)

B

P21/5W

5W

Front fog lights

E

H7

55W

Front direction indicator

B

PY21W

21W

Side direction indicator

A

W5W

5W

Rear direction indicator

B

P21W

21W

Brake lights

B

P21/5W

21W

Third brake light

A

W2,3W

2,3W

Reversing light

B

P21W

21W

Rear fog lights

B

P21W

21W

Number plate lights

A

W5W

5W

Front ceiling light

2xA+1C

2xW5+10W

5+5+10W

Boot light

C

10W

10W

Rear ceiling light

A

2xW5W

5+5W

Courtesy mirror lights

A

1,5W

1.5W

A

W5W

5W

Alfawiki.nl
A

W5W

5W

Glovebox light
Puddle/door lights

198

9:43

Pagina 199

DASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

IF AN EXTERIOR
LIGHT BURNS OUTFRONT LIGHT UNITS
The front light units contain main beam,sidelights, direction indicator and dippedbeam bulbs.
To change the bulbs, turn cap counterclockwise and then remove it.
The bulbs are arranged inside the light
unit fig. 25/a as follows:
A Main beam headlights

A0E0540m

fig. 25

Main beam headlights(halogen bulbs)
On some versions a special brake servo vacuum unit is fitted which has to be
removed in order to be able to replace
the left main beam headlamp halogen
bulb. The vacuum unit is located next tothe battery drip tray (fig. 25).

B Sidelights/direction indicators
C Dipped beam headlights

WARNING

After replacement, refit the covers correctly
checking that they are properly secured.

WARNINGIt should be remembered that the vacuum
unit operates at high temperatures: avoid touching it withyour hands, danger of scalding!
Any operations not carried out
following the rules could adversely affect the operation of
the brakingAlfawiki.nl
system and therefore the safety of the vehicle.

fig. 25/a

A0E0191m

On versions with a brake servo vacuum
unit, the description is given purely as
an example; this operation must be carried out by Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:❒ remove cover A-fig. 25/a by turning it counter-clockwise;❒ disconnect the electric connector Afig. 26;❒ release the bulb holder catch B;

CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESFor the type of bulb and power rating,see “When needing to change a bulb”.

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES

9:43

TECHNICALCAR
IN AN
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY

4-06-2008

INDEX

181-222 Alfa 159 GB

199

4-06-2008

9:43

Pagina 200

INDEX

IN AN
TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

181-222 Alfa 159 GB

200

fig. 26

A0E0223m

A0E0193m

fig. 27

fig. 28

A0E0194m❒ remove the bulb and replace it;

Sidelights

Front direction indicators❒ fit the new bulb and refit bulb holder catch B-fig. 26;

To change the bulb, proceed as follows:

To change the bulb, proceed as follows:❒ turn cover B-fig. 25 counter-clockwise;❒ turn cover B-fig. 25 counter-clockwise;❒ press tab A-fig. 27, remove thebulb and replace it;❒ turn the bulb holder A-fig. 28 counterclockwise, remove the bulb and replace it;❒ reconnect the electrical connector A;❒ refit the protective cover properly.

❒ refit the bulb holder, it shall click into place; look at the light from theoutside to check for proper bulb positioning;❒ refit the protective cover properly.

Alfawiki.nl❒ refit the bulb holder, it shall click into
place; look at the light from the outside to check for proper bulb positioning;❒ refit the protective cover properly.

4-06-2008

9:43

Pagina 201

To change the bulb, proceed as follows:❒ turn cover C-fig. 25 counter-clockwise;❒ disconnect the electric connector Afig. 29;❒ release the bulb holder catch B;❒ remove the bulb and replace it;❒ fit the new bulb and refit bulb holder
catch B-fig. 29;

Gas-discharge dipped
beam/main beam headlights(Bixenon) (where provided)

WARNING

Due to high voltage,
the bulb of (Bixenon)
gas-discharge headlights must
only be replaced by experts:
danger of death! Contact Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services.

Alfawiki.nl

A0E0164m

fig. 31

Side direction indicators
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:❒ push the lens by hand in opposite running direction in order to press thecatch A-fig. 30. Release the front
part and remove the unit;❒ turn the bulb holder B-fig. 31 counterclockwise and remove it from lensC.
❒ remove bulb D and replace it;❒ fit the bulb holder B into the lens C
then position the unit, the catch shallclick into place A-fig. 30.

Be careful not to damage the car body or thelens.

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES

Dipped beam headlights(halogen bulbs)

A0E0163m

fig. 30TECHNICALCAR
IN AN
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY

A0E0192m

INDEX

fig. 29

CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

181-222 Alfa 159 GB

201

4-06-2008

9:43

Pagina 202

INDEX

IN AN
TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

181-222 Alfa 159 GB

202

fig. 32

A0E0196m

Front fog lights fig. 32(where provided)
IMPORTANT Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services to have front fog lights
replaced and adjusted.

A0E0165m

fig. 33

REAR LIGHT UNITS
Rear light units contain: reversing light,
rear fog light, direction indicators, taillights, number plate lights, brake lightand third brake light bulbs.

fig. 34

A0E0166m

Reversing light/rear fog
lightsTo replace the bulbs proceed as follows:❒ open the tailgate;❒ turn device A-fig. 33 to open lid
B;❒ lower the lid and remove the bulb
holder unit by pressing the retaining tabs
C-fig. 34;

Alfawiki.nl

4-06-2008

9:43

Pagina 203❒ remove and replace the burnt-out
bulb by pressing it slightly and turning it counterclockwise fig. 35:
D: reversing light bulb on passenger
side (or right side);
D: reversing light bulb on driver side (orleft side)❒ refit the bulb holder unit securing it
properly using the retaining tabs Cfig. 34;

A0E0229m

fig. 36

Taillight bulb on tailgate
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:❒ open the tailgate;❒ turn device A-fig. 33 to open lid
B;❒ lower the lid and remove the bulb
holder unit by pressing the retainingtabs C-fig. 34;

A0E0170m❒ remove and replace the burnt-out
bulb by pressing it slightly and turning it counterclockwise fig. 36:
D: taillight bulb on right/left headlight❒ refit the bulb holder unit securing it
properly using the retaining tabs Cfig. 34;❒ close lid B-fig. 33.

INDEX❒ close lid B-fig. 33.

fig. 37WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES

A0E0167m

TECHNICALCAR
IN AN
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY

fig. 35

CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

181-222 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
203

4-06-2008

9:43

Pagina 204

INDEX

IN AN
TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

181-222 Alfa 159 GB

204

fig. 38

A0E0040m

Direction indicators/
Taillights/Brake lights
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:❒ open the tailgate;❒ loosen screw A-fig. 37 and remove
the protection cover B;❒ remove the bulb holder unit Cfig. 38 by pressing the retainingtabs D.

A0E0041m

fig. 39❒ remove and replace the burnt-out
bulb by pressing it slightly and turning it counter-clockwise fig. 39:

fig. 40

A0E0168m

Number plate light
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:

F direction indicator bulb.

❒ operate with a flat blade screwdriver protected by a soft cloth on device A-fig.
40 to remove the light unit B;❒ refit the bulb holder unit securing it
properly using the retaining tabs Dfig. 38;❒ remove the bulb holder C-fig. 41 byturning it slightly and replace the snapfitted bulb D.

E taillight/brake light bulb;❒ refit the protection cover B-fig. 37
and tighten screw A.

Alfawiki.nl

181-222 Alfa 159 GB

4-06-2008

9:43

Pagina 205

DASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

IF AN INTERIOR
LIGHT BURNS OUTSAFETYDEVICESFor the type of bulb and power rating,see “When needing to change a bulb”.

A0E0183m

fig. 43

A0E0084m

REAR CEILING LIGHTWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES

Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services
to have the third brake light replaced.

fig. 42

Versions without sunroof
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:❒ remove the front ceiling light working in the points shown by the arrows(see fig. 42);❒ turn the 2 bulb holders A-fig. 43
counter-clockwise, remove and replace bulbs.

TECHNICALCAR
IN AN
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY

Additional brake light(third stop)

Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services
to change the bulb.

INDEX

fig. 41

CORRECT USE
OF THE CARFRONT CEILING LIGHT
A0E0169m

Alfawiki.nl
205

4-06-2008

9:43

Pagina 206

INDEX

IN AN
TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

181-222 Alfa 159 GB

206

fig. 44

A0E0098m

Versions with sunroof
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:❒ remove the ceiling light A-fig. 44
working in the points shown by the arrows;

A0E0099m

fig. 45❒ replace the bulb B-fig. 45 releasing it from the side contacts making
sure that the new bulb is correctly
clamped between the contacts.

fig. 46

A0E0118m

COURTESY MIRROR LIGHTS(where provided)
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:❒ open the mirror cover A-fig. 46;❒ remove the bulb B levering in the
points shown by the arrows;

Alfawiki.nl

4-06-2008

9:43

Pagina 207

GLOVEBOX LIGHT
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:❒ open the glovebox;❒ remove the light unit A-fig. 48 levering in the point shown by the arrow;❒ raise protection B-fig. 49 and replace the snap-fitted bulb;

fig. 49

A0E0173m❒ close protection B-fig. 49 on light
unit A-fig. 48;❒ refit the light unit inserting first one
side and then the other one until
hearing the locking click.

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES❒ replace the bulb C-fig. 47 releasing it from the side contacts making
sure that the new bulb is correctly
clamped between the contacts.

A0E0172m

fig. 48TECHNICALCAR
IN AN
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY

A0E0171m

INDEX

fig. 47

CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

181-222 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
207

4-06-2008

9:43

Pagina 208

INDEX

IN AN
TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

181-222 Alfa 159 GB

208

fig. 50

A0E0205m

A0E0204m

fig. 51

BOOT LIGHT

PUDDLE LIGHT

To change the bulb, proceed as follows:

To change the bulb, proceed as follows:❒ open the tailgate;❒ open the door and remove lens Afig. 52 levering in the point shownby the arrow;❒ remove the light unit A-fig. 50 levering in the point shown by the arrow;❒ open the protection cover B-fig. 51
and replace the bulb releasing it fromthe side contacts making sure thatthe new bulb is correctly clamped between the contacts;

fig. 52

A0E0075m

fig. 53

A0E0235m❒ raise protection B-fig. 53 and replace the snap-fitted bulb;❒ close protection B-fig. 53 on light
unit A-fig. 52;❒ refit the light unit inserting first one
side and then the other one until
hearing the locking click.

❒ re-close the protective cover B;❒ refit the light unit inserting first one
side and then the other one until
hearing the locking click.

Alfawiki.nl

WARNING

GENERAL
The fuse is a protective device for theelectric system: it comes into action (i.e.
it cuts off) mainly due to a fault or improper action on the system.
When a device does not work, check theefficiency of its fuse. The conductor element must be intact; if not, replace thefuse with one of the same amp rating(same colour).

A0E0119m

fig. 54

Never replace a broken
fuse with anything other than a new fuse.

A: undamaged fuse

WARNING

B: fuse with damaged filament.
WARNING

Never change a fusewith another with ahigher amp rating, danger offire.

If the fuse blows again,
contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

INDEX

To replace a fuse, use the pliers C
hooked to the fusebox on the dashboard.

If a general fuse
(MEGA-FUSE, MAXIFUSE) cuts in, do not attempt
any repair and contact Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services.
Before changing a fuse, checkthe ignition key has been removed and that all the otherelectric devices have been
turned off/disabled.

SAFETYDEVICESIF A FUSE BLOWSDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 209

CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

9:43

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES

4-06-2008

TECHNICALCAR
IN AN
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY

181-222 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
209

4-06-2008

9:43

Pagina 210

INDEX

IN AN
TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

181-222 Alfa 159 GB

210

fig. 55

A0E0157m

FUSE LOCATION
Fuses are grouped into four fuse boxes
to be found respectively on the dashboard, on the battery positive pole, near
the battery and inside the boot (righthand side).
fig. 56

A0E0124m

Fuse box on the dashboard
To gain access to the fuses in the fusebox on the dashboard, loosen the fastening screw A-fig. 55 and remove
the cover B.

Alfawiki.nl

4-06-2008

9:43

Pagina 211

A0E0126m

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES

Fuse box on the battery
positive pole
To gain access to the fuses in the fusebox on the battery positive pole press
the retainers A-fig. 57 and remove
the protection cover B.
fig. 58

INDEX

A0E0125m

TECHNICALCAR
IN AN
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY

fig. 57

CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

181-222 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
211

4-06-2008

9:43

Pagina 212

INDEX

IN AN
TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

181-222 Alfa 159 GB

212

fig. 59

A0E0128m

Fuse box near the battery
To gain access to the fuses, loosen thetwo fastening screws A-fig. 59 andremove the protection cover B.
fig. 60

A0E0123m

Alfawiki.nl

4-06-2008

9:43

Pagina 213

A0E0129m

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES

Fuse box in the boot(left-hand side)
To gain access to the fuses, open the lidon the left side of the boot as shown by
the arrow A-fig. 61.
fig. 62

INDEX

A0E0224m

TECHNICALCAR
IN AN
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY

fig. 61

CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

181-222 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
213

INDEXIN ANTECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

181-222 Alfa 159 GB

214

4-06-2008

9:43

Pagina 214

FUSE SUMMARY TABLE
LIGTHSFUSE

AMPEREFIGURE

Right main beam headlight

F14

7.5

60

Left main beam headlight

F15

7.5

60

Right dipped beam headlight

F12

15

56

Left dipped beam headlight

F13

15

56

Front fog light

F30

15

60

Reversing light/Brake light

F35

7.5

56

Third brake light

F37

7.5

56

Front/rear ceiling light

F39

10

56

Front ceiling light

F49

7.5

56

Direction indicators

F53

10

56

Hazard lights

F53

10

56

USERS

FUSE

AMPEREFIGURE

F70 (MEGA-FUSE)

150

58

Instrument panel control unit

F71

70

58

Additional heater (passenger compartment water heating 600W)(diesel versions)

F72

50

58

Plug pre-heating control unit (diesel versions)

F73

60

58

F01 (MAXI-FUSE)

60

60

Engine housing control unit services

Instrument panel control unit

Alfawiki.nl

AMPEREFIGURE

Climate control system fan (1.8 versions)

F02 (MAXI-FUSE)

40

60

Climate control system fan (1.9 JTS and 2.2 JTS versions)

F02 (MAXI-FUSE)

5060

Electric steering lockF03 (MAXI-FUSE)

2060

Brake branch point (pump)

F04 (MAXI-FUSE)

4060

Brake branch point (solenoid valve) (ABS version)

F05 (MAXI-FUSE)

4060

Brake branch point (solenoid valve) (VDC version)

F05 (MAXI-FUSE)

2060

Radiator fan (low speed) (1.8, 1.9 JTS, 2.2 JTS versions)

F06 (MAXI-FUSE)

40

60

Radiator fan (high speed)

F07 (MAXI-FUSE)

5060

Additional heater supply (passenger compartment water heating 300W)(diesel versions)

F08

30

60

Headlight washer

F09

20

60

Horns

F10

15

60

Electronic injection system secondary loads

F11

15

60

+ INT for electronic injection system

F16

7.5

60

Electronic injection system primary loads

F17

10

60

Battery positive of engine and automatic gearbox control units

F18

10

60

Climate control system compressor

F19

7.5

60

F20

20

60

Rear window heating

SAFETYDEVICESFUSE

CORRECT USE
OF THE CARUSERSDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 215

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES

9:43

TECHNICALCAR
IN AN
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY

4-06-2008

INDEX

181-222 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
215

INDEXIN ANTECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

181-222 Alfa 159 GB

216

4-06-2008

9:43

Pagina 216

USERS

FUSE

AMPEREFIGURE

Fuel pump supply

F21

20

60

Electronic injection service

F22

20

60

Sound system/radionavigation system power/Blue&Me

F23

15

60

Supply + key for relay coils of engine compartment control unit/
dashboard control unit/Body Computer

F31

7.5

56

Driver’s door branch point/passenger’s door branch point/
ignition device

F32

15

56

Rear left window control/boot node

F33

20

56

Rear right window control/boot node

F34

20

56

Water in diesel fuel filter sensor/flow meter/Brake light switch/
central console control panel/Cruise Control/AQS sensor

F35

7.5

56

Supply of boot node/locks actuators

F36

20

56

Positive under key for stop lights/third stop/instrument/
lights direction

F37

7.5

56

Boot opening

F38

15

56

Supply + battery for air conditioner, ceiling lights, volumetric alarm,
EOBD system diagnostic socket

F39

10

56

Alfawiki.nl

AMPEREFIGURE

Heated rear window

F40

30

56

Defrosting of external mirrors/heated windshield relay coil

F41

7.5

56

Brake branch point power (ABS/VDC) –Steering angle branch point – Yawing sensor

F42

7.5

56

Windshield wiper/washer

F43

30

56

Front cigar lighter on central console

F44

10

56

Supply of socket in the boot

F45

15

56

Sunroof

F46

20

56

Power supply of driver door node

F47

20

56

Power supply of passenger door nodes

F48

30

56

+ Key for wheel node/Sunroof control unit/
Front and rear ceiling lights/Cvs/Blue&Me node/Volumetric/
Left and right seat

F49

7.5

56

Air Bag system

F50

7.5

56

F51

7.5

56

Supply under key for Telematic info node/
Automatic gearbox node/Additional heater/
Left dashboard controls/ START/STOP button,
Parking sensors control unit/Electrochromatic mirror/
Blue&Me node/Car radio prearrangement/AQS/Cruise Control

SAFETYDEVICESFUSE

CORRECT USE
OF THE CARUSERSDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 217

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES

9:43

TECHNICALCAR
IN AN
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY

4-06-2008

INDEX

181-222 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
217

INDEXIN ANTECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

181-222 Alfa 159 GB

218

4-06-2008

9:43

Pagina 218

USERS

FUSE

AMPEREFIGURE

Rear window wiper/Rear lighter

F52

15

56

Instrument panel branch point

F53

10

56

Amplifier Bose audio system

F54

30

62

Front left seat movement control

F56

25

62

Driver’s seat warming left

F57

7.5

62

Front right seat movement control

F60

25

62

Amplifier Bose audio system on rear parcel shelf

F61

15

62

Front passenger’ seat warming right

F67

7.5

62

Free

F58

---

62

Free

F59

---

62

Free

F62

---

62

Free

F63

---

62

Free

F64

---

62

Free

F66

---

62

Free

F68

---

62

Free

F69

---

62

Free

F77

---

62

Free

F78

---

62

Free

F79

---

62

Free

Alfawiki.nl F80

---

62

Charge the battery as follows:

IMPORTANT The description of thebattery charging procedure is described
only for informative purposes. This operation should be carried out by Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services.

❒ connect the charger cables to the battery terminals, observing the poles;❒ turn on the charger;❒ when you have finished, turn the
charger off before disconnecting thebattery;

WARNINGThe liquid in the battery
is poisonous and corrosive. Do not let it touch theskin or eyes. Recharging thebattery should be done in awell ventilated area awayfrom naked flames or possible
sources of sparks: explosion
and fire risk.

❒ reconnect battery negative terminal(–).
WARNING

Do not attempt torecharge a frozen battery. Thaw it first, otherwise
it could explode. If the battery
froze, make sure the internal
elements are not broken andthat the casing is not cracked:
risk of spilling the poisonousand corrosive fluid.

INDEX

Charging should be slow at a low amp
rating for 24 hours. Charging for alonger time may damage the battery.

❒ disconnect battery negative terminal(–);

SAFETYDEVICESIF THE BATTERYIS FLATDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 219

CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

9:43

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES

4-06-2008

TECHNICALCAR
IN AN
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY

181-222 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
219

4-06-2008

9:43

Pagina 220

WITH THE JACKJACKING THE CAR

See instructions given in paragraph“Wheel replacement” in this section

USING AN ARM LIFT OR
WORKSHOP LIFT
Never jack the car from the front side,
the car can only be jacked at the sides,
jack arms or workshop lift shall beplaced as shown in fig. 63. In any
case, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized
Services.

A0E0195m

fig. 63

INDEX

IN AN
TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

181-222 Alfa 159 GB

220

Alfawiki.nl

Pagina 221

DASHBOARDAND
CONTROLSTOWING THE CAR

To prevent damaging the transmission
components, tow the car only in one offollowing ways:

A0E0111m

fig. 64

A0E0176m

TOW RING HOOKING
Front❒ with front wheels raised and rear
wheels resting on a truck provided forthe purpose;❒ with rear wheels raised and front
wheels resting on a truck provided forthe purpose;fig. 66

Proceed as follows:❒ take the tow hook A-fig. 64 fromthe Fix&Go automatic container.
A0E0230m

fig. 65❒ with front and rear wheels on the
flatbed of a wrecker or maintenancevehicle.

❒ remove the snap-fitted plug A-fig. 65
from the front bumper. If using the flat
blade screwdriver B-fig. 64 provided
as standard, protect its tip with a soft
cloth to prevent damaging the car.
❒ tighten the tow hook in its seat.
Rear
The tow hook A-fig. 66 for the rear
bumper is fixed.

CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

PRECAUTIONS FORTOWING THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESThe tow hook provided with the car is
contained into the Fix&Go automatic
container.

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES

9:43

TECHNICALCAR
IN AN
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY

4-06-2008

INDEX

181-222 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
221

INDEXIN ANTECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

181-222 Alfa 159 GB

222

4-06-2008

9:43

Pagina 222

WARNING

Before fitting the hook,clean accurately its
threaded seat. Before starting
to tow, make sure to havetighten the hook.

WARNING

Before starting to tow,
disengage the steering
lock (see paragraph “Ignition device” in section “Dashboard andcontrols”). When towing, remember that without the help of
the brake booster and power
steering, a greater effort is required on the pedal and steering wheel. Do not use flexible cables for towing and avoid jerks.
During towing operations makesure that fastening the joint tothe car does not damage thecomponents in contact with it.
When towing the car, you mustcomply with the specific traffic
regulations regarding the tow
ring and how to tow on the road.

Alfawiki.nl

WARNING

Do not start the engine
when towing the car.

SCHEDULED SERVICING...................................... 224
SERVICE SCHEDULE ........................................... 225
PERIODICAL CHECKS .......................................... 227

SAFETYDEVICESCAR MAINTENANCEDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 223

CHECKING FLUID LEVELS .................................... 228
AIR FILTER/POLLEN FILTER ................................ 236
DIESEL FUEL FILTER .......................................... 236
BATTERY .......................................................... 237
WHEELS AND TYRES.......................................... 241
RUBBER HOSES ................................................ 243
WINDSCREEN WIPER ........................................ 243
BODYWORK ..................................................... 245
INTERIORS ....................................................... 247

CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

USE OF THE CAR UNDER HEAVY CONDITIONS ........ 227

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES

9:44

CAR
TECHNICAL
IN AN
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY

4-06-2008

INDEX

223-248 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
223

Pagina 224

IMPORTANT The Programmed Maintenance coupons are specified by the
Manufacturer. The failure to have them
carried out may invalidate the warranty.

Correct maintenance is essential for ensuring long car life under the best conditions.

Scheduled Servicing is performed by all
Alfa Romeo Authorized Services, at preestablished times.

This is why Alfa Romeo has programmed
a series of checks and maintenance operations every 35,000 km (or 21,000
mi).
IMPORTANT At 2,000 km from thescheduled service, the display will show
a dedicated message.

If during whatever service operation, in
addition to the ones programmed, theneed arises for further replacements or
repairs, these may be carried out onlywith the explicit agreement of the Customer.

INDEX

CAR
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLSSCHEDULEDSERVICING

SAFETYDEVICES

9:44

CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

4-06-2008

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES

223-248 Alfa 159 GB

224

It is however important to remember thatscheduled servicing does not completely
cover all the car’s requirements: also in
the initial period before 35,000 km (or21,000 mi) service coupon and later, between one coupon and another, ordinary
care is still required such as for example
routine check and topping up the level of
fluids, tyre pressure check, etc...

Alfawiki.nl

IMPORTANT You are advised to contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services inthe event of any minor operating faults,
without waiting for the next service
coupon.
If your car is used frequently for towing,
the interval between one service coupon
and the other must be reduced.

Thousands of km

35

70

105

140

175

Check tyre conditions/wear and adjust pressure if required

●

●

●

●

●

Check light system operation (headlights, direction indicators, hazard lights,
boot lights, passenger compartment lights, glovebox lights, warning lights, etc.)

●

●

●

●

●

Check windscreen wiper/washer operation,adjust nozzles if required

●

●

●

●

●

Check windscreen/rear window blade position/wear

●

●

●

●

●

Check front disk brake pad conditions and wear and wear indicator operation

●

●

●

●

●

Check rear disk brake pad conditions and wear

●

●

●

●

●

Sight inspect the conditions of: body external parts, underbody protection,
pipes and hoses (exhaust - fuel - brakes), rubber parts(boots, sleeves, bushes, etc.)

●

●

●

●

●

Check cleanness of locks, bonnet and boot and lever cleanness
and lubrication

●

●

●

●

●

Check and top up, if required, fluid levels (brakes/hydraulic clutch,
power steering, windscreen washer, battery, engine coolant, etc.)

●

●

●

●

●

Check and adjust handbrake lever stroke●●●

Sight inspect accessory drive belt conditions (1.8 version)●

Sight inspect timing belt conditions (1.8 version)

●

●

INDEX

Sight inspect accessory drive belt conditions (except 1.8 version)●

SAFETYDEVICESSERVICE SCHEDULEDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 225

CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

9:44

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES

4-06-2008CAR
TECHNICAL
IN AN
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY

223-248 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
225

INDEXCARTECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

223-248 Alfa 159 GB

226

4-06-2008

9:44

Pagina 226

Thousands of km
Check and adjust tappet clearance (1.9 JTDM 8v version)
Check and adjust tappet clearance, if required (1.8 version)
Check exhaust emissions (petrol versions)
Check exhaust emissions/smoke (diesel versions)
Check engine control system operation (through diagnosis socket)
Replace accessory drive belt/s (except 1.8 version)
Replace accessory drive belt/s (1.8 version)
Replace timing belt (1.8 version) (*)
Replace timing belt (diesel versions) (*)
Change spark plugs (petrol versions except 1.8)
Change spark plugs (1.8 version)
Replace diesel fuel filter (diesel versions)
Change air cleaner cartridge (petrol versions)
Change air cleaner cartridge (diesel versions)
Change front transmission gear oil (3.2 JTS 4x4 versions)
Change engine oil and oil filter (1.8 petrol versions) (or every 12 months)
Changing engine oil and oil filter (petrol versions excluding 1.8 version)(or every 24 months) (***)
Change engine oil and oil filter (diesel versions with DPF) (**)(or every 24 months)
Change engine oil and oil filter (diesel versions without DPF)
(or every 24 months)
Change brake fluid (or every 24 months)
Change pollen filter (or every 24 months)

35

70

105

140

175

●

●

●

●

●
●
●

●
●
●

●
●
●
●

●
●
●
●
●

●
●
●

●
●
●
●

●
●

●
●
●
●

●
●

●

●
●
●
●
●
●

●
●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●
●
●

●
●
●

●
●
●

●
●
●

●
●
●

●

(*) Regardless of the km covered, the timing belt shall be replaced every 4 years for particularly demanding use (cold climates, driving in the city,
idling for a long time) or in any case every 5 years.
(**) Engine oil and oil filter shall actually be changed according to the conditions of use of the car and it is indicated by the relevant warning light or
message (where provided) on the instrument panel.
Alfawiki.nl(***) If the car is mainly used for town driving or in particularly harsh climate conditions and has a low annual mileage, the engine oil and filter should
be changed every 12 months.

❒ engine coolant fluid level;❒ brake fluid level;❒ windscreen washer fluid level;❒ tyre pressure and conditions.
❒ check light system operation (headlights, direction indicators, hazard
lights, etc.);❒ check windscreen wiper/washer operation and windscreen/rear window
blade position/wear;
Every 3,000 km check and top up if required: engine oil level.
You are recommended to use FL Selenia products, designed and produced
specifically for Alfa Romeo cars (seetable “Capacities” in section “Technical specifications”).

Should prevailing use of the car be under one of the following specially heavy
conditions:❒ trailer or caravan towing;❒ dusty roads;❒ short distances (less than 7-8 km)
and repeated with external temperatures below zero;❒ frequently idling engines or long distance low speed driving (e.g.: doorto-door deliveries) or in case of a longterm inactivity;❒ urban routes;
carry out checks more frequently thanrequired on Service Schedule:❒ check front disk brake pad conditions
and wear;❒ check cleanness of bonnet and bootlocks and lever cleanness and lubrication;❒ sight inspect the conditions of: engine, gearbox, transmission, pipes
and hoses (exhaust - fuel - brakes),
rubber parts (boots, sleeves, bushes,etc.);❒ check battery charge and fluid level(electrolyte);❒ visual check on various drive belt conditions;❒ change engine oil and oil filter, if required;❒ check and replace pollen filter, if required;❒ check and replace air cleaner, if required.

SAFETYDEVICES

Every 1,000 km or before long journeys, check and top up if required:

USE OF THE CAR
UNDER HEAVYCONDITIONSCORRECT USE
OF THE CARPERIODICAL CHECKSDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 227

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES

9:44

CAR
TECHNICAL
IN AN
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY

4-06-2008

INDEX

223-248 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
227

INDEXCARTECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

223-248 Alfa 159 GB

228

4-06-2008

9:44

Pagina 228

CHECKING
FLUID LEVELS
For refilling amounts refer to Technical
Specifications section.

When topping up takecare not to confuse thevarious types of fluids:
they are all incompatible with
one another and could seriously damage the car.

fig. 1 - 1.8 version

A0E0374m

WARNING

Never smoke whileworking in the engine
compartment; gas and inflammable vapours may be present, with the risk of fire.

1. Engine oil - 2. Battery
3. Brake fluid - 4. Windscreen washer
fluid - 5. Engine coolant 6. Power steering fluid

fig. 2 - 1.9 Alfawiki.nl
JTS - 2.2 JTS versions

A0E0161m

4-06-2008

9:44

Pagina 229

1. Engine oil - 2. Battery
3. Brake fluid - 4. Windscreen washer
fluid - 5. Engine coolant
6. Power steering fluid

INDEX

1. Engine oil - 2. Battery
3. Brake fluid - 4. Windscreen washer
fluid - 5. Engine coolant
6. Power steering fluid

A0E0038m

CAR
TECHNICAL
IN AN
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY

fig. 3 - 3.2 JTS version

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

223-248 Alfa 159 GB

fig. 4 - 1.9 JTDMAlfawiki.nl
8v - 1.9 JTDM 16v versions

A0E0162m

229

4-06-2008

9:44

Pagina 230

1. Engine oil - 2. Battery
3. Brake fluid - 4. Windscreen washer
fluid - 5. Engine coolant
6. Power steering fluid
fig. 5 - 2.4 JTDM version

INDEX

CAR
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

223-248 Alfa 159 GB

230

Alfawiki.nl

A0E0203m

4-06-2008

9:44

Pagina 231

A0E0069m

fig. 8

fig. 10

A0E0202m

Checking engine oil
Check the oil level a few minutes (about5) after the engine has stopped, withthe car parked on level ground.

fig. 7

A0E0018m

A0E0233m

fig. 9ENGINE OIL
Fig. 6: 1.8 version
Fig. 7: 1.9 JTS - 2.2 JTS versions
Fig. 8: 3.2 JTS version

Fig. 10: 2.4 JTDM version

INDEX

Fig. 9: 1.9 JTDM 8V 1.9 JTDM 16V versions

Remove the dipstick A and clean it, put itback in completely, remove it and checkthat the level is within the MIN andMAX marks on the dipstick. The gap between the MIN and MAX marks corresponds to about one litre of oil.

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES

A0E0400m

CAR
TECHNICAL
IN AN
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY

fig. 6CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

223-248 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
231

4-06-2008

9:44

Pagina 232

Topping up engine oil

Engine oil consumption

If the oil level is near or even below theMIN mark, add oil through the filler
neck B, until reaching the MAX mark.
Oil level shall never exceed the MAX
mark.

Max engine oil consumption is usually
400 grams every 1000 km.

IMPORTANT If a routine check reveals that the oil level is above the
MAX mark, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services to have the correct level restored.
IMPORTANT After adding or changing
the oil, let the engine turn over for a few
seconds and wait a few minutes after
turning it off before you check the level.

When the car is new, the engine needs
to run in, therefore the engine oil consumption can only be considered stabilised after the first 5000 - 6000 km.
IMPORTANT The oil consumption depends on driving style and the conditions
under which the car is used.

INDEX

232

WARNING

When the engine is hot,take care when working inside the engine compartment to avoid burns. Remember that when the engine ishot, the fan may cut in: dangerof injury. Scarves, ties andother loose clothing might bepulled by moving parts.

IMPORTANT Do not add oil withspecifications other than that alreadyin the engine.

Used engine oil and filter contain harmful substances for the environment. Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services to have the oiland filter changed.

CAR
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

223-248 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl

Pagina 233

DASHBOARDAND
CONTROLSWARNING

A0E0017m

ENGINE COOLANT FLUID
fig. 11
If the level is low, pour slowly a mixtureof 50% distilled water and 50%
PARAFLU UP through the filler neckA.
A 50% mixture of distilled water and
PARAFLU UP gives freeze protection
to –35°C.
Unter besonders strengen klimatischen
Bedingungen empfehlen wir eine Mischung aus 60% PARAFLU UP und
40% demineralisiertem Wasser.

fig. 12The cooling system uses
PARAFLU UP that shallbe used for topping up
and that cannot be mixed withother types of fluids. Should
other fluids be added, do notstart the engine and contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services
as soon as possible.

WARNING

The cooling system ispressurised. If necessary, replace the cap only withanother genuine one, otherwise system efficiency could
be compromised.

A0E0029m

WINDSCREEN/HEADLIGHTWASHER FLUID fig. 12
To top up, remove the cap A and thenpour a mixture of water and TUTELAPROFESSIONAL SC 35, in the following concentrations:❒ 30% TUTELA PROFESSIONAL
SC 35 and 70% water in summer;❒ 50% TUTELA PROFESSIONAL
SC 35 and 50% water in winter.
In case of temperatures below –20°C,
use undiluted TUTELA PROFESSIONAL SC 35.

CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

fig. 11

SAFETYDEVICES

Do not remove thereservoir cap when theengine is hot: you risk scalding
yourself.

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES

9:44

CAR
TECHNICAL
IN AN
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY

4-06-2008

INDEX

223-248 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
233

INDEXCARTECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

223-248 Alfa 159 GB

234

4-06-2008

9:44

Pagina 234

WARNING

Do not travel with thewindscreen washer
reservoir empty. The windscreen washer is fundamental
for improving visibility.
fig. 13 1.8 - 1.9 JTS - 2.2 JTS 2.4 JTDM versions

WARNING

Certain commercial additives for windscreen
washers are inflammable. The
engine compartment contains
hot components which may set
it on fire.

A0E0027m

fig. 14 3.2 JTS - 1.9 JTDM 8V 1.9 JTDM 16V versions

A0E0234m

POWER STEERING FLUID
fig. 13-14

If the fluid level in the reservoir is below
the specified level, top up as follows:

Check that the fluid level in the reservoir
is at maximum level: this operation shallbe carried out with the car on level surface, engine not running and cold.

❒ start the engine and wait until the fluid level in the reservoir has stabilized;

Check that the fluid level is at the MAX
mark on the reservoir or at the top mark(maximum level) shown on the dipstickunder the reservoir cap.

Alfawiki.nl❒ with the engine started, turn repeatedly the steering wheel fully rightwards and leftwards;❒ top up until reaching the MAX markthen refit the cap.

IMPORTANT For this operation it ishowever recommended to contact Alfa
Romeo Authorised Services.
From time to time, check the instrument
panel warning light x: pressing on cap
A (with key fitted into the ignition device) the warning light shall turn on.

Do not allow the power steering fluid totouch the hot parts of the engine: it is inflammable.

A0E0016m

fig. 15

BRAKE FLUID fig. 15
Check that the fluid level in the reservoir
is at maximum. Top up with the brakefluid specified in the table “Fluids andlubricants” (see section “Technical Specifications ").
NOTE Clean accurately the tank cap A
and the surrounding surface. Whenopening the cap take the utmost care toprevent impurities entering the tank.
When topping up, always use a funnel
with built-in filter with mesh equal toor lower than 0.12 mm.

IMPORTANT Brake fluid absorbs
moisture. For this reason, if the car ismainly used in areas with a high degreeof atmospheric humidity, the fluid should
be replaced at more frequent intervals
than specified in the Service schedule.

Make sure that the highly corrosive brake fluid
does not drip onto thepaintwork. If it does, wash it off
immediately with water.

INDEX

WARNINGSAFETYDEVICESIMPORTANT For this operation it ishowever recommended to always contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

DASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 235

CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

9:44

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES

4-06-2008CAR
TECHNICAL
IN AN
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY

223-248 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
235

INDEXCARTECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

223-248 Alfa 159 GB

236

4-06-2008

9:44

Pagina 236

WARNING

Brake fluid is poisonousand highly corrosive. In
the event of accidental contact,
wash the parts involved immediately with neutral soap
and water, then rinse thoroughly. Call the doctor immediately if the fluid is swallowed.

AIR FILTER/
POLLEN FILTER
Air cleaner or pollen filter replacement
shall be carried out at Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

DIESEL FUEL FILTERDRAINING THE
CONDENSE

The presence of water inthe fuel circuit can severely damage the injection system and make the engine misfire. If the warning lightc turns on (on certain versions
together with a message on thedisplay) contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services as soon as
possible to have the bleeding
operation carried out. Should
the warning light turn on after
refuelling, water has probably
been poured into the tank: turnthe engine off immediately andcontact Alfa Romeo Authorized
Services.

WARNING

Symbol π on the container indicates synthetic brake fluid, distinguishing it from the mineral kind.
Using mineral fluids irreversibly damages the special
braking system rubber seals.

Alfawiki.nl

Contact at Alfa Romeo Authorized Services to have the battery checked/replaced.
CHECKING THE CHARGE
fig. 16
The battery charge may be checked
through the indicator A (where required) set on the battery cover and acting according to the colour the indicator shows.

A0E0127m

fig. 16

Should the battery be not fitted with battery charge inspection device (opticalelectrolyte indicator), inspection operations shall be carried out by skilled personnel only.
Refer to the table below.

SAFETYDEVICESThe battery is of the “Limited maintenance” type: under normal conditionsof use the electrolyte does not need topping up with distilled water.

IMPORTANT The charge in the battery should be checked at the start ofwinter to limit the risk of electrolyte
freezing. This check should be carriedout more frequently if the car is usedmainly for short trips, or if it is fitted withaccessories that permanently absorb
electricity also with the ignition key removed, especially in the case of aftermarket accessories.

CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

BATTERYDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 237

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES

9:44

Bright white colour

Top up electrolyte

Contact Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services

Dark colour without
green area in the centre

Low charge level

Charge the battery(advisable to contact Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services)

Dark colour withgreen area in the centre

Electrolyte level and charge
sufficient

No actionCAR
TECHNICAL
IN AN
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY

4-06-2008

INDEX

223-248 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
237

INDEXCARTECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

223-248 Alfa 159 GB

238

4-06-2008

9:44

Pagina 238

After connecting/disconnecting the battery,
wait for 3 minutes atleast before fitting the electronic
key into the ignition device inorder to allow the climate control system control unit to reset
the positions of the electric actuators that adjust air temperature and distribution.

REPLACING THE BATTERY
If required, replace the battery with agenuine spare part having the same
specifications.
If a battery with different specifications
is fitted, the service intervals given in
the Service schedule in this section will
no longer be valid.
Refer therefore to the instructions provided by the battery manufacturer.

WARNINGThe liquid in the battery is poisonous andcorrosive. Avoid contact witheyes and skin. Do not bring
naked flames or possible
sources of sparks near to thebattery: risk of fire and explosion.

WARNING

Running the battery
with low fluid level candamage the battery beyond
repair and could also cause its
explosion.

Alfawiki.nl

Incorrect fitting of electrical and electronic accessories can seriously
damage the car. If after buying
the car, you want to install electric accessories which require permanent electric supply (alarm,
free-hand phone kit, etc.) contact
Alfa Romeo Authorized Services
whose qualified personnel, in addition to suggesting the mostsuitable devices, will evaluate theoverall electric absorption, checking whether the car’s electric system is capable of withstanding
the load required, or whether itshould be integrated with a more
powerful battery.

Batteries contain substances that are very
harmful for the environment. You are advised to havethe battery changed at Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services,which is properly equipped for
disposing of used batteries respecting nature and the law.

WARNING

When working on thebattery or near it, always wear the proper goggles.

To avoid draining your battery andlengthen its life, observe the following
indications:❒ when you park the car, ensure thedoors, tailgate and bonnet are closed
properly;❒ the ceiling lights must be off. The caris however provided with an automatic system for switching off internal lights;❒ do not keep accessories (e.g.: soundsystem, hazard lights, etc.) switchedon for a long time when the engine
is not running;❒ before performing any operation on
the electrical system, disconnect thebattery negative terminal cable;❒ battery terminals shall always be perfectly tightened.

IMPORTANT A battery which is kept
at a charge of less than 50% (optical indicator with dark colour without green
area in the middle) for any length of time
will be damaged by sulphation leading toa reduction in cranking power.

SAFETYDEVICESIf the car is left inactive
for long periods at cold,
remove the battery and store
it in a warm place to prevent
freezing.

USEFUL ADVICE FORLENGTHENING THE LIFE
OF YOUR BATTERYCORRECT USE
OF THE CARWARNINGDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 239

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES

9:44

CAR
TECHNICAL
IN AN
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY

4-06-2008

INDEX

223-248 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
239

4-06-2008

9:44

Pagina 240

Moreover, this might lead to a higher
risk of the battery electrolyte freezing(this may even occur at –10°C). If the
car is inactive for a long period of time,refer to “Car inactivity”, in section “Correct use of the car”.

If after buying the car, you want to install electric accessories which require
permanent electric supply (alarm, etc.)
contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services
whose qualified personnel, in addition
to suggesting the most suitable devices
available at Lineaccessori Alfa Romeo,
will evaluate the overall electric absorption, checking whether the car’s
electric system is capable of withstanding the load required, or whether itshould be integrated with a more powerful battery.

In fact, since these devices continue absorbing energy even when the ignition
key is off, they gradually run down thebattery.

INDEX

CAR
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

223-248 Alfa 159 GB

240

The total intake of these systems (factory and after-market) must be less than 0.6 mA x Ah (of the battery) as shown in
the following table:
Battery

Maximum admitted stand-by intake

60 Ah

36 mA

70 Ah

42 mA

90 Ah

Alfawiki.nl

54 mA

As far as possible, avoid sharp braking
and screech starts, etc. Be careful not tohit the kerb, potholes or other obstacles
hard. Driving for long stretches overbumpy roads can damage the tyres.

Check the pressure of each tyre, including the space-saver spare wheel, every
four weeks and before long journeys:pressure should be checked with the tyre
rested and cold.
A0E0120m

fig. 17

Incorrect pressure causes abnormal tyrewear fig. 17:
A normal pressure: tread evenly worn.
B low pressure: tread particularly wornat the edges.
C high pressure: tread particularly wornin the centre.
Tyres must be replaced when the tread
wears down to 1.6 mm. In any case,comply with the laws in the country
where the car is being driven.

Periodically check that the tyres have no
cuts in the side wall, abnormal swellingor irregular tyre wear. If any of these occur, have the car seen to at Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services.
Avoid overloading the car when travelling: this may cause serious damage tothe wheels and tyres; if a tyre is punctured, stop immediately and change it
to avoid damage to the tyre, the rim,suspensions and steering system.

INDEX

For the correct tyre inflation pressure,see “Wheels” in “Technical specifications” section.

SAFETYDEVICESIMPORTANT NOTESWHEELS AND TYRESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 241

CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

9:44

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES

4-06-2008CAR
TECHNICAL
IN AN
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY

223-248 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
2414-06-2008

9:44

Pagina 242

In the case of replacement, always fit
new tyres, avoiding those of dubious origin.
If a tyre is changed, also change the inflation valve; to allow even wear between the front and rear tyres, it is advisable to change them over every 1015 thousand kilometres, keeping themon the same side of the car so as to notreverse the direction of rotation.

WARNING

Remember that roadholding depends also
on the correct tyre inflatingpressure.

WARNING

If the pressure is too
low the tyre overheats
and this can cause it serious
damage.

INDEXCARTECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCY

CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

Tyres age even if they are not used
much. Cracks in the tread rubber are asign of ageing. In any case, if the tyres
have been on the car for over 6 years,
they should be checked by specialised
personnel, to see if they can still be
used. Also remember to check the spacesaver spare wheel.

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESSAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

223-248 Alfa 159 GB

242

Alfawiki.nl

WARNING

Do not cross switch thetyres, moving themfrom the right of the car to theleft and vice versa.

WARNING

Never submit alloyrims to repainting
treatments requiring to use
temperatures
exceeding
150°C since the mechanicalproperties of the wheels could
be impaired.

Indeed ozone, high temperatures andprolonged lack of fluid in the system
may cause hardening and cracking of
the hoses, with possible leaks. Careful
control is therefore necessary.

BLADES
Periodically clean the rubber part using
special products TUTELA PROFESSIONAL SC 35 is recommended.
If the rubber blades are bent or worn
they should be replaced. In any casethey should be changed once a year.
A few simple notions can reduce the possibility of damage to the blades:❒ if the temperature fall below zero,
make sure that ice has not frozen therubber against glass. If necessary,
thaw using an antifreeze product;❒ remove any snow from the glass: inaddition to protecting the blades, thisprevents effort on the motor andoverheating;❒ do not operate the windscreen wipers
on dry glass.

WARNING

Driving with worn
wiper blades is a serious hazard, because visibility
is reduced in bad weather.

SAFETYDEVICESAs far as the brake system and fuel rubber hoses are concerned, carefully follow the Service schedule in this section.

WINDSCREEN/REARSCREEN WIPERS

CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

RUBBER HOSESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 243

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES

9:44

CAR
TECHNICAL
IN AN
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY

4-06-2008

INDEX

223-248 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
243

4-06-2008

9:44

Pagina 244

INDEX

CAR
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

223-248 Alfa 159 GB

244

SPRAY NOZZLESHEADLIGHT WASHERS

If the jet of fluid is missing, firstly checkthat there is fluid in the reservoir: see“Checking fluid levels” in this section).

Regularly check that the spray jets areintact and clean.

Then check that the nozzle holes are notclogged, if necessary use a needle.
fig. 18

A0E0080m

Fluid jets shall be directed at about 1/3
height from the window upper edge.

Changing the windscreen
wiper blades fig. 18

How to remove the blade:– raise the windscreen wiper arm A;– turn the blade B by 90° around pin
C, on the final section of the arm;
– remove the blade from the pin C.

How to refit the new blade:– fit pin C into the hole in the middleof the blade B;– refit the arm with the blade on thewindscreen.

Alfawiki.nl

The headlight washers are automatically switched on when the windscreen
washer is operated and the dippedbeams are on.

The main causes of corrosion are the following:❒ atmospheric pollution;❒ salty air and humidity (coastal areas,or hot humid climates);❒ seasonal environment conditions.
Not to be underestimated is also theabrasive action of wind-borne atmospheric dust and sand and mud and gravel raised by other cars.
On your car, Alfa Romeo implemented
the best manufacturing technologies toeffectively protect the bodywork against
corrosion.

ADVICE FOR PRESERVINGTHE BODYWORK❒ Painting products and systems whichgive the car particular resistance tocorrosion and abrasion;

Paint❒ Use of galvanised (or pretreated)steel sheets, with high resistance tocorrosion;

Paintwork does not only serve an
aestethic purpose, but also protects theunderlying sheet metal.

❒ Spraying of plastic parts, with a protective function, in the more exposed
points: underdoor, inner fender parts,
edges, etc.;

In the case of deep scrapes or scores,
you are advised to have the necessary
touching up carried out immediately to
avoid the formation of rust. Use only
original paint products for touching up(see “Bodywork paint identification
plate” in section “Technical specification”).

❒ Use of “open” boxed sections to prevent condensation and pockets ofmoisture from triggering rust inside;❒ use of special anti-abrasion protective
tapes in the most exposed areas(e.g.: rear mudguard, rear door,etc.).
BODY AND UNDERBODYWARRANTYYour car is covered by warranty against
perforation due to rust of any original element of the structure or body. For thegeneral terms of this warranty, refer tothe Alfa Romeo Warranty booklet.

Normal paint maintenance consists inwashing at intervals depending on theconditions and environment of use. For
example, in highly polluted areas, or if
the roads are sprayed with salt, it is wise
to wash the car more frequently.

SAFETYDEVICESPROTECTION FROMATMOSPHERIC AGENTS

These include:

CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

BODYWORKDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 245

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES

9:44

CAR
TECHNICAL
IN AN
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY

4-06-2008

INDEX

223-248 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
245

INDEXCARTECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

223-248 Alfa 159 GB

246

4-06-2008

9:44

Pagina 246

To wash the car correctly proceed as follows:❒ remove the aerial from the roof toprevent damage to it if the car iswashed in an automatic system;❒ wash the body using a low pressure
jet of water;❒ wipe a sponge with a slightly soapy
solution over the bodywork, frequently rinsing with the sponge;❒ rinse well with water and dry with ajet of air or a chamois leather.
When drying, take particular care withthe less visible parts like door surrounds,
bonnet and around the headlights wherewater may stagnate. The car should not
be taken to a closed area immediately,
but left in the open so that residual water can evaporate.

Detergents cause waterpollution. Therefore the
car should be washedin areas equipped for collecting
and purifying the liquid used in
the washing process.
Exterior plastic parts must be cleaned in
the same way as the rest of the car.
Where possible, do not park under trees;
the resinous substance many species release give the paint a dull appearance
and increase the possibility of triggeringrust processes.
IMPORTANT Bird droppings must be
washed off immediately and thoroughly as the acid they contain is particularly aggressive.

Do not wash the car after it has been left
in the sun or with the bonnet hot: thismay alter the shine of the paintwork.

Windows
Use specific window cleaner products. Use
also clean cloths to avoid scratching theglass or damaging the transparency.
IMPORTANT The inside of therearscreen should be wiped gently witha cloth in the direction of the filaments
to avoid damaging the heating device.
Front headlights
Front headlights shall be washed with
soft cloth moistened with water and car
detergent.
IMPORTANT Cleaning headlight lenses with a dry cloth will damage theheadlights with lack of performance asa consequence. Solvents mat the lenses with lack of performance as a consequence.
IMPORTANT When washing the front
headlights with a water monitor nozzle keep at least 2 cm away from thelenses.

Alfawiki.nl

IMPORTANT The car should be
washed with the engine cold and the key
removed from the ignition device. Afterwashing make sure that the various protections (e.g. rubber caps and various covers) have not been damaged or removed.

Periodically check that water is nottrapped under the mats (due to water
dripping off shoes, umbrellas, etc.)
which could cause oxidisation of the
sheet metal.

LEANING LEATHER SEATS(optional for versions/markets where applicable)
Remove dried on dirt with lightly moistened chamois leather or cloth withoutpressing too hard.

CLEANING SEATS ANDFABRIC AND VELVET PARTS

Remove liquid or grease stains with a dry
absorbent cloth without rubbing. Then
wipe with a soft cloth or chamois leather
with water and neutral soap.

Use a soft brush or vacuum cleaner toremove dust. Velvet is cleaned better if
the brush is moistened.

If the stain persists, use specific products, carefully following the instructions
for use.

Rub the seats with a sponge moistenedwith a solution of water and neutral detergent.

IMPORTANT Never use spirit or alcohol-based products.

SAFETYDEVICESAt the end of the winter the engine compartment should be carefully washed,without directing the jet against electronic
control units. Contact a specialised workshop to have this done.

INTERIORSCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

Engine compartment

DASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 247

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES

9:44

CAR
TECHNICAL
IN AN
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY

4-06-2008

INDEX

223-248 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
247

INDEXCARTECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

223-248 Alfa 159 GB

248

4-06-2008

9:44

Pagina 248

Upholstery of your car
has been designed towithstand wear deriving from common use of the car.
You are however recommended
to avoid strong and/or continuous scratching with clothing
accessories such as metallic
buckles, studs, Velcro fastenings and the like, since these
items cause circumscribed stressof the cover fabric that could
lead to yarn breaking, and damage the cover as a consequence.

WARNING

Never use flammableproducts like oil ether
or rectified petrol for cleaning
car interiors. Electrostatic discharges generated by rubbing
during cleaning operations
could cause fire.

WARNING

INTERIOR PLASTIC PARTS
Clean plastic parts with a cloth moistened with water and non-abrasive neutral detergent. To remove grease or hard
stains, use appropriate products designed to preserve the appearance ofcomponents.

Do not keep aerosolcans in the car: theymight explode. Aerosol cansmust never be exposed to atemperature above 50°C. The
temperature inside the car exposed to the sun may go wellbeyond that figure.

IMPORTANT Never use spirit or petroleum to clean the instrument panel
or other plastic parts.

Alfawiki.nl

STEERING WHEEL/GEAR LEVER KNOB WITH
GENUINE LEATHER
COVERING(optional for versions/markets where applicable)
These components shall only be cleaned
with water and neutral soap. Never use
spirit or alcohol-based products.
Before using special products for cleaning interiors, read carefully label instructions and indications to make surethey are free from spirit and/or alcoholbased substances.
If when cleaning the windscreen withspecial glass products, some drops fallon the leather covering of the steering
wheel/gear lever knob remove them
immediately and then clean with water and neutral soap.
IMPORTANT Take the utmost carewhen engaging the steering lock to prevent scratching the leather covering.

IDENTIFICATION DATA ........................................ 250
ENGINE CODES - BODYWORK VERSIONS............... 252
ENGINE .......................................................... 253

SAFETYDEVICEST E C H N I C A L S P E C I F I C AT I O N SDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 249

BRAKES ........................................................... 256
STEERING ........................................................ 256
SUSPENSIONS.................................................. 256
WHEELS .......................................................... 257
DIMENSIONS.................................................... 261
PERFORMANCE ................................................. 263
WEIGHTS......................................................... 264
CAPACITIES ...................................................... 266
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ................................... 267
FUEL CONSUMPTION ......................................... 269
CO2 EMISSIONS .............................................. 270
RADIO FREQUENCY REMOTE CONTROL:MINISTERIAL CERTIFICATIONS ............................. 271

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES

TRANSMISSION ............................................... 255

CORRECT USE
OF THE CARFUEL FEED/IGNITION ........................................ 255

IN AN
EMERGENCY

9:44

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

4-06-2008

INDEX

249-270 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
249

INDEXTECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

249-270 Alfa 159 GB

250

4-06-2008

9:44

Pagina 250

IDENTIFICATIONDATA
You are advised to note the identification codes. The identification data
stamped and given on the plates andtheir position are the following fig. 1:
A0A0045m

1 - Identification label

fig. 12 - Body label

IDENTIFICATION LABEL

3 - Bodywork paint identification label

This is to be found in the engine compartment, aside the upper right shockabsorber connection and it bears the following identification data:

4 - Engine label.

fig. 2

A0E0013m

C. Space available for maximum
weights authorised by various national
regulations
D.Space for version and any supplementary indications to those specified

A. Space for details of national homologation

E. Space for smoke coefficient (diesel
versions only)

B. Space for punching the consecutive
chassis number

F. Space for punching the Manufacturer’s name.

Alfawiki.nl

4-06-2008

9:44

Pagina 251

ENGINE MARKING

It can be reached by raising coverA-fig. 3 and it includes:❒ type of vehicle (ZAR 939000);❒ Manufacturer’s serial number (chassis number).

This is located in the inner side of the
tailgate fig. 4 and it includes:
A. Paint manufacturer
B. Name of colour
C. Colour code.
D. Colour code for touching up and respraying.

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESThis is located on the passenger compartment floor near the front passenger’s seat.

BODYWORK PAINT
IDENTIFICATION LABELIN AN
EMERGENCY

BODYWORK LABEL

A0A0222m

fig. 4TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

A0A0175m

INDEX

fig. 3

CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESEngine marking is stamped on the gearbox side, on the rear left side.

DASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

249-270 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
251

SAFETY
DEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

249-270 Alfa 159 GB

4-06-2008

9:44

Pagina 252

ENGINE CODES - BODYWORK VERSIONS
Versions

Engine code

Bodywork version

1.8

939A4000

1.9 JTS

939A6000

939AXL1A 21C
939BXL1A 22C ()939AXA1B 00C
939BXA1B 10C ()939AXB1B 03C
939BXB1B 11C ()939AXB1B 03D (**)
939BXB1B 11 () (**)
939AXG1B 44
939BXG1B 45 ()939AXG2B 09B
939BXG2B 16B ()939AXE1B 04C
939AXH1B 06C (*)
939BXE1B 14C ()939BXH1B 17C ()(*)
939AXC1B 01C
939AXC1B 01D (*)
939AXF1B 05C (*)
939BXC1B 12E ()939BXC1B 12F (*)
939BXC1B 12C () (*)
939BXC1B 12D () (*)
939BXF1B 15 () (*)
939BXF1B 15C () (*)
939BXF1B 15E () (*)
939AXM1B 39B
939BXM1B 40B ()939AXM2B 35B
939BXM2B 36B ()INDEXTECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

2.2 JTS

252

939A5000
3.2 JTS 4x2

939A000

3.2 JTS 4x4

939A000

1.9 JTDM 8v

939A1000
939A7000 (*)

1.9 JTDM 16v

939A2000
939A8000 (*)

2.4 JTDM 4x2

939A9000

2.4 JTDM 4x4

939A9000

Alfawiki.nl(*) For specific markets() Sportwagon versions(**) Pack TI

1.9 JTS

2.2 JTS

3.2 JTSEngine code

939A4000

939A6000

939A5000

939A000

Otto

Otto

Otto

Otto

4 in line

4 in line

4 in line

6 in 60° V

4

4

4

4

Cycle
Number and layout of cylinders
Valves per cylinder
Piston bore and stroke

mm80.5 x 88.2

86 x 80

86 X 94.6

85.6 X 89

Total displacement

cm3

1796

1859

2198

3195

Maximum power (EEC)

kW
HP
rpm

103
140
6500

118
160
6500

136
185
6500

191
260
6200

Nm
kgm
rpm

175
17.8
3800

190
19.4
4500

230
23.4
4500

322
32.8
4500

BOSCH
FQR8 LEU2NGKFR5CPNGKFR5CP

BOSCH
HR7MPP152

Unleaded petrol
95 RON(Specification
EN228)

Unleaded petrol
95 RON(Specification
EN228)

Unleaded petrol
95 RON(Specification
EN228)

Unleaded petrol
95 RON(Specification
EN228)

corresponding ratio
Maximum torque (EEC)
corresponding ratio
Spark plugs
Fuel

To change plugs contact Alfa Romeo Authorized
Alfawiki.nlServices.

SAFETYDEVICES

1.8

CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

GENERALWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESENGINEDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 253

IN AN
EMERGENCY

9:44

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

4-06-2008

INDEX

249-270 Alfa 159 GB

253

4-06-2008

9:44

Pagina 254

GENERAL

1.9
JTDM 8v

1.9
1.9
2.4 JTDM
1.9
JTDM 8v (*) JTDM 16v JTDM 16v (*) 200 HP (**)

2.4 JTDM
210 HP

Engine code

939A1000

939A7000

939A2000

939A8000

939A3000

939A9000

Cycle

DieselDieselDieselDieselDieselDieselNumber and layout of cylinders

4 in line

4 in line

4 in line

4 in line

5 in line

5 in line

2

2

4

4

4

4

mm

82 x 90.4

82 x 90,482 x 90.4

82 x 90,4

82 X 90.4

82 x 90.4

Total displacement

cm3

1910

1910

1910

1910

2387

2387

Maximum power (EEC)

kW
HP
rpm

88
120
4000

85
115
4000

110
150
4000

100
136
4000

147
200
4000

154
210
4000

Maximum torque (EEC)

Nm
kgm
rpm

280
28.6
2000

275
28
2000

320
32.6
2000

305
31
2000

400
40.8
2000

400
40.8
1500

–

–

–

–

–

–

INDEX

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

Piston bore and stroke

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES

Valves per cylinder

IN AN
EMERGENCY

CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

249-270 Alfa 159 GB

corresponding ratio

corresponding ratio
Spark plugs
Fuel(*) For specific markets(**) QTronic gearbox versions

254

Diesel fuelDiesel fuelDiesel fuelfor motor
for motor
for motor
vehiclesvehiclesvehicles(Specification (Specification (Specification
EN590)
EN590)
EN590)

Alfawiki.nl

Diesel fuelfor motor
vehicles(Specification
EN590)

Diesel fuelDiesel fuelfor motor
for motor
vehiclesvehicles(Specification (Specification
EN590)
EN590)

1.9 JTS - 2.2 JTS
3.2 JTS

1.9 JTDM 8V
1.9 JTDM 16v - 2.4 JTDM

Multipoint fuel injection

Direct injection

Direct injection, Common RailWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES

Modifications or repairs to the fuel feed system that are not carried out properly or do nottake the system’s technical specifications into account can cause malfunctions leading to
the risk of fire.

TRANSMISSION
1.8

1.9 JTS - 2.2 JTS- 3.2 JTS 4x2
1.9 JTDM 8V - 1.9 JTDM 16v
2.4 JTDM 200 HP
2.4 JTDM 210 HP

2.4 JTDM 210 HP 4x4
3.2 JTS 4x4

GearboxFive forward gears + reverseand synchronisers for speeds

Six forward gears + reverseand synchronisers for speeds

Six forward gears + reverseand synchronisers for speeds

ClutchDry single disk
with hydraulic control

Dry single disk
with hydraulic control

Dry single disk
with hydraulic control

Drive

Front

Front

Four-wheel drive

IMPORTANT In the event of difficult disengagement, due to significant difference of grip between front and rear axle, do
not insist with heavy accelerations: it is actually more effective an attempt of disengagement at medium slow engine rpm,with pauses of a few seconds if several attempts are necessary.
Alfawiki.nl

IN AN
EMERGENCY

Fuel feed

1.8

SAFETYDEVICESFUEL FEED/IGNITIONDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 255

CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

9:44

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

4-06-2008

INDEX

249-270 Alfa 159 GB

255

INDEXTECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

249-270 Alfa 159 GB

256

4-06-2008

9:44

Pagina 256

BRAKES
1.8 - 1.9 JTS - 2.2 JTS 1.9 JTDM 8v - 1.9 JTDM 16v

3.2 JTS - 2.4 JTDM

Disc, self-ventilating
Disc

Disc, self-ventilating
Disc, self-ventilating

Service brakes:– front– rearParking brakeControlled by hand lever, it works on rear brakes

IMPORTANT Water, ice and antifreeze salt on roads may deposit on the brake discs thus reducing braking efficiency at first braking.

STEERING
1.8 - 1.9 JTS - 2.2 JTS - 3.2 JTS - 1.9 JTDM 8V - 1.9 JTDM 16v - 2.4 JTDM
Type

Rack and pinion with hydraulic power steering

Turning radius(between pavements)

11.1

SUSPENSIONS
1.8 - 1.9 JTS - 2.2 JTS - 3.2 JTS - 1.9 JTDM 8V - 1.9 JTDM 16v - 2.4 JTDM
Front
Rear

High quadrilateral system

Alfawiki.nl

Multi-link system

Pagina 257

Pressed steel or alloy rims. Tubeless tyres
with radial carcass. The homologatedtyres are listed in the Log book.

IMPORTANT Do not use inner tubes
with Tubeless tyres.

IMPORTANT In the event of discrepancies between the information provided on this “Owner’s Manual” and the“Log book”, consider the specifications
shown in the log book only.

SPACE-SAVER SPARE WHEEL
Pressed steel rim. Tubeless tyre.

DASHBOARDAND
CONTROLSSAFETYDEVICESRIMS AND TYRES

Attaining to the prescribed size, to ensure safety of the car in movement, it
must be fitted with tyres of the same
make and type on all wheels.

A0E0186m

fig. 5UNDERSTANDING
TYRE MARKING fig. 5

On cars fitted with four-wheel drive, allfour tyres should be the same (brandand track) to prevent damaging the 4WD system. The efficiency of the 4-WD
system however, is not jeopardized iftyres with different wear conditions are
fitted.

Example: 205/55 R 16 91 V
205= Nominal width (S, distance between sidewalls in mm).
55 = Percentage height/width ratio(H/S).
R= Radial tyre.

16 = Rim diameter in inches. (Ø).
91 = Load rating (capacity).
= Maximum speed index.

INDEX

V

CORRECT USE
OF THE CARWHEELSWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES

9:44

IN AN
EMERGENCY

4-06-2008

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

249-270 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
257

INDEXTECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

249-270 Alfa 159 GB

258

4-06-2008

9:44

Pagina 258

Load rating (capacity)

Maximum speed rating

60 = 250 kg
61 = 257 kg
62 = 265 kg
63 = 272 kg
64 = 280 kg
65 = 290 kg
66 = 300 kg
67 = 307 kg
68 = 315 kg
69 = 325 kg
70 = 335 kg
71 = 345 kg
72 = 355 kg
73 = 365 kg
74 = 375 kg
75 = 387 kg
76 = 400 kg
77 = 412 kg
78 = 425 kg
79 = 437 kg
80 = 450 kg
81 = 462 kg
82 = 475 kg
83 = 487 kg

Q = up to 160 km/h.
R = up to 170 km/h.
S = up to 180 km/h.
T = up to 190 km/h.
U = up to 200 km/h.
H = up to 210 km/h.
V = up to 240 km/h.
W = up to 270 km/h.
Y = up to 300 km/h.

84 = 500 kg
85 = 515 kg
86 = 530 kg
87 = 545 kg
88 = 560 kg
89 = 580 kg
90 = 600 kg
91 = 615 kg
92 = 630 kg
93 = 650 kg
94 = 670 kg
95 = 690 kg
96 = 710 kg
97 = 730 kg
98 = 750 kg
99 = 775 kg
100 = 800 kg
101 = 825 kg
102 = 850 kg
103 = 875 kg
104 = 900 kg
105 = 925 kg
106 = 950 kg

Maximum speed rating
for snow tyres
Q M + S = up to 160 km/h.
T M + S = up to 190 km/h.
H M + S = up to 210 km/h.

Alfawiki.nl

UNDERSTANDING RIM
MARKING
Example: 7 J x 16 H2 ET 43
7= rim width in inches 1.

J= rim drop center outline (sideprojection where the tyre beadrests) 2.

16 = rim nominal diameter in inches (corresponds to diameter of
the tyre to be mounted) (3 =Ø).
H2 = “hump” shape and number (relief on the circumference holding the Tubeless tyre bead on
the rim).
43 = wheel camber angle (distance
between the disc/rim supporting plane and the wheel rim
centre line).

applicable

Optionals

Space-saver
spare wheel(for versions/markets whereapplicable)

1.9 JTDM
8v

1.9 JTDM
16v

2.4 JTDM
200 HP

TI
Versions
8Jx19" alloy

tyre
rim

7Jx16” steel

7Jx16” steel

7,5Jx17” (*) alloy

7Jx16” steel

7Jx16” steel

7,5Jx17” (*) alloy

205/55 R16 91V

215/55 R16 93V

225/50 R17 98W

215/55 R16 93V

215/55 R16 93V

225/50 R17 98W 235/40 ZR19 96Y (▼)

tyre
rim

7Jx16” steel
215/55 R16 93V

tyre
rim

7Jx16” alloy
215/55 R16 93V

7Jx16” alloy
215/55 R16 93V

7Jx16” alloy
215/55 R16 93V

tyre
rim

7,5Jx17” (*) alloy 7,5Jx17” (*) alloy
225/50 R17 98W 225/50 R17 98W

tyre
rim

8Jx18” alloy
235/45 R18 98W

tyre
rim

7Jx16” alloy
215/55 R16 93V

8Jx18” alloy
235/45 R18 98W

7,5Jx17” (*) alloy 7,5Jx17” (*) alloy
225/50 R17 98W 225/50 R17 98W
8Jx18” alloy
235/45 R18 98W

8Jx18” alloy
235/45 R18 98W

8Jx18” alloy
8Jx18” alloy
235/45 R18 98W 235/45 R18 98W

4,00B x17"
T125/80 R17(*) Tyres that cannot be fitted with traditional snow chains. Only “spider” type chains can be used.
IMPORTANT Snow tyres with speed index H or superior are recommended.
(▼) Unchainable tyres. Size certified and admitted only for PIRELLI 235/40 ZR19 96Y. When using winter tyres, use 225/50
R17 98 tyres or 235/45 R18 98. Vehicles with TI fittings should not use 16” wheel rims.

Also for 3.2 JTS and 2.4 JTDM 210 HP 4x4 version, snow chains shall be fitted on the FRONT
axle of the car.
Traditional snow chains may not be usedon tyres type 225/50 R17” only spider type chains
Alfawiki.nl
can be used. Tyres 235/45 R18” cannot be fitted with snow chains due to interference with thefender.

DASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

3.2 JTS
2,4 JTDM
210 HP 4x4

SAFETYDEVICES2.2 JTS

CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

For versions/markets where

1.8
1.9 JTSWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES

Standard
tyres

Pagina 259

IN AN
EMERGENCY

TYRES

9:44

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

4-06-2008

INDEX

249-270 Alfa 159 GB

259

INDEXTECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

249-270 Alfa 159 GB

260

4-06-2008

9:44

Pagina 260

COLD TYRE INFLATION PRESSURE
Tyres

Tyres

Tyres

Tyres

Tyres

205/55 R16 91V 215/55 R16 93V 225/50 R17 98W 235/45 R18 98W 235/40 ZR19 96Y (▼)

front

rear

front

rear

front

rear

front

rear

front

rear

average load bar

2.3

2.3

2.3

2.3

2.5

2.5

2.7

2.5

2.7

2.5

full load

2.6

2.6

2.5

2.5

2.9

2.7

2.9

2.7

3.0

2.8

bar

Space-saver
spare wheel
T125/80 R17
4.2(▼) Unchainable tyres. Size certified and admitted only for PIRELLI 235/40 ZR19 96Y. When using winter tyres, use 225/50 ZR17 96 tyres or
235/45 R18 98. Vehicles with TI fittings should not use 16” wheel rims.
Add +0.3 bar to the prescribed inflation pressure when the tyres are warm. Recheck pressure value with cold tyres.
With snow tyres, add +0.2 bar to the inflation pressure value prescribed for standard tyres.

Inflate tyres to full load pressures if driving at continuous speed exceeding 160 km/h.

WHEEL ANGLES– camberFront
wheels– caster– half toe-in(per wheel)– camberRear
wheels– half toe-in(per wheel)

All types–35’ ± 18’
max. difference
right/left: 24’
4° 15’ ± 18’
max. difference
right/left: 18’–8’ ± 4’max. difference
right/left: 4’–40’ ± 18’
max. difference
right/left: 24’
13’ ± 7’
(total toe-in: 26’ ± 7’)

TI Versions
4x2 Versions

4x4 Versions–1° 1’± 18’
max. difference
right/left: 24’
4° 15’± 18’
max. difference
right/left: 18’–7’± 4’max. difference
right/left: 4’–1° 3’± 18’
max. difference
right/left: 24’
11’± 7’(total toe-in: 22’± 7’)–38’±18’
max. difference
right/left: 24’
4° 15’ ± 18’
max. difference
right/left: 18’–7’ ± 4’max. difference
right/left: 4’–1° 3’ ± 18’
max. difference
right/left: 24’
11’ ± 7’
(total toe-in: 22’ ± 7’)

VEHICLE GEOMETRY The TI fittings present lower suspensions around of 20 mm with respects to the other versions.

Alfawiki.nl
Warning: lowered trim car, pay attention
when driving on ramps, humps or on particularlyrough routes.

4-06-2008

9:44

Pagina 261

DASHBOARDAND
CONTROLSDIMENSIONSSAFETYDEVICES

Dimensions are
expressed in mm andrefer to the carfitted with standard tyres.

CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

Min. size variations
when optional tyres are
fitted.

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES

The height refers to
the car unladen.

BOOT VOLUMEIN AN
EMERGENCY

Boot volume .............. 405 dm3

A0E0044m

fig. 6

1.8 - 1.9 JTS - 2.2 JTS 3.2 JTS - 1.9 JTDM 8v 1.9 JTDM 16v - 2.4 JTDM

A

B

C

D

4660

1000

2700

960

E

F

1422
1578
1417 (■) 1593 (■)

G

H

1828

1555
1573 (■)

INDEX

Versions

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

249-270 Alfa 159 GB(■) With tyres 215/55 R16”

Alfawiki.nl
261

INDEXTECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

249-270 Alfa 159 GB

4-06-2008

9:44

Pagina 262

Dimensions are
expressed in mm andrefer to the carfitted with standard tyres.
Min. size variations
when optional tyres are
fitted.
The height refers to
the car unladen.

BOOT VOLUME
Boot volume .............. 445 dm3

A0E0307m

fig. 7

Versions
1.8 - 1.9 JTS - 2.2 JTS 3.2 JTS - 1.9 JTDM 8v 1.9 JTDM 16v - 2.4 JTDM(■) With tyres 215/55 R16”

A

B

C

D

E (*)

F

G

H

4660

1000

2700

960

1422
1417 (■)

1578
1593 (■)

1828

1555
1573 (■)

Alfawiki.nl(*) With roof racks/ski racks (where provided): 1452/1447 (with 215/55 R16" tyres)

262

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h
sec.

Kilometer with standing start
sec.

1.8

208

10.2

31.1

1.9 JTS

214

9.5

30.5

2.2 JTS

224

8.7

29.4

3.2 JTS 4x2

250

7.1

27.0

3.2 JTS 4x4

244

7.0

27.3

1.9 JTDM 8v

193

10.7

32.6

1.9 JTDM 16v

212

9.2

30.6

2.4 JTDM 4x2

231

8.1

28.7

2.4 JTDM 4x4

227

8.3

29.0

Top speedkm/h

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h
sec.

Kilometer with standing start
sec.

1.8

206

10.4

31.3

1.9 JTS

212

9.7

30.9

2.2 JTS

222

8.9

29.8

3.2 JTS 4x2

248

7.2

27.4

3.2 JTS 4x4

242

7.2

27.7

1.9 JTDM 8v

192

10.9

32.9

1.9 JTDM 16v

210

9.4

30.9

2.4 JTDM 4x2

229

8.3

29.0

2.4 JTDM 4x4

225

8.5

29.3

SPORTWAGON VERSIONS

Alfawiki.nl

SAFETYDEVICESTop speed
km/h

CORRECT USE
OF THE CARSALOON VERSIONSWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESPERFORMANCEDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 263

IN AN
EMERGENCY

9:44

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

4-06-2008

INDEX

249-270 Alfa 159 GB

263

4-06-2008

9:44

Pagina 264

1.9 JTS

2.2 JTS

3.2 JTS
4x2

3.2 JTS
4x4

Weight empty(including fluids, 90%
fuel in the tank andno optional)

1385

1435

1445

1540

1610

1480

1490

1585

1645

Maximum
admitted load (*)– front axle
– rear axle
– total

1100
1050
1935

1100
1050
1985

1100
1050
1995

1220
1050
2090

1220
1050
2160

1150
1050
2030

1150
1050
2040

1220
1050
2135

1220
1050
2195

Payload including
driver (**)

550

550

550

550

550

550

550

550

550

Towable loads

1400

1500

1500

1700

1700

1500

1500

1500

1500

Max. load on ball

75

75

75

75

75

75

75

75

75

Maximum loadon roof

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

INDEX

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICES

1.8

IN AN
EMERGENCYWEIGHTSTECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCEDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

249-270 Alfa 159 GB

264

Weights (kg)Saloon versions

1.9
1.9
2.4 JTDM 2.4 JTDM
JTDM 8v JTDM 16v
4x2
4x4

(*)

Loads not to be exceeded. The driver is responsible for arranging the loads in the boot an/or on the roof sothat they comply with these limits.

(**)

If special equipment is fitted (sunroof, tow hitch etc.) the unladen weight increases, thus reducing the payload as specified in
the maximum weight allowed.

Alfawiki.nl

Pagina 265

1.8

1.9 JTS

2.2 JTS

3.2 JTS
4x2

3.2 JTS
4x4

Weight empty(including fluids, 90%
fuel in the tank andno optional)

1435

1485

1495

1590

1660

1530

1540

1635

1695

Maximum
admitted load (*)– front axle
– rear axle
– total

1100
1050
1985

1100
1050
2035

1100
1050
2045

1220
1050
2140

1220
1100
2210

1150
1050
2080

1150
1050
2090

1220
1050
2185

1220
1100
2245

Payload including
driver (**)

550

550

550

550

550

550

550

550

550

Towable loads

1400

1500

1500

1800

1800

1500

1500

1500

1500

Max. load on ball

75

75

75

75

75

75

75

75

75

Maximum loadon roof (***)

80

80

80

80

80

80

80

80

80

(*)

Loads not to be exceeded. The driver is responsible for arranging the loads in the boot an/or on the roof sothat they comply with these limits.

(**)

If special equipment is fitted (sunroof, tow hitch etc.) the unladen weight increases, thus reducing the payload as specified in
the maximum weight allowed.

(***) Lineaccessori Alfa Romeo roof rack, max capacity: 50 kg.

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICES1.9
1.9
2.4 JTDM 2.4 JTDM
JTDM 8v JTDM 16v
4x2
4x4

IN AN
EMERGENCY

Weights (kg)Sportwagon versions

DASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

9:44

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

4-06-2008

INDEX

249-270 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
265

4-06-2008

9:44

Pagina 266

CAPACITIES
1.9 JTS

2.2 JTS

3.2 JTS 1.9 JTDM 1.9 JTDM 2.4 JTDM
2,.4 JTDM
8v
16v
210 HP
4x4

Specified fuels andoriginal lubricants

litres

70 ●

70 ●

70 ●

70 ●

70 ❍

70 ❍

70 ❍

litres

10 ●

10 ●

10 ●

10 ●

10 ❍

10 ❍

10 ❍

Engine cooling systemlitres

8.0

8.15

8.15

10.3

7.5

7.5

7.35

Mixture of 50%
water and
PARAFLU UP (▲)

Lubrication systemenginelitres

4.5 ■

5.4 ■

5.4 ■

5.4 ■

4.6 ❑

4.6 ❑

6.4 ❑

■ SELENIA StAR
❑ SELENIA WR

Mechanical gearbox/
differential

litres

1.6

2.3

2.3

2.8 (Õ)

2.3

2.3

2.8

TUTELA CAR MATRYX(Õ) TUTELAMULTIAXLE

Windscreen/headlightwasher fluid reservoir:

litres

6.0

6.0

6.0

6.0

6.0

6.0

6.0

Mixture of water and liquid
TUTELA
PROFESSIONAL SC 35INDEXTECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCY

Fuel tank:– including
a reserve of

CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

1.8

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESSAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

249-270 Alfa 159 GB

266● Unleaded petrol
with no less than 95 R.O.N.
(EN228 Specification)❍ Diesel fuel for motor
vehicles (EN590 Specification)(▲) For particularly hard climate conditions, we recommend use of a 60% PARAFLU UP and 40% demineralized water mixture.

Alfawiki.nl

4-06-2008

9:44

Pagina 267

DASHBOARDAND
CONTROLSFLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
RECOMMENDED PRODUCTS AND THEIR SPECIFICATIONS
Fluid and lubricant specifications
for correct car operation

Original fluids
and lubricants

ChangeAccording to Service
Schedule

Lubricants fordiesel engines

Synthetic-based oil, grade SAE 5W-40,
FIAT 9.55535-N2 qualification.

SELENIA WR
Contractual Technical
Reference N° F515.D06

According to Service
Schedule

For diesel engines, in emergency cases where genuine products are not available, lubricants with min. performance ACEA C2 are accepted. If this is thecase, the best engine performance is not guaranteed. We however recommend replacing the lubricant with those recommended by Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services.
Use of products with low-quality properties than ACEA A3 and ACEA B4 could cause damages to the engine that are not covered by the warranty.
For very cold climate conditions, ask to contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services for the appropriate Selenia product to use.

IN AN
EMERGENCY

SELENIA StAR
Contractual Technical
Reference N° F216.D05

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

Synthetic-based oil, grade SAE 5W-40,
FIAT 9.55535-H2 qualification.

INDEX

Lubricants for
petrol engines

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

Use

SAFETYDEVICES

249-270 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
267

4-06-2008

Use

Lubricants andgreases
for transmission

INDEX

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

249-270 Alfa 159 GB

268

Brake fluid
Protective agent
for radiators

9:44

Pagina 268

Fluid and lubricant specifications
for correct car operation

Original fluids
and lubricantsApplications

Synthetic-based oil, grade SAE 75W-85
that passes API GL 4 specifications.
Qualification FIAT 9.55550-MZ1

TUTELA CAR
MATRYX

Mechanical gearbox
and differential

Synthetic-based oil, grade SAE 75W-90 that passes
API GL-5 specifications, ZF-TE ML 18.
Qualification FIAT 9.55550-DA3

TUTELA
MULTIAXLE

Rear differential andtransmission unit
(3.2 JTS 4X4 and 2.4
JTDM 4x4 version)
Power steering

Lubricant for automatic transmissions that passes"ATF DEXRON III" specification.
Qualification FIAT 9.55550-AG2.
Grease containing Molybdenum bisulphide for high temperatureappliances. NLGI 1-2 consistency.
Qualification FIAT 9.55580.
Grease for homokinetic joints with low friction coefficient.
NLGI 0-1 consistency.
Qualification FIAT 9.55580.
Synthetic fluid for Brake and clutch controls FMVSS n° 116
DOT 4, ISO 4925, SAE J1704, CUNA NC 956-01
Qualification FIAT 9.55597.
Protective with antifreeze action, red colour based on inhibitedmonoethylen glycol and organic formula, that passes
CUNA NC 956-16, ASTM D 3306 specifications.
Qualification FIAT 9.555523.

Additive fordiesel fluid

Additive for diesel fuel, protecting Diesel engines.

Windscreen/
headlight washer
fluid

Mixture of alcohol and surfactants CUNA NC 956-11.
Qualification FIAT 9.55522.

Contractual Technical
Reference N° F108.F02
Contractual Technical
Reference N° F426.E06
TUTELA GI/E

Contractual Technical
Reference N° F001.C94
TUTELA ALL STAR

CV joints
on wheel side

TUTELA STAR 700

CV joints
on differential side

TUTELA TOP 4

Brake and clutch
hydraulic controls

PARAFLU UP (●)

Radiator antifreeze

TUTELA DIESEL ART

50% PARAFLU UP (❏)
To be mixed with fuel oil(25 cc per 10 litres)Contractual Technical
Reference N° F702.G07
Contractual Technical
Reference N° F701.C07
Contractual Technical
Reference N° F001.A93

proportion:
Contractual Technical
Reference N° F101.M01 50% water andContractual Technical
Reference N° F601.L06

To be used diluted
TUTELA
PROFESSIONAL SC 35 or undiluted

Contractual Technical
Reference N° F201.D02

Alfawiki.nl(●) IMPORTANT Do not top up or mix with fluids having different
specifications from those described here.
(❏) For particularly hard climate conditions, we recommend use of a 60% PARAFLU UP and 40% demineralized water mixture.

Fuel consumption according to
1999/100/EC Directive (litres x 100 km)

Urban

Extra-urban

Combined

1.8

10.3 ()10.7 ()12.2 ()12.3 ()12.8 ()13.0 ()16.4 ()16.5 ()16.7 ()17.0 ()7.8 ()7.9 ()7.9 ()8.0 ()9.2 ()9.2 ()9.7 ()9.9 ()6.0 ()6.1 ()6.6 ()6.7 ()7.1 ()7.2 ()7.9 ()7.9 ()8.3 ()8.3 ()4.8 ()4.9 ()4.8 ()4.8 ()5.4 ()5.5 ()5.8 ()5.9 ()7.6 ()7.8 ()8.7 ()8.8 ()9.2 ()9.3 ()11.0 ()11.1 ()11.4 ()11.5 ()5.9 ()6.0 ()5.9 ()6.0 ()6.8 ()6.9 ()7.2 ()7.4 ()1.9 JTS
2.2 JTS
3.2 JTS 4x2
3.2 JTS 4x4
1.9 JTDM 8v
1.9 JTDM 16v
2.4 JTDM 4x2
2.4 JTDM 4x4() Saloon versions() Sportwagon versions

Alfawiki.nl

SAFETYDEVICES– combined consumption: is calculated weighing about 37% of urban
cycle consumption and about 63% of
extraurban consumption.

IMPORTANT The type of route,traffic situations, weather conditions, driving style, general conditions of the car, trim level/
equipment/accessories, load, climate control system, roof rack,other situations that affect air
drag may lead to different fuelconsumption levels than thosemeasured.

CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

The fuel consumption figures given in
the table below are determined on thebasis of the homologation tests set
down by specific European Directives.
The procedures below are followed formeasuring consumption:– urban cycle: cold starting followedby driving that simulates urban use of
the car;– extra-urban cycle: frequent accelerating in all gears, simulating extraurban use of the car; the speed varies
between 0 and 120 km/h;

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESFUEL CONSUMPTIONDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 269

IN AN
EMERGENCY

9:44

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

4-06-2008

INDEX

249-270 Alfa 159 GB

269

4-06-2008

9:44

Pagina 270

CO2 EMISSIONS

CO2 EMISSIONS ACCORDING TO 1999/100/EC DIRECTIVE (g/km)

Saloon versions

INDEX

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESSAFETYDEVICESThe CO2 emission levels given in the following tables refer to combined consumption.

CORRECT USE
OF THE CARDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

249-270 Alfa 159 GB

270

1.8
179

1.9 JTS 2.2 JTS
205

218

3.2 JTS
4X2

3.2 JTS
4X4

1.9 JTDM 8v

1.9 JTDM 16v

260

270

157

157

3.2 JTS
4X2

3.2 JTS
4X4

1.9 JTDM 8v

1.9 JTDM 16v

262

272

159

159

2.4 JTDM
2.4 JTDM
210 HP 4X2
4X4
179

192

Sportwagon versions
1.8
183

1.9 JTS 2.2 JTS
207

220

Alfawiki.nl

2.4 JTDM
2.4 JTDM
210 HP 4X2
4X4
181

194

Pagina 271

RADIO FREQUENCY REMOTE CONTROL: Ministerial Certifications
Certification number
T939
European Union andCountries applying
EC directive

NTR9390523

0523

DASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

9:45

SAFETYDEVICES

4-06-2008

CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

271-292 Alfa 159 GB

Australia–

N15278Brazil
❒❒HHHH-AA-FFFF

HHHH-AA-FFFF

Bulgaria

CMII ID : 2006DJ0351

CMII ID : 2006DJ0352❒ Data unavailable at the time of printing.

INDEX

China

IN AN
EMERGENCY❒TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE❒WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES

Argentina

Alfawiki.nl
271

271-292 Alfa 159 GB

4-06-2008

9:45

Pagina 272

T939

NTR939

Malaysia
AA 000000 E❒

AA 000000 E

MexicoMorocco

AGREE PAR L’ANRT MAROC
Numéro d’agrément : MR 2395 ANRT 2006
Date d’agrément : 13/01/2006

AGREE PAR L’ANRT MAROC
Numéro d’agrément : MR 2394 ANRT 2006
Date d’agrément : 13/01/2006

Singapore

Complies withIDA Standards
DA 104022

Complies withIDA Standards
DA 104022

INDEX

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCY

CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR❒WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESSAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Certification number

272

YYYYXXXX-XXXYYYYXXXX-XXX❒❒South Africa

TA-2005/701
APPROVED

Taiwan❒ Data unavailable at the time of printing.

Alfawiki.nl

TA-2005/702
APPROVEDIN ANEMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

9:45

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

4-06-2008

INDEX

271-292 Alfa 159 GB
Pagina 273

Alfawiki.nl
273

INDEXTECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

271-292 Alfa 159 GB

274

4-06-2008
9:45
Pagina 274

Alfawiki.nl

4-06-2008

9:45

Pagina 275

A L FA 1 5 9 S P O R T WA G O NREARSCREEN WIPER ......................................... 276
BOOT .............................................................. 277
ROOF RACK/SKI RACK ...................................... 284
PRESETTING FOR MOUNTING THE"UNIVERSAL ISOFIX" CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM ... 285
IF AN EXTERIOR LIGHT BURNS OUT ..................... 288
IF AN INTERIOR LIGHT BURNS OUT ..................... 290
IF A FUSE BLOWS ............................................. 292

ALFA 159 SPORTWAGON

271-292 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
275271-292 Alfa 159 GB

4-06-2008

9:45

Pagina 276

REARSCREEN WIPER
OPERATION

ALFA 159 SPORTWAGON

Rear window wiper
activation/deactivation
Turning the unstable ring nut A-fig. 1
to position ' ON/OFF will obtain flick
wipe of the rear window wiper. To turnit off, turn the ring nut back to position' ON/OFF.
The activation of the rear windshieldwiper occurs also with the front windshield wipe on and reverse gear inserted.
Rear window "smart"washing
Turning the unstable ring nut A-fig. 1
to position & will obtain rear window
washing. Keeping the unstable ring nut
at position & it will be possible to activate with just one movement both thewindscreen wiper and the rear window
wiper; the latter comes actually into action automatically when the unstablering nut is kept at position & for overhalf a second.

276

A0E0264m

fig. 1

fig. 2

A0E0267m

The rear window wiper stops working
a few strokes after releasing the ringnut; a further stroke after about 6 seconds completes the wiping operation.

HANGING THE REARSCREEN
WIPER BLADE

Never use the wiper toremove ice or snow fromthe rear window. In these
conditions, the wiper is submitted
to excessive effort that results inmotor protection cutting in andwiper operation inhibition for few
seconds as a consequence. Should
it be not possible to restore its
operation, contact Alfa Romeo
Authorized Service.

❒ position the new arm correctly, fully tighten the nut B and then lower
the cover A.

Alfawiki.nl

Proceed as follows:❒ raise the cover A-fig. 2, slacken
the nut B and remove the arm C;

271-292 Alfa 159 GB

4-06-2008

9:45

Pagina 277

BOOT

fig. 3

A0E0268m

SPRAY NOZZLE
If the jet of fluid is inadequate, firstly
check that there is fluid in the reservoir(see "Checking fluid levels" in section"Car maintenance").
Then check that the nozzle holes Afig. 3 are not clogged, if necessary use
a needle to clean them.

To open the tailgate from the inside if
the battery is flat or the electric tailgate
lock is failing, proceed as follows:❒ tilt the rear seats completely (seeparagraph "Extending the boot" insection "Dashboard and controls");fig. 4

A0E0269m

fig. 5

A0E0263m❒ remove the rear head restraints;❒ take the screwdriver from the tool
container and working inside theboot (on the rear part), fit it into seat
A-fig. 4 and then operate lever Bfig. 5.

ALFA 159 SPORTWAGONTAILGATE EMERGENCYOPENING FROM THE INSIDE

Alfawiki.nl
277

271-292 Alfa 159 GB

4-06-2008

9:45

Pagina 278

EXTENDING THE BOOT
The boot can be partially (1/3 or 2/3)
or totally extended splitting the rear
seat.
Proceed as follows:❒ lower completely the rear seat headrestraints;

ALFA 159 SPORTWAGON❒ check that the seat belt is not twisted;❒ lift seat back lever A-fig. 6 to unlock respectively the left or right section of the backrest and tilt the seatback forward. Lever raising is indicated by a “red band” B.

A0E0085m

fig. 6The boot extension to the right makes
it possible to carry two passengers on
the rear seat left-hand side. The boot extension to the left makes it possible tocarry one passenger on the rear seatright-hand side.

Alfawiki.nl
278

IMPORTANT❒ before performing the operation offolding the backrest over, make surethat the rear head restraints are in
the “rest” position (completely lowered). The head restraints can be removed to improve the load carrying
capacity;❒ before tilting the backrest, ensurethat the rear armrest is not lowered.
Otherwise, insert it in its seat (seesection “Internal equipment” inchapter “Dashboard and controls”).

271-292 Alfa 159 GB

4-06-2008

9:45

Pagina 279

To return the rear seat backto its original position
Raise the seat backrests and push themback until hearing the locking click ofboth retainers.
Position seat belt buckles upwards.

The boot houses 4 hooks (see fig. 8and fig. 9) for anchoring ropes in order to guarantee perfect load anchoring.

Make sure the backrest is properly secured at both sides (red bands not visible) to prevent it moves forward in theevent of sharp braking causing injuries
to passengers.

Hooks shall also be used to secure theluggage retaining net (available as optional, for versions/markets where applicable, at Alfa Romeo Authorised Services).

A0E0270m

fig. 8ANCHORING THE LOAD

A0E0271m

fig. 9WARNINGA heavy load that has
not been secured may
cause serious harm.

WARNING

ALFA 159 SPORTWAGONIMPORTANT When the backrest is
properly secured, the “red band” Bfig. 6 on levers A shall no longer bevisible. The “red band” actually indicatesthat the backrest is not properly secured.
Make sure the head restraints are properly positioned.

If you want to carryreserve fuel in a can,follow law regulations, only
using a certified can, suitably
fastened to the load securing
eyelets. Even in this way therisk of fire is increased in thecase of an accident.

Alfawiki.nl
279

271-292 Alfa 159 GB

ALFA 159 SPORTWAGON

fig. 10

4-06-2008

9:45

Pagina 280

A0E0273m

ODDMENT COMPARTMENTS
fig. 10 - 11
The boot sides are equipped with two oddment compartments closed by a cover.
To open the cover press button A andturn it downwards.

A0E0272m

fig. 11CURRENT OUTLET(optional for versions/markets where applicable)
The current outlet is located on the left
side of the boot.
To use the current outlet, open the lid
A-fig. 12. The current outlet only
works with the key fitted into the ignition device and can only be used to power accessories having max. 15A intake(180 W).

Alfawiki.nl
280

fig. 12

A0E0274m

Never use the outlet foraccessories with powerover the max. specified
one. Long power intake can run
down the battery and inhibit
engine starting.

4-06-2008

fig. 13

9:45

Pagina 281

A0E0281m

LUGGAGE NET(optional for versions/markets where applicable)
The left and right sides of the boot arequipped with a luggage retainer net.
– fig. 13 - version with side lid(where provided)

A0E0282m

fig. 14

fig. 15

A0E0476m

fig. 16

A0E0275m

Using seats B-fig. 17 to secure the net
to the rear side of the boot.
To secure the net, fit hooks A-fig. 18
into seats B and press downwards.
To release the net, take it out upwards
while keeping button C pressed.

– fig. 14 - version without side lid

ALFA 159 SPORTWAGON

271-292 Alfa 159 GB– fig. 15 - fixing elastic.
As optional, for versions/markets whereapplicable, an additional luggage retainer net can be fitted.
Use the seats A-fig. 16 located in thefront part of the boot to hook the net asshown in fig. 19.

Alfawiki.nl
281

271-292 Alfa 159 GB

ALFA 159 SPORTWAGON

fig. 17

9:45

Pagina 282

A0E0308m

A0E0278m

fig. 20

fig. 21

A0E0279m

fig. 22

A0E0280m

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT
COVER
The luggage compartment coverA-fig. 20 can be rolled up and removed.
To roll it up remove the two rear pins
B-fig. 21 from their housings.
fig. 18

fig. 19282

4-06-2008

A0E0276m

A0E0277m

IMPORTANT Hold the cover by handle C-fig. 20 and guide it during rollingup.
IMPORTANT To remove the net roll
it up and check whether also the passenger's compartment separation net(where provided) is rolled up (seenext paragraph), then pull up leverD-fig. 23. Raise the net and take it
out from the boot.

Alfawiki.nl

To refit the net, proceed as follows:❒ fit the net into the proper seat on theleft side (side without lever);❒ keep the lever D-fig. 22 up and fit
the net into the proper seat on theright side;❒ release lever D.

271-292 Alfa 159 GB

4-06-2008

9:45

Pagina 283

Do not put objects on
the cover which may
damage it.

The objects put on the
cover may be thrownforwards and injure passengers should you brake sharply
or in the event of an accident.
Your are recommended to use
the passenger's compartment
separation net.

A0E0283m

fig. 23

fig. 24

A0E0287m

fig. 25

A0E0288m

PASSENGER'SCOMPARTMENT UPPERSEPARATION NET(where provided)
In addition to the luggage compartment
cover, certain versions are also fittedwith a passenger's compartment upper
separation net fig. 23.
The net for separating the passenger's
compartment from the boot is contained
into a special bar.

ALFA 159 SPORTWAGONWARNINGTo extend it, take it out of the reel bytaking tongue A-fig. 24 and secureends B-fig. 25 into the two housings
C-fig. 26 (one per side) located on
the roof of the car.

Alfawiki.nl
283

271-292 Alfa 159 GB

ALFA 159 SPORTWAGON

fig. 26

4-06-2008

9:45

Pagina 284

A0E0284m

To roll up the net, release ends Bfig. 25 from housings C-fig. 26 andguide it during rolling.

A0E0291m

fig. 27

A0E0305m

Passenger's compartment
separating net
removal/refitting

SOUND SYSTEM

To remove the net press button Dfig. 27 as shown in the figure, movethe separating net releasing it from its
seat, on both left and right side. makethe net slide as shown in the figure, removing the pins from their seats.

O certain versions, behind the right bootlid, is fitted a CD Changer for 10 discs(see fig. 28).

To refit the net reverse the removal operations described previously.

Alfawiki.nl
284

fig. 28

CD Changer (where provided)

Amplifier (where provided)
Versions equipped with Bose Hi-Fi system also have an amplifier behind theleft boot lid.

271-292 Alfa 159 GB

4-06-2008

9:45

Pagina 285

ROOF RACK/SKI RACK(optional for versions/markets where applicable)

A0E0285m

FUEL CAP EMERGENCYOPENING

IMPORTANT Never exceed the max.
permissible loads (see section "Technical Specifications").

In the event of a failure, to open thefuel cap proceed as follows:❒ open the fuse box lid A-fig. 29 on
the right side of the boot as shownby the arrow;❒ pull the string B set aside the use
box.

fig. 30

A0E0286m

ALFA 159 SPORTWAGON

fig. 29

The car can be fitted with two longitudinal bars fig. 30 that can be used, byadding special accessories to carry various objects (e.g.: skis, windsurf, etc.)

Alfawiki.nl
285

271-292 Alfa 159 GB

4-06-2008

9:45

Pagina 286

ALFA 159 SPORTWAGONPRESETTING FOR
MOUNTING THE"UNIVERSALISOFIX" CHILDRESTRAINT SYSTEM
This car is preset for mounting the Universal Isofix child restraint system, a
new European standardised system forcarrying children safely. fig. 31 shows
an example of child restraint system.
The Universal Isofix child's seat covers
weight group 1.
Because of the different attachment system, the child seat must be secured by
the specific bottom metal rings
A-fig. 32, located in the squab upholstery, in the position marked byisofix flags (accessible by opening thezips on the covers) to the specific ringA-fig. 33 located behind the rear seatsquab level with the child seat.

A0E0241m

fig. 31

Alfawiki.nl
286

fig. 32

A0E0174m

fig. 33

A0E0477m

4-06-2008

9:45

Pagina 287

To use fastener A-fig. 33, proceed asfollows:❒ tilt the rear set backrest (see paragraph "Extending the boot" in thissection);❒ pull up fastener A and then secure
the belt to the fastener.

It is possible to mount both the traditional restraint system and the "Universal Isofix" one. Remember that in caseof Universal Isofix child's seats, you can
only use all those seats approved with
the ECE R44/03 writing "Universal
Isofix".
At Lineaccessori Alfa Romeo you can findthe "Universal Isofix" "Duo Plus" child'sseat.
For any further detail on installation
and/or use, refer to the “Instructions
Manual” that must be provided by thechild restraint system's Manufacturer.

WARNING

Mount the child restraint system onlywith the car stationary. The
Universal Isofix child restraint
system is properly anchored tothe mounting brackets whenclicks are heard. In any case,keep to the installation instructions that must be provided by the child restraint
system's Manufacturer.

ALFA 159 SPORTWAGON

271-292 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
287

271-292 Alfa 159 GB

4-06-2008

9:45

Pagina 288

IF AN EXTERIOR
LIGHT BURNS OUT
For the type of bulb and power rating,see paragraph “When needing tochange a bulb" in section "In an emergency".

ALFA 159 SPORTWAGONIMPORTANT Before changing a bulb,
read carefully the instructions given in
section "In an emergency".

A0E0292m

fig. 35

A0E0294m❒ remove and replace the burnt-out
bulb by pressing it slightly and turning it counterclockwise fig. 37:

REAR LIGHT UNITS

C: reversing light bulb on passenger
side or right side;

Reversing light/
rear fog lights

C: rear fog light bulb on driver side orleft side;

To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:❒ open the tailgate;

fig. 36❒ remove cover A-fig. 35 working
with a screwdriver in the point indicated by the arrow;

IMPORTANT To release the inspection lid, protect the screwdriver tip witha cloth to prevent scratching.

A0E0293m❒ remove the bulb holder unit by pressing the retaining tabs B-fig. 36;

Alfawiki.nl
288

fig. 37❒ refit the bulb holder unit securing it
properly using the retaining tabs Bfig. 36;❒ close cover A-fig. 35.

271-292 Alfa 159 GB

4-06-2008

9:45

Pagina 289

Taillight bulb on tailgate
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:❒ open the tailgate;❒ remove the bulb holder unit by pressing the retaining tabs B-fig. 36;

A0E0295m

fig. 38❒ remove and replace the burnt-out
bulb by pressing it slightly and turning it counterclockwise fig. 37:

Direction indicators/
Taillights/Brake lights

D: taillight bulb on right/left headlight

To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:❒ refit the bulb holder unit securing it
properly using the retaining tabs Bfig. 36;❒ open the tailgate;❒ close cover A-fig. 35.

fig. 39

A0E0296m

fig. 40

A0E0297m❒ on certain versions, open the side lid;
❒ remove the protection cover by operating device A-fig. 38;❒ remove the bulb holder unit by pressing the retaining tabs B-fig. 39;❒ remove and replace the burnt-out
bulb by pressing it slightly and turning it counterclockwise fig. 40:
E: taillight/brake light bulb;

ALFA 159 SPORTWAGON❒ remove the cover A-fig. 35 working in the point shown by the arrow;❒ refit the bulb holder unit securing it
properly using the retaining tabs Bfig. 39;❒ refit the protection cover.

F: direction indicator bulb

Alfawiki.nl
289

271-292 Alfa 159 GB

4-06-2008

9:45

Pagina 290

IF AN INTERIOR
LIGHT BURNS OUT
For the type of bulb and power rating,see paragraph “When needing tochange a bulb" in section "In an emergency".

ALFA 159 SPORTWAGON

fig. 41

A0E0298m

ADDITIONAL BRAKE LIGHT(THIRD STOP)IMPORTANT Before changing a bulb,
read carefully the instructions given in
section "In an emergency".

A0E0487m

BOOT LIGHT
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:

The additional brake light is made up ofLEDs and it is built into the rear spoiler
fig. 41.

❒ open the tailgate;❒ remove the light unit A-fig. 42 levering in the point shown by the arrow;

Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services
to have the third brake light replaced.

Alfawiki.nl
290

fig. 42fig. 43

4-06-2008

9:45

Pagina 291

A0E0488m❒ replace the bulb B-fig. 43 releasing it from the side contacts making sure that the new bulb is correctly clamped between the contacts;❒ refit the light unit inserting first one
side and then the other one until
hearing the locking click.

A0E0301m

fig. 44TAILGATE LIGHT
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:❒ open the tailgate;❒ remove the light unit A-fig. 44
working in the point shown by thearrow;

fig. 45

A0E0302m❒ replace the bulb B-fig. 45 releasing it from the side contacts making sure that the new bulb is correctly clamped between the contacts;❒ refit the light unit inserting first one
side and then the other one until
hearing the locking click.

ALFA 159 SPORTWAGON

271-292 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
291

271-292 Alfa 159 GB

4-06-2008

9:45

Pagina 292

IF A FUSE BLOWS
The fuse specific for the Sportwagon version is located in the fuse box at theright side of the boot (see “In an emergency” chapter).
IMPORTANT Before changing a bulb,
read carefully the instructions given in
section "In an emergency".

A0E0303m

fig. 46

ALFA 159 SPORTWAGON

To open the fuse box, proceed as follows:❒ use handle B to open the right lid(where provided) A-fig. 46;

COMPONENT
Cigar lighter outlet❒ open the fuse box lid C-fig. 47
working in the point shown by thearrow.

FUSE

AMPERE

F55

15

Alfawiki.nl
292

A0E0304m

fig. 47

293-318 Alfa 159 GB

4-06-2008

9:47

Pagina 293

SOUND SYSTEMFUNCTIONS AND ADJUSTMENTS...................................
Turning the sound system on ......................................
Turning the sound system off ......................................
Selecting Radio/CD/CD Changer .................................
Audio source memory function ....................................
Volume adjustment ...................................................
SPEED VOLUME function ............................................
MUTE/PAUSE function ...............................................
Audio adjustments ....................................................
Bass/Treble adjustment .............................................
Balance adjustment ...................................................

295
295
295
295
295
296
297
298
299
301
302
302
302
302
302

FADER adjustment ..................................................... 305
LOUDNESS function ................................................... 305
Antitheft protection ................................................... 305

RADIO (Tuner) ..........................................................
Introduction .............................................................
Selecting the frequency band ......................................
Presetting buttons .....................................................
Storing the last station heard ......................................
Automatic tuning ......................................................
Manual tuning ..........................................................
AUTOSTORE function .................................................
Emergency alarm reception ........................................
EON function ............................................................
Stereophonic stations ................................................
303
Menu ......................................................................
303- MENU button functions ............................................
303- AF SWITCHING function ............................................
303- TRAFFIC INFO function .............................................
303- REGIONAL MODE function .........................................
303- MP3 DISPLAY function .............................................
303- SPEED VOLUME function ...........................................
304- EXTERNAL AUDIO VOL function ..................................
304- RADIO OFF function .................................................
304
Alfawiki.nl- RESTORE DEFAULT function .......................................
304

306
306
306
306
306
307
307
307
308
308
308
308
308
309
309
310
310
311
311
311
311

SOUND SYSTEMINTRODUCTION .........................................................
Advice .....................................................................
- Road safety ............................................................
- Reception conditions ................................................
- Care and maintenance .............................................
- Compact Disc .........................................................
Technical data ..........................................................
HI-FI Bose System ....................................................
QUICK GUIDE ...........................................................
Steering wheel controls ..............................................
General ...................................................................
- Radio section ..........................................................
- Compact Disc section ...............................................
- MP3 CD section ......................................................
- Audio section ..........................................................

293

SOUND SYSTEM

293-318 Alfa 159 GB

4-06-2008

9:47

Pagina 294

COMPACT DISC PLAYER ..............................................
Introduction .............................................................
Selecting the CD player ..............................................
Loading/ejecting CD .................................................
Possible error messages .............................................
Display information ...................................................
Select track .............................................................
Fast forward/backward .............................................
Pause function .........................................................
Antitheft protection ...................................................
- Entering the secret code ...........................................
- Code Card ..............................................................

312
312
312
312
313
313
313
313
313
314
314
314

MP3 CD PLAYER .......................................................
Introduction .............................................................
MP3 mode ..............................................................
Display information ...................................................
Select next/previous directory ....................................
Protection against theft ..............................................

315
315
315
316
316
316

CD CHANGER (CDC) ..................................................
Introduction .............................................................
Selecting the CD Changer ...........................................
Possible error messages .............................................
Selecting the CD .......................................................

317
317
317
317
317

TROUBLESHOOTING ..................................................Alfawiki.nl
318

294

293-318 Alfa 159 GB

4-06-2008

9:47

Pagina 295

INTRODUCTIONADVICEThe radio is installed in a user-friendly position for the driver and passenger and thegraphics on the front panel make location of
the controls quick, facilitating use.

Reception conditions change constantly
when driving. Reception may be disturbed
by the presence of mountains, buildings orbridges particularly when far away from thestation being listened to.

The CD Changer is available at Lineaccessori
Alfa Romeo.
In the following pages you will find the instructions for use, which you are advised toread through carefully. The instructions also
contain the procedure for controlling the CD
Changer (if provided) through the radio. For
the instructions for use of the CD Changer
refer to the specific manual.

Road safety
You are advised to learn how to use the various radio functions (e.g.: storing stations)
before starting to drive.
Reception conditions

IMPORTANT When receiving traffic information, the volume may be higher than normal.

WARNING
Too high a volume whendriving can put the driver’s
life at risk and that of other people. Therefore the volume should
always be adjusted in such a waythat it is always possible to hear
the noises of the surrounding environment (e.g.: horns, ambulance,
police sirens, etc.).

Care and maintenance

SOUND SYSTEM

The car sound system, fitted with CD player(radio with Compact Disc player) or MP3 CD
player (radio with MP3 CD player) has been
designed in accordance with the special features of the passenger compartment, with apersonalised design that blends with the styleof the dashboard. The sound system cannot
be adapted to other vehicles and for this reason it cannot be removed.

The radio structure ensures long operation
with no need for particular maintenance.
In the event of a fault, contact Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services.
To clean the front panel only use a soft, antistatic cloth. Cleaning and polishing products might spoil the surface.

Alfawiki.nl
295

293-318 Alfa 159 GB

4-06-2008

9:47

Pagina 296

Compact Disc
Remember that dirt, marks or distortion on
Compact Disc can cause skipping. To obtain
optimum playing conditions we give the following advice:❒ Only use Compact Discs which have thefollowing brand:

SOUND SYSTEM❒ Carefully clean all Compact Discs of fingerprints and dust using a soft cloth. Support Compact Discs from the outer circumference and clean from the centre outwards;❒ Never use chemical products for cleaning(e.g.: spray cans, antistatic or thinners) as
they might damage the surface of Compact Discs;❒ After use, put Compact Discs back in theircontainer, to avoid marks or scratches that
may cause skipping when playing;❒ Do not expose Compact Discs to direct sunlight, high temperatures or damp for prolonged lengths of time to prevent themfrom bending;❒ Do not stick labels or write on the recorded surface of Compact Discs.
To remove a Compact Disc from its container,press the centre and raise the disc carefully, holding it by the outer circumference.

Alfawiki.nl
296

Always hold Compact Discs by the outer circumference. Never touch the surface.
To remove fingerprints and dust, use a soft
cloth starting from the centre of the Compact Disc outwards.
Do not use highly scratched, cracked, or distorted discs, etc. The use of these discs will
involve malfunctioning or damage to theplayer.
For optimal playing use original CDs only.
Regular operation is not guaranteed if using
R/RW CDs not properly mastered and/or
CDs with max. capacity higher than 650
MB.
IMPORTANT Do not use the protective sheets
for CD in commerce or discs with stabilisers,
etc. as they might get stuck in the internalmechanism and damage the disc.

4-06-2008

9:47

Pagina 297

IMPORTANT Should copy-protected CDs be
used, then, few seconds may be requiredfor playing them. Moreover, due to the proliferation of always new and different protection methods, it is not guaranteed that
the CD player can play whatever protecteddisc. Copy protection is often indicated on
the CD cover in small letters or hard to readcharacters. Usually it is indicated by writings
like: “COPY CONTROL”, “COPY PROTECTED”, “THIS CD CANNOT BE PLAYED ON A
PC/MAC”, or it is identified by symbols like:

Protected discs (and their cover) very often
are not marked with the audio CD identification symbol:

TECHNICAL DATA
Radio
Maximum power: 4x40W
Speakers
The system includes:

IMPORTANT The CD player can read most of
the compression systems currently on sale(e.g.: LAME, BLADE, XING, FRAUNHOFER)
however, due to the evolution of these systems, reading of all compression formats
is not guaranteed.
IMPORTANT When loading a multi-session
CD, only the first session will be played.

– 2 tweeters with 30 W max. power,
set at dashboard ends;– 2 mid-woofers with a diameter of 165
mm and 30W max. power, set in front
doors;– 2 tweeters with 30 W max. power,
set in rear doors;– 2 mid-woofers with a diameter of 165
mm and 30W max. power, set in reardoors.

SOUND SYSTEM

293-318 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
297

293-318 Alfa 159 GB

4-06-2008

9:47

Pagina 298

HI-FI BOSE SYSTEM(optional for versions/markets where applicable)

SOUND SYSTEM

The HI-FI BOSE system installed on your car
has been accurately designed to offer outstanding sound quality and reproduce themusical realism of a live concert, for all theseats in the passenger compartment.
The system’s features include outstanding
faithful reproduction of crystalline treble
tones and full, rich basses which among other things, make the Loudness function superfluous. In addition, the complete rangeof the sounds is reproduced in the whole passenger compartment enveloping the occupants with the natural spatial sensation thatis felt when listening to live music.

Technical data
The system includes:– 2 tweeters with 50 W max. power,
set at dashboard ends;– 2 mid-woofers with a diameter of 165
mm and 90 W max. power, set in front
doors;– 1 Sub-woofer (Saloon versions), witha diameter of 250 mm and 200 W max.
power, set on the rear window parcel
shelf;– 2 rear tweeters with 50 W max.
power, set in rear doors;– 1 Bass-box reflex (Sportwagon versions) 130 mm diameter, 200 W max.
power, set in the boot;– 2 mid-woofers with a diameter of 165
mm and 90 W max. power, set in reardoors;– Power amplifier with 6 independent
channels, set on the rear window parcel
shelf and controlling all installed speakers.

The components adopted are patented andare the result of the most sophisticated technology, but at the same time they are easy
and intuitive to use, so that even less expert
people can use the system.

Alfawiki.nl
298– 1 mid-tweeter (Centerfill) with adiameter of 80 mm and 50 W max.
power, set in the middle of the dashboard;293-318 Alfa 159 GB

4-06-2008

9:47

Pagina 299

QUICK GUIDEAUDIO SECTION❒ Loudness function (excluding versions
with Bose HI-FI system)❒ Standard equalization (excluding versions
with Bose HI-FI system)❒ Personal equalization (excluding versions
with Bose HI-FI system)❒ Automatic volume changing according tocar speed (SPEED VOLUME)❒ MUTE function❒ Traffic information reception (TA)❒ Automatic storage of 6 stations in the
dedicated FM band - FMT (AS – Autostore)

A0E0531m

SOUND SYSTEM

RADIO SECTION

CD / MP3 CD SECTION❒ Play / Pause❒ Previous / next track selection❒ FF / FR❒ Previous / next directory selection

ButtonGENERAL FUNCTIONS

Mode

ON/OFFOn

Brief knob pressing

OffLong knob pressing

Volume adjustment

Alfawiki.nlKnob rotation LH/RH
299

SOUND SYSTEM

293-318 Alfa 159 GB

4-06-2008

9:47

Pagina 300

ButtonGENERAL FUNCTIONS

Mode

FM AS
AM
CD
MUTE

Radio band selection FM1, FM2, FM Autostore

Brief cyclic button pressing

Radio band selection MW, LW

Brief cyclic button pressing

Audio source selection (radio/CD/CD-Changer)
Volume on/off (MUTE / PAUSE)

Brief cyclic button pressing

AUDIO

Audio settings: bass (BASS), treble (TREBLE),
right/left sound adjustment (BALANCE),
front/rear sound adjustment (FADER)

Menu activation: brief button pressing
Adjustment selection: press button N or O
Value adjustment: press button ÷ or ˜

MENU

Advanced functions adjustment

Menu activation: brief button pressing
Adjustment selection: press button N or O
Value adjustment: press button ÷ or ˜

ButtonRADIO FUNCTIONSModeRadio station tuning:

Automatic tuning: press button ÷ or ˜(long pressing for fast forward)
Manual tuning: press button N or O
(long pressing for fast forward)

N
÷

˜
O

Brief button pressing• Automatic tuning• Manual tuning

Long button pressing
respectively for preset/memories from 1 to 6

1 2 3 4 5 6 Current radio station storage
Stored station recall

Brief button pressing
respectively for preset/memories from 1 to 6

ButtonCD FUNCTIONS

Mode

ı

CD ejection

Brief button pressing

Previous/next track playback

Brief pressing on buttons ÷ or ˜

CD track fast forward/backward

Long pressing on buttons ÷ or ˜

÷ ˜
N
O

300

Previous/next CD playback (for CD Changer)
Previous/next directory playback (for MP3 CD)

Alfawiki.nl

Brief pressing on buttons N or O
Brief pressing on buttons N or O

293-318 Alfa 159 GB

4-06-2008

9:47

Pagina 301

STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS(where provided)

ButtonFUNCTION

Mode^

AudioMute on/off(with sound system on)

Brief button pressing

Volume up

Press button

Volume down

Press button

SRC

Radio frequency(FM1, FM2, FMT, MW, LW) and audio source(Radio - CD - MP3 - CD Changer) selection button

Press button

N

Radio: recall preset stations (1 to 6)
MP3: select next directory
CD Changer: select next CD in the CD Changer

Press button

O

Radio: recall preset stations (6 to 1)
MP3: select previous directory
CD Changer: select previous CD in the CD Changer

Press button÷Radio: automatic tuning to previous station
CD player: select previous track
CD Changer: select previous track

Press button

˜Radio: automatic tuning to next station
CD player: select next track
CD Changer: select next track+–

SOUND SYSTEM

A0E0532m

Press button

Alfawiki.nl
301293-318 Alfa 159 GB

4-06-2008

9:47

Pagina 302

GENERAL

Compact Disc section

MP3 CD section

The set possesses the following functions:❒ Direct disc selection;❒ MP3-Info function (ID3-TAG);

Radio section❒ Track selection (forward/backward);❒ Directory selection (previous/next);❒ Fast forward/backward;❒ Track selection (forward/backward);❒ CD Display function: displaying CD
name/time elapsed from start of track;❒ Fast forward/backward;❒ PLL tuning with FM/AM/MW/LW frequency bands;❒ RDS (Radio Data System) with TA (traffic announcements) - TP (Program Type)- EON (Enhanced Other Network) - REG(Regional programmes);❒ Playing audio CDs and R/RW CDs.

❒ Playing audio CDs and R/RW CDs.

SOUND SYSTEM❒ AF: alternative frequency search selection
in RDS mode;❒ emergency alarm presetting;❒ automatic/manual station tuning;❒ FM Multipath detector;❒ manual storage of 36 stations: 18 in the
FM band (6 in FM1, 6 in FM2, 6 inFMT), 6 in the MW band and 6 in the LW
band;

Audio section

On multimedia CDs in addition to sound tracks also
data tracks are recorded.
Playing one of these CDs may
cause rustling and such a volume
as to compromise road safety, as
well as causing damage to the final stages and speakers.

❒ automatic storage (AUTOSTORE function)of 6 stations in FM band;❒ Mute/Pause function;❒ Soft Mute function;❒ Loudness function (excluding versions
with Bose HI-FI system);❒ 7 band graphic equalizer (excluding versions with Bose HI-FI system);❒ Separate bass/treble adjustment;❒ Right/left channel balancing.

❒ SPEED VOLUME function (excluding versions with Bose HI-FI system): automatic volume adjustment with car speed;❒ automatic Stereo/Mono switching.

Alfawiki.nl
302❒ MP3 CD data display: directory name,
ID3-TAG info, time elapsed from start of
track, file name);293-318 Alfa 159 GB

4-06-2008

9:47

Pagina 303

FUNCTIONS AND ADJUSTMENTS
SELECTING CD/CD CHANGERFUNCTIONSThe set is switched on pressing briefly the
button/knob ON/OFF.

Pressing briefly and repeatedly button CD
it is possible to select the following audio
sources in sequence:

When turning the sound system on, the volume level will be brought to 20 if it was set
to over.
If the radio is turned on when the key is not
fitted into the ignition device, it will turn off
automatically after about 20 minutes. After
automatic switching off, it is however possible to turn the radio on again for other 20 minutes by pressing the button/knob ON/OFF.
TURNING THE
SOUND SYSTEM OFF
Keep button/knob ON/OFF pressed.
SELECTING RADIO FUNCTIONS
Pressing briefly and repeatedly button FMAS it is possible to select the following functions in sequence:❒ CD (only if the Compact Disc is inserted);❒ CHANGER (CD Changer - only if the CD
Changer is connected).
AUDIO SOURCE MEMORYFUNCTION
If while listening to a CD another function is
selected (e.g.: the radio), playing is stopped
and when the CD mode is resumed, it starts
again from the point in which it was
stopped.
If while listening to the radio another function is selected, when the Radio mode isresumed, it is tuned to the last station selected.

VOLUME ADJUSTMENT
Adjust volume through button/knob
ON/OFF.
If the volume level is changed during thebroadcast of a traffic bulletin, the new setting is maintained only until the end of thebulletin.
SPEED VOLUME FUNCTION(excluding versions with Bose
HI-FI system)
The SVC function makes it possible to automatically adapt the volume level to the
speed of the car, increasing it as the speed
increases to maintain the ratio with the noiselevel inside the passenger compartment.

SOUND SYSTEMTURNING THE
SOUND SYSTEM ON

See section MENU for activating/deactivating this function.

❒ TUNER (“FM1”, “FM2”, “FMT”);
Pressing briefly and repeatedly button AM it
is possible to select the following functions
in sequence:❒ TUNER (“MW”, “LW”).

Alfawiki.nl
303293-318 Alfa 159 GB

4-06-2008

9:47

Pagina 304

MUTE /PAUSE FUNCTION(turning off the volume
completely)
To switch on the Mute function, briefly press
the button MUTE. Volume will gradually lower and the display will show the word
“MUTE” (when in radio mode) or “PAUSE”(when in CD or CD-Changer mode).

SOUND SYSTEM

To switch off the Mute function, press the
button MUTE again. Volume will gradually
become louder returning to the value set before switching on the Mute function.

AUDIO ADJUSTMENTS
The options proposed by the audio menu differ according to the audio source selected:
AM/FM/CD/CDC.
To change Audio functions, press briefly button AUDIO. The display will show “BASS”.
To scroll the Menu options, use buttons N
or O. To change the setting of the option
selected, press buttons ÷ or ˜.
The display will show the current status of
the function selected.

Changing volume will deactivate the Mutefunction and the volume will be set to the
new level selected.

The functions controlled by the menu are thefollowing:With the Mute function on:❒ TREBLE (treble adjustment);❒ if an emergency alarm or a traffic bulletinarrives with the TA function on, the message ignores the Mute function. The Mutefunction will be resumed at the end of thetraffic announcement.

❒ BASS (bass adjustment);❒ BALANCE (right/left balance);❒ FADER (excluding versions with Bose HIFI system) (front/rear balance);❒ LOUDNESS (excluding versions with Bose
HI-FI system) (LOUDNESS on/off);❒ EQUALIZER (excluding versions with Bose
HI-FI system) (standard equalization activation and selection);❒ USER EQUALISER (personal equalization
setting).

Alfawiki.nl
304

TONE ADJUSTMENT(bass/treble)
Proceed as follows:❒ Use button N or O to select “BASS”
or “TREBLE” in the AUDIO menu;❒ press button ÷ or ˜ to increase/decrease the basses or trebles.
Pressing the buttons briefly the change is gradual by steps. Pressing longer, changing isfaster.
BALANCE ADJUSTMENT
Proceed as follows:❒ Use button N or O to select “BALANCE”
in the AUDIO menu;❒ press button ÷ to increase the soundfrom the right speakers or button ˜
to increase the sound from the left speakers.
Pressing the buttons briefly the change is gradual by steps. Pressing longer, changing isfaster.
Select “÷ 0 ˜” to set the same value for both right and left speakers.

4-06-2008

9:47

Pagina 305

FADER ADJUSTMENT
Proceed as follows:❒ Use button N or O to select “FADER” in
the AUDIO menu;❒ press button ÷ to increase the soundfrom the rear speakers or button ˜ toincrease the sound from the front speakers.
Pressing the buttons briefly the change is gradual by steps. Pressing longer, changing isfaster.

PRESET/USER*/CLASSIC/
ROCK/JAZZ functions(equalizer on/off)
The integrated equalizer can be turned on
or off. With the equalizer off, it is possible
to change the sound settings only adjusting the bass (“BASS”) and treble tones(“TREBLE”), while activating the function
makes it possible to adjust the sound curves.
To turn the equalizer off, select “PRESET”
by means of button ÷ or ˜.

Select “÷ 0 ˜” to set the same value for both front and rear speakers.

To turn the equalizer on, use button ÷or ˜ to select one of the following options:

LOUDNESS FUNCTION❒ “USER” (adjustment of the 7 equalizer
bands that can be changed by the user);

The Loudness function improves the soundvolume when listening at low level, increasing the basses and trebles.
To switch the function on/off, use button
N or O to select “LOUDNESS” in the AUDIO menu. The function condition (on or off)is shown on the display for few seconds by“LOUDNESS ON” or “LOUDNESS OFF”.

❒ “CLASSIC” (predefined equalizer adjustment for best playing of classic music);❒ “ROCK” (predefined equalizer adjustment for best playing of rock and pop music);*USER EQ SETTINGS function(only if the USER equalizer
setting has been selected)(excluding versions with
Bose HI-FI system)
To set a personal equalizer adjustment, usebutton N or O to select USER and thenpress button O for long.
The display shows a graph with 7 bars,
where each bar represents a frequency.
Choose the bar to be adjusted using button
÷ or ˜; the bar chosen starts to flash
and it is possible to adjust it using button N
or O.
To store the new settings, press button AUDIO again. The display still shows “USER EQSETTINGS”.

SOUND SYSTEM

293-318 Alfa 159 GB

ANTITHEFT PROTECTION
Refer to section “CD PLAYER”.

❒ “JAZZ” (predefined equalizer adjustment
for best playing of jazz music).
When one of the equalizer settings is on,
the display shows “EQ”.

Alfawiki.nl
305293-318 Alfa 159 GB

4-06-2008

9:47

Pagina 306

RADIO (TUNER)INTRODUCTION
When the set is turned on the last function
selected before turning off is played (Radio,
CD or CD Changer).

SOUND SYSTEM

To select the Tuner source while listening
to another audio source, press briefly buttons FM or AM, according to the required
frequency band.
When Tuner is on, the display will show theselected station name (RDS stations only)(or frequency), the frequency band (e.g.:FM1) and the preselection button number(e.g.: P1).

SELECTING THE FREQUENCY
BAND
If in the Tuner mode, briefly and repeatedly press button FM or AM to select the required frequency band.
Every time the button is pressed the following bands are selected in sequence:❒ Pressing button FM: “FM1”, “FM2”,“FMT”;❒ Pressing button AM: , “MW” and “LW”.
Each band is shown by the respective wording on the display.
The last station selected in the respective frequency band will be tuned.
The FM band is divided into sections: FM1,
FM2 and FMT. The FMT reception band is reserved to the stations stored automaticallywith the AutoSTore function.

Alfawiki.nl
306

PRESETTING BUTTONS
The buttons with symbols from 1 to 6 makeit possible to set the following presettings:❒ 18 in the FM band (6 in FM1, 6 in FM2,
6 in FMT);❒ 6 in the MW band;❒ 6 in the LW band;To call a preset station, choose the required
frequency band and then press briefly thecorresponding preset button (from 1 to 6).
Pressing the respective preset button for
longer than 2 seconds will store the tuned
station. Storing is confirmed by a beep.
STORING THE LAST STATIONHEARD
The radio automatically keeps in storage thelast station heard for each reception band,
which is then tuned when the radio is turnedon or the reception band is changed.

4-06-2008

9:47

Pagina 307

AUTOMATIC TUNING
Briefly press button ÷ or ˜ to start
automatically searching the tuning for the
next station that it is possible to receive inthe direction chosen.
If button ÷ or ˜ is pressed for longer,
quick searching takes place. When the button
is released, the tuner stops on the next receivable station.

AUTOSTORE FUNCTION(automatic station storage)
To switch on the AutoSTore function, keep
button FM-AS pressed until receiving the confirmation beep. With this function the radio automatically stores the six stations withthe strongest signal in decreasing order ofintensity of the FMT frequency band.

At the end of the AutoSTore function the radio automatically tunes on the first preset
station in the FMT band stored on preset button 1.
On buttons numbered from 1 to 6, the stations are automatically stored that give astrong signal in that moment in the present
band.

IMPORTANT Activating the AutoSTore function cancels the stations stored previously in
the FMT band.

Activating the AutoSTore function in MW or
LW bands will automatically select the FMTband where the function is then run.

MANUAL TUNING

If the TA function is on (traffic information),
only the stations that send traffic information will be stored.

This allows manual station searching in thechosen band.

During automatic storage the display shows“FM AST”.

IMPORTANT Sometimes the AutoSTore function is unable to find 6 stations with a strong
signal. In this case the previous stations will
be stored on the free preset buttons.

Select the required frequency band and thenpress briefly and repeatedly button N or O
to start searching in the chosen band. Pressing one of the buttons N or O longer obtains
fast forward searching, which is stopped when
the button is released.

To interrupt AutoSTore press button FM-AS
again: the radio will automatically tune tothe station heard before activation of the AutoSTore function.

If the TA function is on (traffic information),
the tuner only searches stations which broadcast traffic bulletins.

SOUND SYSTEM

293-318 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
307293-318 Alfa 159 GB

4-06-2008

9:47

Pagina 308

EMERGENCY ALARM
RECEPTION

EON FUNCTION(Enhanced Other Network)

In the RDS mode the radio is set to receive
emergency announcements in the case of
exceptional circumstances or events that
may cause general danger (earthquakes,
floods, etc.), if they are broadcast by thestation tuned.

Certain countries have circuits which group
together several stations enabled to broadcast traffic information. In this case the programme of the station being heard will beinterrupted temporarily:

SOUND SYSTEM

This function is activated automatically andcannot be deactivated.
During emergency announcement the display will show the message “ALARM”. During this announcement the volume willchange as described for traffic announcements (see paragraph “TA FUNCTION”).

❒ to receive traffic information (only with
TA function on);❒ to listen to regional programmes every
time these bulletins are given by one of
the stations of the same circuits.
STEREOPHONIC STATIONS
If the signal received is weak, the device
switches automatically from Stereo to Mono.

MENU
MENU button functions
To activate the menu function, briefly press
button MENU. The display shows the word
“MENU”.
To scroll the menu functions use button N
or O. To change the setting of the selected function use button ÷ or ˜.
The display will show the current status of
the function selected.
The functions controlled by the menu are thefollowing:❒ AF SWITCHING (ON/OFF)❒ TRAFFIC INFO (ON/OFF)❒ REGIONAL MODE regional programmes(ON/OFF);❒ MP3 DISPLAY (MP3 CD data display);❒ SPEED VOLUME (excluding versions with
Bose HI-FI system) (automatic volume
control in relation to speed);❒ EXTERNAL AUDIO VOL (external audio
sources control)❒ RADIO OFF (System power off mode).
❒ RESTORE DEFAULT

Alfawiki.nl
308

To exit the menu function, press button
MENU again.

4-06-2008

9:47

Pagina 309

AF SWITCHING function(alternative frequency search)

TRAFFIC INFO function(traffic information)

Within the RDS system the radio can workin two different modes:

Certain stations in the FM band (FM1, FM2
and FMT) are enabled to also broadcast information about traffic conditions. In thiscase the display shows “TP”.

❒ “AF ON”: alternative frequency search on(the display shows “AF”);❒ “AF OFF”: alternative frequency search
off.
With “AF ON”, the radio is automaticallytuned to the station with the strongest signal that is broadcasting the same programme. During the journey it will thus bepossible to continue listening to the station
chosen without having to change the frequency when changing area.
Of course, the station being listened to must
be receivable in the area the car is crossing.
To turn the AF function on/off press button
MENU, select “AF SWITCHING” and thenON/OFF. If the AF function has been turnedon the display shows “AF”.
If the radio is working in the AM band, whenthe AF function is activated, it passes to theFM1 band on the last station selected.

To turn the TA (traffic information) function
on/off, briefly press button MENU, select“TRAFFIC INFO” and then ON/OFF.
IMPORTANT If the TA function (traffic information) is on, with CD, CD Changer (if installed), Telephone or Mute/Pause active:
automatic station tuning will start.
With the TA function it is possible:❒ to search only RDS stations that transmit
in the FM band, enabled to broadcast traffic information;❒ to receive traffic information although CD
player or CD Changer are being used;❒ to receive traffic information at a predefined minimum volume even with the radio volume off.

IMPORTANT In certain countries radio stations exist which, even if the TP function is
on (the display shows “TP”), do not transmit traffic information.
If the radio is working in the AM band, when
TA is activated, it passes to the FM1 bandon the last station heard.
The volume with which the traffic bulletin
is transmitted varies depending on the listening volume:❒ listening volume below 20: traffic bulletinvolume = 20 (fixed value);❒ listening volume above 20: traffic bulletinvolume = listening volume +1.
If the volume is changed during a traffic bulletin the value is not shown on the display
and the new value is kept only for the bulletin in progress.

SOUND SYSTEM

293-318 Alfa 159 GB

When receiving traffic information the display will show message “TRAFFIC INFORMATION”.
The TA function is interrupted by pressing
any sound system button.

Alfawiki.nl
309

293-318 Alfa 159 GB

4-06-2008

9:47

Pagina 310

REGIONAL MODE function(regional broadcast reception)

The display will show the current status of
the function:

MP3 CD DISPLAY(MP3 CD data display)

Certain national broadcasters, at determinate times of the day, transmit regional programmes which differ from region to region.
This function makes it possible to tune in only on local stations (regional) (see paragraph “EON function”).

❒ “REGIONAL MODE: ON”: function on.

With this function it is possible to choose theinformation shown on the display, when listening to a MP3 CD.

Activate this function if you want to tune automatically to regional stations broadcastingin the selected band.

SOUND SYSTEM

To turn the function on/off use button
÷ or ˜.

❒ “REGIONAL MODE: OFF”: function off.
If the function is off and a regional programme is tuned that works in a determinate area and the car enters a different area,
the regional station of the new area is received.
IMPORTANT If AF and REG are both active,
when passing from one region to another theradio could not tune properly to a valid alternative frequency.

This function can be selected only if a MP3
CD is loaded: in this event the display shows“MP3 DISPLAY”.
To change the function use buttons
÷ or ˜.
The display shows the setting among the six
possible:❒ TITLE (track title, if ID3-TAG available)❒ AUTHOR (track author, if ID3-TAG available)❒ ALBUM (album title, if ID3-TAG available)❒ DIR (directory name);❒ FILENAME (MP3 file name);❒ TIME (time elapsed from start of track).

Alfawiki.nl
310

4-06-2008

9:47

Pagina 311

SPEED VOLUME function(volume changing with speed)(excluding versions with
Bose HI-FI system)
This function makes it possible to automatically adapt the volume level to the speedof the car, increasing it as the speed increases to maintain the ratio with the noiselevel inside the passenger compartment.
To turn the function on/off use button ÷or ˜. The display will show the current
status of the function:❒ OFF: function off

EXTERNAL AUDIO VOL function
With this function it is possible to adjust (setting from 0 to 40) or exclude (OFF) external
audio sources.
To turn this function on/off, use button
÷ or ˜.
The display will show the current status of
the function:

IMPORTANT When the sound system isswitched off automatically after removing
the key from the ignition device (for both
immediate or 20-minute delayed poweroff), it will switch on automatically fitting
the key into the ignition device. If the soundsystem has been switched off pressing the
button ON/OFF, when fitting the key into
the ignition device, it will stay off.

❒ “EXTERN FUNCTION OFF”: function off.

RESTORE DEFAULT function❒ “EXTERN VOLUME: 23”: function on withvolume level 23.

This function enables to restore default settings. Options available are the following:❒ LOW: function on(low sensitivity)

RADIO OFF function(system power on/off mode)❒ HIGH: function on(high sensitivity).

This function enables to switch off the soundsystem according to two different modes.
To turn the function on use button ÷ or˜.

❒ NO: no restore;❒ YES: restore default settings. During thisoperation the display will show the message “RESTORING”. At the end of this operation, the audio source will not bechanged and the previous situation is displayed.

SOUND SYSTEM

293-318 Alfa 159 GB

The display will show the selected mode:❒ “00 MIN”: deactivation dependent on ignition key. The sound system will turn off
automatically as soon as the key is removed from the ignition device;❒ “20 MIN”: deactivation independent of
ignition key. The sound system will stayon for max. 20 minutes after removing
the key from the ignition device.

Alfawiki.nl
311

293-318 Alfa 159 GB

4-06-2008

9:47

Pagina 312

C O M PA C T D I S C P L AY E R
INTRODUCTION

SELECTING THE CD PLAYERLOADING/EJECTING CD

This section only describes CD player operation variants: as concerns sound system operation, refer to section “FUNCTIONS AND
ADJUSTMENTS”.

To turn on the Compact Disc player integrated in the set, proceed as follows:

To insert the CD set it gently in place to activate the powered loading system, which
will position it correctly.

❒ insert a CD with the set on: the first track
will be played;
or

SOUND SYSTEM❒ if a CD is already inserted, turn the set on
and press briefly button CD to select“CD”: the last heard track will be played.
For optimal playing use only original CDs.
When using R/RW CDs, use top quality CDs
mastered at the as low as possible speed.

If CD is not ejected, the device will reload
it automatically after about 20 seconds andthen will set to Tuner (Radio).
CD cannot be ejected if the device is off.
Inserting the ejected CD without fully removing it from the slot, the tuner will notchange the source to CD.

Alfawiki.nl
312

Press button ı, with the device on, to operate the powered CD eject system. Afterejection, the source heard before playing the
CD will return.

4-06-2008

9:47

Pagina 313

POSSIBLE ERROR MESSAGES
If the CD inserted is illegible (e.g.: CD-ROM
inserted, CD not inserted properly or reading error), the display will show the message “CD ERROR” for about 2 seconds.
The CD is then ejected and the previous
source before CD was selected returns.
DISPLAY INFORMATION
When the CD player is working, the display
shows the following information whichmeans:“T05”: shows the number of the track on
the CD;“03:42”: shows the time elapsed since thestart of the track (if the corresponding Menu
function is on);

SELECT TRACK(forward/backward)
Briefly press button ÷ to play the previous track and button ˜ to play the next
one. Tracks are played in sequence: after thelast track, the first one will be played andvice versa.
If playing the track started more than 3 seconds ago, pressing briefly button ÷ thetrack is played again from the start. In thiscase if wanting to play the previous track,press the button twice consecutively.
FAST FORWARD/BACKWARD
Keep button ˜ pressed to move the track
selected forward at high speed and keep button ÷ pressed to move it quickly backward. Fast forward/backward is stopped
once the button is released.

PAUSE FUNCTION
To pause the CD player, press button MUTE.
The display will show “PAUSE”.
To resume playing the track, press button
MUTE again.
The pause function is deactivated changing
the sound source.

SOUND SYSTEM

293-318 Alfa 159 GB

Alfawiki.nl
313

293-318 Alfa 159 GB

4-06-2008

9:47

Pagina 314

ANTITHEFT PROTECTIONEntering the secret code

The radio is fitted with an antitheft protection system based on the exchange of information between the radio and the electronic control unit (Body Computer) installedon the car.

When turning the sound system on (in theevent of code request), the display will show
the word “CODE” for about 2 seconds, followed by four dashes “- - - -”.

SOUND SYSTEM

This system warrants the highest level of security and prevents entry of the secret code
every time the radio supply is disconnected.
If the result of the check is positive, the set
starts working, whereas if the comparison
codes are not the same or if the electronic
control unit (Body Computer) is replaced,the device informs the user of the need toenter the secret code according to the procedure described in the following paragraph.

The secret code comprises four figures from
1 to 6, each corresponding to one of thedashes.
To enter the first digit of the code, press thecorresponding key of the preset stations(from 1 to 6). Enter the other code digits inthe same way.
If the four figures are not entered within 20
seconds, the display shows the word
“CODE” for 2 seconds and then fours dashes “- - - -”. This is not to be considered as anincorrect code entry.
After entering the fourth digit (within 20 seconds), the radio starts working.
If a wrong code is entered, the radio sounds
a beep, the display shows the word “CODE”
for 2 seconds and then fours dashes “- - - -”to warn the user that it is necessary to enter the correct code.

Alfawiki.nl
314

Every time the user enters a wrong code,
the waiting time increases gradually (1 min,
2 min, 4 min, 8 min, 16 min, 30 min,1h,
2h, 4h, 8h, 16h, 24h) until reaching a maximum of 24 hours. The waiting time will
be shown on the display with the word
“WAIT”. When this goes off it is possible
to start the new code entry procedure.
Code Card
This the document that certifies possessionof the radio. The Code Card contains the radio model, serial number and secret code.
IMPORTANT Keep the Code Card carefully tobe able to give the related data to the competent authorities in the event of theft.

293-318 Alfa 159 GB

4-06-2008

9:47

Pagina 315

M P 3 C D P L AY E R
MP3 MODEThis section only describes MP3 CD player
operation variants: as concerns sound system operation, refer to section “FUNCTIONS
AND ADJUSTMENTS”.

In addition to standard audio CDs, the soundsystem can also play audio files in MP3 format. Sound system will operate as describedin the previous section (“Sound system with
Compact Disc player”) when inserting a conventional audio CD.

NOTE MPEG Layer-3 audio decoding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS andThomson multimedia.

For optimal playing use only top quality CDs
mastered at a speed as low as possible.
MP3 CD files are structured by directories,
with sequential lists of all directories containing MP3 tracks (directories and sub-directories are all brought to the same level), directories not containing MP3 tracks
cannot be selected.

Technical data and operating conditions forMP3 files are as follows:❒ adopted CD-ROM shall be mastered according to ISO9660 Standard;❒ music files shall be renamed as “.mp3”
otherwise they cannot be played;❒ sampling frequencies are: 44.1 kHz,
stereo (96 to 320 kbit/s) - 22.05 kHz,mono or stereo (32 to 80 kbit/s);❒ it is possible to play variable bit-rate tracks(files).
IMPORTANT Characters: blank, ‘ (apostrophe), ( and ) (open and closed brackets)
are not admitted in MP3 track names. Whensampling MP3 CD you must not use thesecharacters to name files otherwise the soundsystem will not be able to play it.

SOUND SYSTEMINTRODUCTION

Alfawiki.nl
315293-318 Alfa 159 GB

4-06-2008

9:47

Pagina 316

DISPLAY INFORMATION
ID3-TAG info display
In addition to time elapsed, directory nameand file name, also ID3-TAG info relevant
to track Title, Artist, Author (see section“MP3 DISPLAY FUNCTION”) are displayed.
The MP3 directory name shown on the display corresponds to the name with which
the directory is stored on the CD, followedby an asterisk.

SOUND SYSTEM

Example of full MP3 directory name: BESTOF *.
If you want to display one ID3-TAG info (Title, Artist, Album) and the track being played
has no ID3-TAG info then, the file name will
be displayed.

SELECT NEXT/PREVIOUS
DIRECTORY
Press button N to select the next directoryor press button O to select the previous one.
The name of the new selected directory will
be shown on the display.
Directories are selected in cyclic sequence:
after the last directory the first one is selected and vice versa.
If no other directory/track is selected in thefollowing 2 seconds, the first track in the
new directory will be played.
If the last track in the currently selected directory is played, the next will then be
played.

Alfawiki.nl
316

PROTECTION AGAINST THEFT
Refer to section “COMPACT DISC PLAYER”.

293-318 Alfa 159 GB

4-06-2008

9:47

Pagina 317

Installation and connectionof a Lineaccessori CD
Changer shall only be performed by Alfa Romeo Authorized
Services.

INTRODUCTION
This section only describes CD Changer(where provided) operation variants: as concerns sound system operation, refer to section “FUNCTIONS AND ADJUSTMENTS”.
SELECTING THE CD CHANGER
Turn on the set, then press briefly and repeatedly button CD until selecting “CHANGER”.

POSSIBLE ERROR MESSAGESSELECTING THE CD

Error messages will be displayed in the following cases:

Press button N to select the next CD andbutton O to select the previous CD.

❒ no CD in the CD Changer: the display willshow “NO CD” until changing the soundsource;If the loader does not contain a disc in theposition selected, the display briefly shows
the wording “NO CD”, and the next CD is
played automatically.

❒ selected CD is illegible (CD not in the selected position or CD not inserted properly): the display shows “CD ERROR” after the number of the selected CD. The
next CD will be selected; if there are noother CDs or if they are also illegible thedisplay will show the wording “NO CD”
until the sound source is changed;

SOUND SYSTEM

CD CHANGER (CDC)❒ error in CD reading: the display shows“CD ERROR”. The next CD will be selected; if there are no other CDs in the CD
Changer (after the last CD search will
restart from the first one) or if they arealso illegible the display will show thewording “NO CD” until the sound sourceis changed;❒ a CD-ROM is inserted: next CD will beselected.

Alfawiki.nl
317

293-318 Alfa 159 GB

4-06-2008

9:47

Pagina 318

SOUND SYSTEMTROUBLESHOOTINGOVERVIEWCOMPACT DISC PLAYER

MP3 FILE READING

Low volume
The Fader function shall only be set to “F”(front), to prevent sound system output
power reduction and volume muting if theFader level set is = R+9.

CD not played
Loaded CD is dirty. Clean the CD.
Loaded CD is scratched. Try to play anotherCD.

Skipping when reading MP3 files
Loaded CD is scratched or dirty. Clean the
CD as described in paragraph “CD” in section “INTRODUCTION”.

Required CD cannot be loaded
Another CD is already loaded. Press button
ı and remove the CD.

MP3 track length not displayedcorrectly
In certain cases (due to recording) MP3
track length can be displayed incorrectly.

Required source cannot be
selected
No CD loaded. Load the CD or the MP3 CD
you want to play.

Alfawiki.nl
318

Battery– checking the charge ............ 237– jump starting ..................... 182– recharging ......................... 219– replacing ........................... 238

Capacities .............................. 266
Car inactivity ........................... 164
Car maintenance ................ 223– periodical checks ................ 227– use of the car under heavy
conditions .......................... 227– service Schedule ................. 225– scheduled service ................ 224
Carrying children safely ............. 135– child restraint systems ......... 138– passenger’s seat compliance . 138– presetting for mounting the“Universal Isofix” child restraint
Alfawiki.nl 140-285
system .......................

Ceiling lights– front ................................. 78– rear .................................. 80
Checking fluid levels ................. 228
Child lock device ...................... 97
Cigar lighter ............................ 85
Climate control system .............. 53– automatic two-/three-zone .. 58– manual ............................. 55
CO2 emissions ......................... 270
CODE card .............................. 12
Containing running costs ........... 157
Controls ................................. 81
Correct use of the car ........ 149
Courtesy mirror light– bulb replacement ................ 206
Cruise Control .......................... 76
Dashboard and controls .... 6
Dashboard buttons ................... 72
Diesel fuel filter ....................... 236
Dimensions ............................. 261
Dipped beam headlights– bulb replacement ................ 201– control .............................. 70

SAFETYDEVICES– useful advice forlengthening the life ............. 239
Bodywork (cleaning) ................ 245
Bonnet ................................... 105
Boot ............................... 101-277– light replacement ................ 208
Brakes ................................... 256
Bulb (replacement) .................. 196– general instructions ............. 196– types of bulbs .................... 197

CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

ABS system ............................ 108
Accessories purchasedby the owner ........................ 116
Additional heater ..................... 69
Air bags ........................... 141-145
Air/pollen filter ........................ 236
Air vents ................................. 54
Alarm ..................................... 17
Alfa Romeo CODE system .......... 9
Alfa 159 Sportwagon ....... 275
Armrest– central .............................. 82– rear ........................... 83-84
Ashtray .................................. 87
ASR system ............................ 112
At the filling station .................. 125
Automatic headlight sensor ........ 71
Automatic two/three-zone
climate control system ............ 58

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESINDEXDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 319

IN AN
EMERGENCY

9:48

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

4-06-2008

INDEX

319-328 Alfa 159 GB

319

INDEXTECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

IN AN
EMERGENCYWARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGESCORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

SAFETYDEVICESDASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

319-328 Alfa 159 GB

320

4-06-2008

9:48

Pagina 320

Direction indicators– bulb replacement 200-201-204– control .............................. 70
Doors ..................................... 96
Electronic key .......................... 11
Engine– identification code ............... 252– marking ............................ 251– technical data .................... 253
Engine oil– consumption ...................... 232– level check ........................ 231– specifications ..................... 266
Engine starting ........................ 150
Environment protection ............. 127
EOBD system .......................... 115
External lights ......................... 70
Eyeglasses holder .................... 87
Fix&Go automatic (device) ....... 190
Flashing the headlights ............. 70
Fluid level checks ..................... 230
Fluids and lubricants ................. 267
Follow me home (device) ......... 71
Front ceiling lights– bulb replacement ................ 205– control .............................. 78
Front fog lights– bulb replacement ................ 202– control .............................. 72
Fuel– consumption ...................... 269– fuel cut-off switch ............... 81– fuel gauge ......................... 22
Fuel cut-off and power supply
switches ............................... 81
Fuel feed ................................ 255
Fuel filler cap .......................... 126
Fuses (replacement) .......... 209-292
Gearbox (use) ........................ 156
Glass/can holder ..................... 87
Glove compartment .................. 85
Glove compartment light– bulb replacement ................ 207
Handbrake ............................. 155
Hazard lights ........................... 72
Head restraints ................. 48-49
Headlight washer– control .............................. 73– fluid level .......................... 232
Headlights .............................. 65– adjusting headlight beam ..... 106– headlight adjustment abroad 107– headlight aiming device ....... 106– front fog light adjustment ..... 107
Hill Holder system .................... 111
Homelink ............................... 89
Identification data .................... 250
If an exterior light burns out .. 196-288
If an interior light burns out .. 205-290
Alfawiki.nl
Ignition device......................... 19

In an emergency ................ 181
Inactivity of the car .................. 164
Inertial fuel cut-off switch .......... 80
Installation of electric/
electronic devices ................... 117
Instrument panel ..................... 7-8
Instruments ............................ 21
Interior fittings ......................... 83
Interiors ................................. 247
Isofix universal(child's seat) .................. 140-286
Jacking the car ........................ 220
Labels– identification data ............... 250– bodywork paint .................. 251
Level checks ........................... 230
Main beam headlights– bulb replacement ................ 199– control .............................. 70
Manual climate control system ... 55
MSR system ........................... 114
Multifunction display ................ 25
Number plate light .................. 204
Oddments compartments .......... 88
Paint ..................................... 246
Parking .................................. 155

Radio frequency remote control:
ministerial certifications ........... 271
Radio transmittersand cellular telephones ........... 117
Rain sensor ............................. 74
Rear ceiling lights– bulb replacement ................ 205– control .............................. 80
Rear fog lights– bulb replacement ................ 202– control .............................. 72
Rearview mirrors ...................... 50
Reconfigurable multifunction
display ................................. 30
Rev counter ............................ 21
Reverse light– bulb replacement ................ 202
Right hand drive version .. 297

Technical Specifications ...... 249
Third brake light ...................... 204
Top speeds .............................. 263
Towing the car ......................... 221
Towing trailers– installing the tow hook ........ 159
T.P.M.S. systemAlfawiki.nl....................... 122

SAFETYDEVICES

Safe lock device ...................... 14
Safety devices .................... 129
S.B.R. system ......................... 131
Seat belts ............................... 130
Seats ..................................... 45
Side/taillights– bulb replacement ......... 200-203– control .............................. 70
Ski tunnel ............................... 84
Smart washing ........................ 74
Snow chains ........................... 163
Sound system ......................... 293
Steering ................................. 256
Steering lock ........................... 21
Steering wheel (adjustment) ..... 49
Sun curtains ............................ 88
Sun visors ............................... 88
Sunroof .................................. 93
Suspensions ............................ 256
Symbols ................................. 9

Transmission ........................... 255
Tyres– changing ........................... 183– inflation pressures ............... 260– snow tyres ........................ 162– standard tyres .................... 259– understanding tyre marking .. 257
VDC system ........................... 110
Warning lights andmessages .......................... 165
Weights ................................. 264
Wheel geometry ...................... 260
Wheel rims
– understanding rim marking ... 258
Wheels– changing ........................... 183– technical data .................... 257
Wheels and tyres ..................... 241
Windows (cleaning) ................. 247
Windscreen washer– control .............................. 75– fluid level .......................... 232
Windscreen wiper– blades .............................. 243– control .............................. 73– nozzle .............................. 244

CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR

Quick tyre repair kit
Fix&Go automatic .................. 190

Rims– understanding rim marking ... 258
Roof rack/ski rack ............ 106-284
Rubber hoses .......................... 243

WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES

Parking lights– control .............................. 72
Parking sensors ....................... 118
Performance ........................... 263
Power windows ....................... 99
Pretensioners .......................... 132
Protecting the environment ........ 127
Puddle light– bulb replacement ................ 208

DASHBOARDAND
CONTROLS

Pagina 321

IN AN
EMERGENCY

9:48

TECHNICALCARSPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE

4-06-2008

INDEX

319-328 Alfa 159 GB

321319-328 Alfa 159 GB

4-06-2008

9:48

Pagina 322

PROVISIONS FOR THE PROCESSING OF A VEHICLE
AT THE END OF ITS LIFE-CYCLE
For years now Alfa Romeo has been developing its global commitment towards the safeguarding and protection of the Environment
through the continuous improvement of its production processes and the making of increasingly more “eco friendly” products. With a view
to guaranteeing the best possible service to clients in full observance of environmental standards and in response to the obligations imposed by European Directive 2000/53/EC on end-of-life vehicles, Alfa Romeo offers its clients the possibility to hand in their vehicle*
at the end of its life span without additional costs.
The European Directive, in fact, provides for the take-back of the vehicle without the last holder or owner of the same incurring expenses due to the fact that the market value of the vehicle is zero or negative. In particular, in almost all of the countries of theEuropean Union, up until 1st January 2007, take-back of the vehicle free of charge only applies to vehicles registered from 1 July 2002
on, while, from 2007 on, take-back will be carried out free of charge, independently of the year of registration, provided that the vehicle still contains all its essential component parts (especially engine and body) and is free from additional waste materials.
Our contracted network of authorised treatment facilities has been carefully selected in order to provide a quality service to our customers
by de-polluting and recycling “End of Life Vehicles” to approved environmental standards. To find out the location of your nearest authorised treatment facility, offering free of charge take-back, simply contact one of our dealers or refer to the Alfa Romeo web site or callthe toll free number 00800 2532 0000.
* Passenger transportation vehicles to seat a max. of nine persons, having a total admissible weight of 3.5 t

Alfawiki.nl

319-328 Alfa 159 GB

4-06-2008

9:48

Pagina 323

RIGHT HAND DRIVE VERSIONDASHBOARD

fig. 1

1. Adjustable swivel side air vents - 2. Front side window demisting/defrosting vents - 3. Passenger’s air bag - 4. Fuel level gauge/engine coolant temperature gauge/engine oil temperature gauge (petrol versions) or turbocharger pressuregauge (diesel versions) - 5. Adjustable swivel centre air vents - 6. Upper central vent - 7. External lights control lever 8. Driver’s air bag and horn - 9. Instrument panel - 10. Windscreen wiper control lever - 11. Front side window demisting/defrosting vents - 12. Adjustable swivel side air vents - 13. Switches for external lights, trip meter reset and headlamp
aiming device. - 14. Dashboard fusebox lid - 15. Bonnet opening lever - 16. Sound system controls on the steering wheel(where provided) - 17. Driver’s knees air bag - 18. Cruise Control lever (where provided) - 19. Ignition device - 20. EnAlfawiki.nl
gine START/STOP button - 21. Heating/ventilation/climate controls - 22. Sound system (where provided) - 23. Glovebox - 24. Passenger’s knees air bag (where provided)323

319-328 Alfa 159 GB

4-06-2008

9:48

Pagina 324

INSTRUMENT PANELRIGHT HAND DRIVE VERSION

A. Speedometer (speed indicator)
B. Warning lights - C. Rev counter D. Multifunction display
h c m Warning lights ondiesel versions only
On diesel versions the rev counterend scale value is at 6000 rpm.

fig. 2 - Versions with multifunction display

A0E0309m

A. Speedometer (speed indicator)
B. Warning lights - C. Rev counter D. Reconfigurable multifunction display
c m Warning lights on diesel versions only
On diesel versions the rev counterend scale value is at 6000 rpm.

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 3 - Versions withreconfigurable multifunction display
324

A0E0310m

319-328 Alfa 159 GB

4-06-2008

9:48

Pagina 325

NOTES

Alfawiki.nl

319-328 Alfa 159 GB

4-06-2008

9:48

Pagina 326

Alfawiki.nl

319-328 Alfa 159 GB

4-06-2008

9:48

Pagina 327

Alfawiki.nl

319-328 Alfa 159 GB

4-06-2008

9:48

Pagina 328

COLD TYRE INFLATION PRESSURE
Tyres

Tyres

Tyres

Tyres

Tyres

205/55 R16 91V 215/55 R16 93V 225/50 R17 98W 235/45 R18 98W 235/40 ZR19 96Y (▼)

front

rear

front

rear

front

rear

front

rear

front

rear

average load bar

2.3

2.3

2.3

2.3

2.5

2.5

2.7

2.5

2.7

2.5

full load

2.6

2.6

2.5

2.5

2.9

2.7

2.9

2.7

3.0

2.8

bar

Space-saver
spare wheel
T125/80 R17
4.2(▼) Unchainable tyres. Size certified and admitted only for PIRELLI 235/40 ZR19 96Y. When using winter tyres, use 225/50 R17 98 tyres or 235/45
R18 98. Vehicles with TI fittings should not use 16” wheel rims.
Add +0.3 bar to the prescribed inflation pressure when the tyres are warm. Recheck pressure value with cold tyres.
With snow tyres, add +0.2 bar to the inflation pressure value prescribed for standard tyres.
Inflate tyres to full load pressures if driving at continuous speed exceeding 160 km/h.

ENGINE OIL REPLEACEMENT (litres)

Lubrication system engine

1.8

1.9 JTS - 2.2 JTS - 3.2 JTS

1.9 JTDM 8v
1.9 JTDM 16v

2.4 JTDM

4.5

5.4

4.6

6.4

Do not discard used oil in the environment.

REFUELLING (litres)
1.8 - 1.9 JTS - 2.2 JTS - 1.9 JTDM 8v - 1.9 JTDM 16v - 2.4 JTDM - 3.2 JTS
Fuel tank capacity

70

Reserve10

For cars with petrol engine, only use unleaded petrol with over 95 R.O.N. (Specification EN228).
For cars with diesel engine only use Diesel fuel for motor vehicles (Specification EN590).

CUSTOMER SERVICESTECHNICAL SERVICES - SERVICE ENGINEERING
Largo Senatore G. Agnelli, 5 - 10040 Volvera - Torino (Italia)
Fiat Group Automobiles S.p.A.
Publication no. 60431851 - 1st Edition - 06/2008

Alfawiki.nl

All rights reserved. Reproduction, even in part is prohibited without written permission
from Fiat Group Automobiles S.p.A.

SERVICEAlfawiki.nl